Home

Printronix T5308R

1. Factory Default Buffer Size Trickle Timeout Report Data Term Request to in K Time Status Ready Send 16 1 4 sec 10 sec Disable True On Line and BNF 1 16 1 2 sec 1 60 sec Enable On Line and BNF Off Line or BF 1 sec Off Line or BF On Line 2 sec On Line False 4 sec False True 8 sec 16 sec Off Poll Poll _ Idle One Char Printer Framing Character Reponse Response Enquiry Status Errors 00 Hex 0 ms Disable Disable Disable Enable 00 FF Hex 0 30 ms Enable Enable ENQ STX Disable ENQ Offline Process Disable Enable Notes Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 245 Chapter 246 3 SERIAL PORT SERIAL PORT Submenus Port Type This item allows you to select the type of printer serial port interface RS 232 or RS 422 to be used with its host The serial port can also be disabled The factory default is RS 232 Baud Rate Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer Baud rate is the speed at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and the printer The options for the RS 232 and RS 422 interfaces are 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 Baud NOTE If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200 and you experience data loss you may need to lower the baud rate or use
2. Factory Default Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Horizontal Vertical Prop DPI DPI Spacing 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Letter Gothic 120 DPI 72 DPI Enable 12 0 CPI 8 0 LPI Courier 60 to 400 DPI 72 to 400 DPI Disable 13 3 CPI 10 3 LPI OCR A 15 0 CPI OCR B 17 1 CPI 20 0 CPI Italic Print Slashed Left Right Top z Zero Margin 2 Margin 2 Margin Disable Disable 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces Forward Slant Enable 0 to 369 characters 0 to 369 characters 0 to 451 linespaces Backward Slant Bottom Print Define CR Auto LF Define LF Control Margin Char Set Code Code Code 06 0 linespaces CR CR Disable LF CR LF 8 0 LPI 0 to 451 linespaces CR Cr LF Enable LF LF 10 3 LPI 6 0 LPI Compressed Bold Elong Gothic EVFU Upr Case Print Alt Font Typeface Select Select Char 01 SOH Disable Elng BS Font SO Char 02 STX Enable Disable Char 03 ETX Enable Elng SO Font BS Char 03 ETX Disable Enable Char 09 HT Notes This menu is available only when you enable Admin User under PRINTER CONTROL 2 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 3 The presence of this menu depends on the LP Emulation selection under PRINTER CONTROL 185 Chapter 3 P SER XQ SETUP from page 185 P SER XQ SETUP Slew Text Host
3. SMT Status 4 PAA Select LP CTHI Active IGP XXX Tool Emulation Emulation 1 Emul Diagnostics Disable None See page 148 Standard IGP PGL Disable Enable CST 1 Simp Prot Conv PPI ZGL Enable CST 2 PPI TGL PPI IGL PPI STGL PPI DGL PPI MGL PPI JIEGL IGP VGL Host Power Saver Pwr Save Display Alarm Power up Auto Switching 15 minutes Enable English On Online Centronics 30 minutes Disable German Cont Beep Offline Serial 45 minutes French Off IEEE 1284 60 minutes Italian Twinax 1 240 minutes Spanish Coax 1 minute Portuguese Ethernet 5 minutes USB 10 minutes PTX Setup Cancel Key Ret Status Compatibility Del Char Ld Char SFCC Port frm Fls from Fls 21h Disable 3 Automatic Default 01 FF Enable Serial Laser E Net Stat Port P5000 USB T3000 IEEE 1284 T1006 Disable Notes E Net Data Port Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Appears only if the CT emulation is installed 2 Appears only if Ethernet is installed 3 When Coax Twinax interface is installed the factory default is Enable 4 Appears only if RFID is installed and there is no CST bundle in the Flash File System 7 Appears only if RFID is not installed and there is a CST bundle in the Flash File System 6 xxx represents the emulation name selected in the Active IGP Emul menu 146 PRINTER CONTROL fro
4. __ WEP Key 1 WEP Key 14 WEP Key14 WEP Key 14 WEP Key14 WEP Key 14 Bytes Byte9 Byte10 Byte11 Byte12 Byte13 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 2 Format Width BYTE1 BYTE2 BYTE3 BYTE4 Hexadecimal 128 Bits ASCII 40 Bits WEP Key 2 _ WEP Key 24 _ WEP Key 24 WEP Key 24 _ WEP Key 24 WEP Key 24 BYTES BYTE6 BYTE7 BYTE8 BYTE9 BYTE10 WEP Key 24 _ WEP Key 24 _ WEP Key 24 _ WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 BYTE11 BYTE12 BYTE13 Format Width BYTE1 Hexadecimal 128 Bits ASCII 40 Bits WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 34 WEP Key 3 4 BYTE2 BYTES BYTE4 BYTES BYTE6 BYTE WEP Key 3 4 BYTES WEP Key 3 4 BYTE WEP Key 3 4 BYTE10 WEP Key 3 4 BYTE11 WEP Key 34 BYTE12 WEP Key 34 BYTE13 264 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 Format Width BYTE1 BYTE2 BYTES BYTE4 Hexadecimal 128 Bits ASCII 40 Bits Notes Factory Default 4 This menu appears only if WEP Key 1 Width is set to 128 Bits WLAN PARAMS from page 264 WLAN PARAMS Submenus WEP Key 4 WEP Key 4 4 WEP Key 44 WEP Key 4 4 WEP Key 4 4 WEP Key 44
5. Auto LF Define LF 20 CPI Bold FF valid at Alt Char lt Code Condensed TOF Set Enable LF LF Enable Disable Enable Set 1 Disable LF CR LF Disable Enable Disable Set 2 Text Host Reset Cmd Form Form Position Command CFG Ld Length 12 Length Bottom of Line Enable Disable 4 or 6 inches 4 101 6 or 152 4 mm 4 Top of Line Ignore All Power up config 00 0 to 24 0 inches 0 00 to 609 6 mm Ignore CPI Current config Ignore LPI Factory config 190 24 or 36 lines 3 0 to 144 lines 04 1 06 6 or 08 5 inches 3 104 1 168 0 215 9mm 44 66 or 85 characters 3 00 0 to 13 6 inches 0 00 to 345 4 mm 0 to 272 characters Notes Factory Default 1 All three Form Length submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 2 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 3 The factory default value depends on the width of the printer model 4 All three Form Width submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically EPSON FX SETUP EPSON FX SETUP 1 3 from page 101 Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Character Character Epson Group Set Set 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Letter Gothic Standard Sets Epson Set ASC
6. cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteaees 357 Acessories s reio enga AE eee AAK Aaa eee A a KAn Eiin Naia bones 359 C ASCII Control Codes cccccccccccssesssssseesseeeees 361 D Media Cutter Installation ccccccccssseeeeees 363 Prepare The Printer cccccesssecceeessenceeeeeseneeeesesseneeeesnseneeenenseeeees 363 Installing The Cutter ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeaeessaeeen 364 Restore The Printer To Operation c ccceeeeeeeeeseeeesteeeeeeeees 365 Removing The Media Cutter ecccccceceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeens 365 Table of Contents E Media Cutter Tray Installation cccccce 367 Assembling The Media Cutter Tray cccccceccseeeseeeeeseeeeeseneeeeneeeees 367 Installing The Media Cutter Tray cccccceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeseeeens 368 F GOSS AY na aaoo a cea EAE 371 l Introduction Printronix Customer Support Center IMPORTANT Please have the following information available prior to calling the Printronix Customer Support Center e Model number e Serial number located on the back of the printer e Installed options i e interface and host type if applicable to the problem e Configuration printout See Printing A Configuration in the Quick Setup Guide e Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer e Description of the problem be specific e Good and bad sample
7. Config Config Config Config Configs Factory 1 Current All Factory Disable 1 to 8 1 to 8 Factory 1to8 1to8 Enable Power Up All 1to8 Name Config 1 Name Config 2 1 Name Config 3 1 Name Contig 4 1 Name Config 5 Name Config 6 1 3 Name Name Reset Auto Save Config 7 Config 8 Cfg Names 7 8 Je 1to8 All Enable Disable Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to 5 Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 This menu allows a 15 character string 6 115 Chapter 116 3 CONFIG CONTROL CONFIG CONTROL Submenus Load Config The printer can store up to eight configurations in memory This parameter allows you to select and load a specific configuration The factory default is Factory Save Config This option allows you to save up to eight unique configurations to meet different print job requirements This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings for each new job The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost if you turn off the printer If the Protect Configs parameter is enabled the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted first The factory default configuration cannot be changed See Saving A Configuration on page 88 for details The factory default is 1 Print Config This opt
8. 0 00 inches 2 Gap Mark Thresh 171 000 to 255 Paper Out Thresh 180 000 to 255 Paper Out Sensor Manual Calibrate Pwr Up Action HeadClose Action Online Auto Cal Gap Windowing Reflective Run Calibrate Disable Disable Disable Disable Transmissive Auto Cal Auto Cal Enable Enable Seek TOF Seek TOF Gap Length Cal in Peel Min Calib Use Label Threshold Dynamic Mode Delta Length Range Sensing 0 12 inches Disable 012 3 Enable 50 Disable 0 05 to 1 00 inches Enable 012 to 050 Disable 5 to 95 Enable Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Gap Mark Sensor and Paper Out Sensor work in conjunction as shown below Advanced Gap Table 6 Wren yon selectan Paper Out Sensor option in Gap Mark defaults to Sensor Disable Reflective Mark Reflective Gap Reflective Transmissive Advanced Notch Transmissive If you change the Gap Mark Sensor or Paper Out Sensor you must recalibrate the media 2 When Admin User is enabled in the PRINTER CONTROL menu you can change the unit value to millimeters Under the Units submenu in the MEDIA CONTROL menu enable the In Millimeters option 3 When Gap Mark Sensor Disable Gap or Mark the default is 12 When Gap Mark Sensor A
9. 345 Appendix A Media Table 19 Media General Information Type Roll fed die cut continuous or fanfold labels tags or tickets most direct thermal or thermal transfer materials Supply Roll 8 inch 203 mm maximum diameter on 1 5 inch 37 5 mm to 3 inch 76 mm diameter cores Internal Rewinder Accepts up to a 5 inch diameter roll of label backing Label Material Thermal transfer plain coated papers vinyl Mylar metallized paper non woven fabric fine woven fabric thermal visible light scannable paper infrared scannable paper thermal ticket tag stock thermally sensitive plastic stock Media Sensing Horizontally moveable sensor assembly When set to Gap the assembly detects die cut labels on liner media and notches and holes in tag stock When set to Mark it senses a black mark on the underside of tag or label stock When set to Advanced Gap it detects liner gaps between die cut labels with a dark background When set to Advanced Notch it detects notches or holes that interrupt a dark or black area on the underside of the media When set to Disable it senses no label indicators or ignores all existing label length indicators on the installed media Label Taken Sensor Detects when a printed label is at the printer exit throat Used only for Tear Off and Peel Off Media Handling modes Automatic Label Peel Off Peels and presents label to the operator one at a time
10. Ignore Mode This parameter instructs the IGP to ignore the character selected under the Select Character menu e Disable The IGP does not ignore any characters e Enable The IGP ignores the character specified in the Select Character menu The factory default is Disable 217 Chapter 218 3 Ignore Spaces e Disable Trailing spaces are not deleted from alphanumeric elements in a graphics pass e Enable Trailing spaces are deleted from alphanumeric elements in a graphics pass The factory default is Disable Ignore Text e Disable When disabled text in normal mode will be printed Attributes to be printed depend on the PGL Normal menu setting e Enable When enabled any line of text non PGL commands in normal mode will be ignored The factory default is Disable IGP100 Compatibl This parameter forces the output to correspond with IGP 100 printer output in cases where there are differences The options are Disable the factory default and Enable Intervention Req e Send To Host The printer sends a signal to the host computer when a printer fault or hold mode time out occurs NOTE If you select Send To Host make sure the Error Recover option under MEDIA CONTROL is set to Disable If Error Recover is not set to Disable Intervention Req will not work properly e Do Not Send No signal will be sent to the host computer The factory default is Send To Host Italic Print e Disable Text is pri
11. The FDU is a Java based program so you need the Java 2 Platform Standard Edition J2SE Java Runtime Environment JRE installed on your computer The Windows version of the J2SE JRE is included on the CD that comes with the printer in the form of an executable file Copy this file to your computer and double click it it will self extract and install the J2SE JRE on your computer NOTE If you have a Linux or Solaris system you can download the J2SE JRE for your system from http java sun com j2se If you have another UNIX system see your system administrator Conditions for use of the included Java Software are set forth in the Sun Microsystems Binary Code License Agreement http java com en download license jsp In the event of any conflicting terms the Binary Code License Agreement controls 1 Make a configuration printout of all saved configurations See page 93 2 Set the printer power switch to O Off 3 Disconnect the data signal cable s from the printer interface connectors 4 Connect a printer data cable to the parallel serial or ethernet port of the computer you will use to download the software Connect the printer data cable to the appropriate I O port of the printer On the printer control panel press and hold down the and J keys Without releasing the keys power the printer on When you see B01 STATUS on the on the LCD release the keys 7 Wait until you see PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
12. 331 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Check Paper Path Sensor did not detect the label present over the tear bar with Tear Off or Peel Off Media Handling mode enabled e The label was removed before the printer stopped printing or before the LCD Remove Label message displayed e The label slipped behind the platen roller e The label wrapped around the platen roller e Tear Off or Peel Off Media Handling mode was mistakenly selected Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution IGP PGL ERROR Yes Appears when the Deselect Fault from Error Fault option is Report on the front control selected from Error panel Report in the front panel INSUFFICIENT RAM Yes No Not enough RAM 1 Power off the printer for 15 Reboot Add RAM memory available for a seconds then power back printer function on again 2 If the message reappears increase the Glob Mem Adjust size in the PRINTER CONTROL menu and reboot the printer 3 If the message reappears replace the controller PCBA Write down the message and return it with the defective board LABEL MISSING Yes The Label Taken 1 Press the PAUSE key to continue printing and then wait for the LCD Remove Label message before removing the label 2 Open the pivoting deck reinstall the label close the deck press the PAUSE key and continue
13. Fonts Resident Fonts Compatible Scalable XOH SMO Support Enable Disable Hexdump Print IPDS Mode Fonts Disable See page 173 Enable Notes Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if the IPDS emulation and correct security key is is installed 171 Chapter 3 IPDS SETUP 172 IPDS Setup Default Font and Default Code Pag IPDS SETUP from page 171 Default Font Courier 10 Prestige 10 Courier it 10 OCRA APL 12 Courier 12 Prestige 12 Courier it 12 Prestige it 12 Boldface PSM Courier 15 Courier 17 1 Gothic 20 Times Roman 6 Times Roman 8 Times Roman 10 Times Roman 12 Times Roman B10 Times Roman B12 Times Roman B14 Times Roman B18 Times Roman B24 Times Roman 110 Times Roman 112 Times RomanBl10 Times RomanBl12 OCRB Default Code Pag 2 English USA Can English US Intl Internat Set 1 Symbols Set 7 Canadian French Austrian German Belgian Old Brazilian Canada French Danish Norw Finnish Swedish Italian Japanese Eng Portuguese Spanish Speak English UK Aust Germ ALT Dan Norw ALT Fin Swed ALT Spanish ALT Katakana French Azerty Graphic Escape Int Typographic Arabic Greek Hebrew PC Internat Set 5 Hebrew ALT PC Multilingual Latin 2 ROECE Icelandic Cyrillic Old OCRA OCRB DCF US Text Subset Turkish Latin 5 Euro US Can Euro Aust Germ
14. Media Cover Fanfold Media Media Hanger Guide ZX Media Hanger Bottom Panel Opening Deck Lock Lever 1 Open the media cover 2 Slide the media hanger guide outward to the end of the media hanger and rotate it upward to a horizontal position to remove any roll media 3 Place the fanfold media either behind or beneath the printer depending on the desired fanfold supply location Insert the first few labels through either the rear or bottom panel opening 4 Place the media over the media hanger flush against the back of the printer 5 Flip up the media hanger guide and slide it in against the outer edge of the fanfold media 6 Flip the fanfold tension arm down by pushing on it through the opening at the top of the media hanger guide 7 Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise until the deck swings upward Media Guard 10 11 Loading Fanfold Media Media Sensor Fixed Guide Width Guide Media Sensor Handle Media Damper Slide the media width guide outward to the end of the media damper Thread the media under the media damper and then between the platen rubber drive roller and the printhead You can also refer to the arrows on the printer frame or to the label inside the media cover for media loading instructions Verify that the left inside edge of the media is against the fixed guide on the bottom of the media damper Slide the medi
15. Sci DP 10 cpi basic set access the subset selection menu Sci DP 12 cpi by pressing the J key Once in the subset Sci LQ 10 cpi menu access the desired subset by pressing the and keys and select it by pressing the J key Primary and extended character subsets are accessed and selected in the same manner 202 Emulation Submenus Character Group and Character Sets Proprinter XL From page 189 This menu item selects the character set used by the printer The available character sets are shown below Character Group Proprinter XL Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 Data Gen Turk DEC Turkish IBM Turkish Siemens Turkish PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 Azeri Standard Arabic Sets Cyrillic Sets European Greek Sets Hebrew Sets Sets Sets ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek Hebrew Old ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Code Page 852 ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 Hebrew DEC ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek Latin 1 Hebrew MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek Win CP 1255 MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek Sakr CP14 Cyrillic 7 Bit Slavic 1250 Greek 851 Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Pag
16. Symptom Solution Explanation Communications Failures Check the interface cable Check the configuration to ensure the correct interface is enabled Verify the printer is receiving data by viewing the Job In Process indicator on the control panel CONTROL PANEL LCD message display is illuminated and the printer appears to be working but nothing is printing 10 11 12 Verify that the active emulation set on the control panel matches the emulation data sent to the printer Verify that the SFCC selection on the control panel matches the SFCC utilized within the emulation data that is sent to the printer Verify that the labels are the correct type direct or thermal transfer If using direct thermal media check that the media is loaded with the direct thermal side facing up Check that the transfer ribbon is correctly routed Route transfer ribbon with ink side down as it passes under the printhead Check that the printhead assembly is properly closed by making sure the printhead latch is fully engaged Verify that the ribbon and media are compatible incompatibility can cause extremely light printing Match the ribbon to the type of media being used Check the used sections of ribbon for a printed image Often times when ribbon and media are incompatible the image can be seen on the ribbon but it will not transfer to the media Check that the Print Intensity is correct Set th
17. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY WHETHER TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE CONTRACT OR OTHERWISE SHALL RED HAT PRINTRONIX ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE OR ANY PART THEREOF OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL WORK STOPPAGE COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THAT EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 6 U S Government Users The Embedded Software is a commercial item as that term is defined in 48 C F R 2 101 Oct 1995 consisting of commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 Sept 1995 Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 and 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7202 4 June 1995 all U S Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein 7 Miscellaneous This Agreeme
18. 000 000 000 000 000 000 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 MAC Address DHCP XXXXXXXXXXXX 2 Disable Enable 256 Notes Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if an Network Interface Card NIC is installed 2 You cannot change this value it is a display only item ETHERNET ADDRESS Submenus ETHERNET ADDRESS Submenus IP Address This item allows you to set the IP Address for the TCP IP protocol in four three digit segments SEG1 through SEG4 If the IP Address is assigned by Bootp ARP or DHCP it is dynamic and read only The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000 000 000 and 000 NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online Subnet Mask This item allows you to set the Subnet Mask for the TCP IP protocol in four three digit segments SEG1 through SEG4 If the Subnet Mask is assigned by Bootp Arp or DHCP it is dynamic and read only The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000 000 000 and 000 NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online Gateway Address This item allows you to set the Gateway Address for the TCP IP protocol in four three digit segments SEG1 through SEG4 If the Gateway Address is assigned by Bootp ARP or DHCP it is dynamic and read only The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000 000 000 and 000 NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online MAC Address This item is the Manufacturer s Assigned N
19. 358 Synthetic Label Synthetic Label Printronix Harsh Environment Resin Better abrasion resistance than wax More expensive than wax Good aesthetic appearance High environmental durability High physical durability Excellent aesthetic appearance Most expensive label tag combination Type Media Stock Ribbon Features Typical Applications Direct Thermal Paper Label Not Used Low cost Shipping Tag Ease of use Inventory tracking Synthetic Label Low environmental durability Limited label life Will fade and or discolor when exposed to heat sunlight or chemicals Thermal Transfer Paper Label Printronix Lowest cost thermal transfer Shipping Tag Wide Spectrum combination Inventory tracking Wax Most commonly used Product labeling Low environmental durability Compliance labeling Low abrasion resistance Longer life than direct thermal Thermal Transfer Paper Label Printronix Wax Mid range wax resin Same as economy Tag Resin Blend performance and applications with Synthetic Label characteristics at economy advantage of Tyvek and wax prices supporting Valeron Darker razor sharp smudge Polypropylene proof images Polyethylene Polyolefin and Valeron media Thermal Transfer Paper Label Printronix Better environmental Retail applications Tag Specialty Resin durability where labels are handled Excellent for most applications Compliance labeling High temperature environments Medic
20. E03G DSI ECXIWX message 324 E03H DSI ECXOWX message 325 E04A ISI NO TRA message 325 E04B ISI DIRECT message 325 E04C ISI PROTEC message 325 E06 NOT ALIGNED message 326 E07 ILLEGAL INS message 326 E08 FLOATINGPNT message 326 EAP Mode WLAN EAP menu 272 EAP Pswd 01 15 WLAN EAP menu 273 EAP Pswd 16 30 WLAN EAP menu 273 EAP User 01 15 WLAN EAP menu 273 EAP User 16 30 WLAN EAP menu 273 EAP User 31 32 WLAN EAP menu 273 Early Print Cmpl option Coax 208 Early Print Comp option IPDS 208 EC SOFTWARE FAIL fault message 326 Elong Alt Font option 208 Emulation option 209 Emulation submenus 193 Emulations overview 160 E NET INIT fault message 326 E NET READY fault message 326 E NET RESET fault message 326 ENTER to Stop fault message 327 Environmental information 350 Epson Set option 209 ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID fault message 327 ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX fault message 327 ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM fault message 327 ERROR IPDS needs 300 DPI Head fault message 327 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED fault message 327 ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING QUEUES fault message 328 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM fault message 327 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH fault message 327 ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE fault message 328 ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID fault message 328 Error Recover option 132 ERROR SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED fault message 328 ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX fault message
21. The signal will go high when the printer is ready to receive data The signal will go low when the printer is in the busy state which indicates that the printer input buffer is full and can no longer receive data e Software Handshaking XON and XOFF are software signals that control serial data flow between the printer and the host system When the printer input buffer is full the printer transmits an XOFF CTRL S character that signals the host to stop sending data When memory space becomes available in the input buffer the printer sends an XON CTRL Q character which tells the host that the printer is ready to receive more data If the printer appears to have communication problems the self test configuration test labels see page 238 and character hex dump mode see page 239 should be checked The tests can help identify printer configuration errors that can cause problems Data Exchange Both of these test procedures are covered in this chapter Configuration items to check include the following e Check that the data string being sent to the printer contains the correct information e Verify that the correct host interface port is being used and that the communication parameters match those of the host e g baud rate parity etc e Verify that the correct interface cable is installed between the host and the printer Interfacing The printer will not function properly with an incorrectly wired cable or the wr
22. Turkish Latin 2 ROECE Yugoslavian Multinational Notes Factory Default Although these options are listed vertically here use your plus and minus keys to cycle through the options when you are operating your printer SPC COAX SETUP SPC COAX SETUP 23 from page 97 SPC Type Logical Buf Intervention Buffer Translation PA1 Size Req Print Tbl PTX NI 1920 Send To Host Disable Avatar Comp 960 Do Not Send Enable 2560 3440 3564 PA2 Buffer Null Handling SPC SPC Space SFCC Char Reprint Null Supp Supp Disable Space Enable Disable User Defined Enable Ignore Disable Enable Set 1 lt gt Set 2 Set 3 _ User User User NL At Defined St1 4 Defined St2 4 Defined Stp MPP 1 5F 5F 5B On 40 to FF 40 to FF 40 to FF Off Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed 2 This menu appears only if Port Type under C T PORT is set to Coax 3 Appears only if CTHI emulation under PRINTER CONTROL is set to Simp Prot Conv 4 This menu appears only if you select the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu 169 Chapter 3 SPC TWINAX SETUP SPC TWINAX SETU
23. of characters horizontal vertical height width to be cached resolution x resolution x inches x inches x 8 The allowable range is 50 KBytes through 900 KBytes in 50 KByte increments The factory default is 900 KB NOTE For most applications the default settings for font memory are acceptable Therefore do not change the defaults unless your application requires an uncommon memory configuration Max Cached Char The Maximum Cached Characters option specifies the size of the largest character that can be stored in the font cache To calculate the memory requirement use this equation average horizontal resolution vertical resolution character height character width x x inches x inches For example with a print head that prints at 203 dpi you would use the following formula 203 X 203 X 1 X 1 5 151 8 Therefore select a value that is equal to or greater than 5 151 The closest available value is 6 KBytes The allowable range is 1 KByte through 20 KBytes in 1 KByte increments The factory default is 01 KBytes NOTE For most applications the default settings for font memory are acceptable Therefore do not change the defaults unless your application requires an uncommon memory configuration 157 Chapter 158 3 PRINTER CONTROL Standard Chars This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of standard text fonts The factory default is 340 and the range is from 0 to 512
24. 0 noA smojje pue uoneinByuos papeo ySB y JO Jequunu pue Spo nue ul Ay LNAWAYOsG yBnosu Yd S O19S aueu y SAe dsiq OUON Ady 193749 gor 1078s gor Sepoy SUulIUO pue uuo ASNWd apo apo apo usemjaq Ja UUd y s jpHoL BUIIYO 0 1 Uud S S AUI UC 0 Jo ULd S S SUIIJO O Jo ULd S S Key ASNVWd Spo nuslN SPOW SUllHO SpOlN SUuljUO uonduoseq uonng ul uoljouny ul uoljouny ul uoljoUuNn4 35 Controls And Indicators 2 Chapter Control Panel Keys cont anjen OU 0 1x9U ysu se ue sAeidsip pue onjea nuew AO YILNI 94 yOO UN o euu ewes y ye Shey YILNI C pue NMOQ A 94 SSeld PUOD9S uo JO GD 24 UO s ejds p G4X901 HOLIMS Y3LN3 p y 0 s Ae YALNA 9U J ON pajoajas u q sey y Hunepu njen JO uodo y 0 x u s e dde u ysu se uy anyeA JO uodo peAe dsip au sjoajas PON NU WN ul Aey YILNI r 94 Bulssald JUAUND y S 99 S uoN uoN Ady YIN apo nuaw suoloejas NU W apo 3y S 29 9S pue SUIIHO g urew uaam aq S O1NS nu W au s1998 aS JaUUd y seyel Key NNAW apo nusyy ul Ae NMOG aiqeug nejep 10 98 OU pale Su s uodo vLeu u XBUIM XBOD y UBYM IA MOH aiqesiq ynejap Ayojoe ay JON eyep yeu jo Bunuud yusAdid pue sayjng sayud UMOP 348 pa qeue u ym y Ul Byep e 189 9 IM Huissesd uo UO Oe as NUBW Jayn
25. 235 Windows Driver 289 WIRELESS ADAPTER NOT COMPATIBLE fault message 343 WLAN ADDRESS menu 261 submenus 262 WLAN EAP menu 272 WLAN EAP menu Auth Method 272 EAP Mode 272 EAP Pswd 01 15 273 EAP Pswd 16 30 273 EAP User 01 15 273 EAP User 16 30 273 EAP User 31 32 273 Reset EAP Pswd 273 Reset EAP User 273 WLAN PARAMS menu 263 submenus 265 Word Length option 246 WPA Cipher option 268 WPA Mode option 268 WPA P Phs option 268 X XON XOFF 247 xxx Diagnostics option 151 Y Year option 278 392 178425 001E
26. 714 368 2354 Europe Middle East 83 1 46 25 1900 Fax 33 1 46 25 1919 Africa Asia 65 548 4116 Fax 65 546 1588 Or visit our website at www printronix com 355 Appendix B _ Supplies And Accessories 356 Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons The following is a list of Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer ribbons Printronix Wide Spectrum Wax Ribbon 8300 Provides superior print quality for coated and uncoated paper and tag stocks Printronix Wax Resin Blend Ribbon 8500 Provides excellent high speed print quality with premium durability performance on a wide range of thermal transfer receptive papers and films Printronix Flood Coat Specialty Wax Resin Blend Ribbon 8550 Designed for use on spot coated and flood coated labels With this ribbon the need for protective varnishes on flood coated labels is eliminated which can reduce the cost of labels Printronix Specialty Resin Ribbon 8600 A premium resin formula for excellent image and scuff resistance while achieving premium print quality on a wide range of synthetic films and coated papers Printronix Harsh Environment Resin Ribbon 8700 Provides the highest heat chemical and abrasion resistance for use with high end synthetic facestocks When used with the proper polyester media meets UL CSA regulatory requirements Printronix Gasoline Resistant Specialty Resin Ribbon 8770 Designed for high temperature and solvent resistanc
27. Automatic Label Peel Off is supported only when the internal rewinder is installed The internal rewinder is a factory or field installed option 346 l Tag Specification Mark Sensing Black Mark on underside of K ra Recommended Cross Perf D Location 2 r Direction of Media Motion ll Tag Specification Gap Sensing cH o Recommended Cross Perf Location E dA a Y Direction of Media Motion Media lll Label Specification Gap Sensing r Direction of Media Motion Figure 9 Media Dimensions Table 20 Media Specifications O J A Label Width Range B Backing Width Range C Min Gap Hole Notch Height K Min Refl Mark Height l Min Refl Mark Width E Media Thickness Range G Width of Inter label gap hole D Media Length Range Continuous Batch Mode Tear Off Strip Mode Tear Off Mode Peel Off Mode Cut Mode T5X04 SL5X04 MP2 0 75 4 5 in 19 1 114 3 mm 0 75 4 5 in 19 1 114 3 mm 0 10 in 2 54 mm 0 10 in 2 54 mm 0 5 in 12 7 mm 0025 010 in 0635 254 mm 0 25 0 50 in 6 35 12 7 mm T5X06 SL5X06 MP2 2 0 6 8 in 50 8 172 7 mm 2 0 6 8 in 50 8 172 7 mm 0 10 in 2 54 mm 0 10 in 2 54 mm 0 5 in 12 7 mm 0025 010 in 0635 254 mm 0 25 0 50 in 6 35 12 7 mm 0 25 in 6 35mm 99 in 251
28. BYTES BYTE6 BYTE7 BYTES BYTE BYTE10 WEP Key 4 4 WEP Key 4 4 WEP Key 4 4 Default WEP Reset WEP WPA BYTE11 BYTE12 BYTE13 Key Keys 0 Disable 1 4 Enable H WPA U WPA _ WPA P Phs _ WPAP Phs Reset WPA Cipher P Phs 01 15 16 30 31 32 P Phs TKIP XXX 8 AES TKIP AES Notes Factory Default 3 A 1 32 character case sensitive string Characters can be alphanumeric symbols or spaces 4 This menu appears only if WEP Key 1 Width is set to 128 Bits 6 This menu appears only if a Symbol LA5127 RF card is installed WLAN PARAMS Submenus Signal Strength This menu displays the strength of the wireless signal NOTE This is a display value only and cannot be changed Operation Mode Allows you to select the way the Wireless option communicates e Infrastructure the default The Wireless option must go through an Access Point e Pseudo IBSS Proprietary peer to peer communication without an Access Point The two peers must be specific to one manufacturer e Ad Hoc Standard peer to peer communication without an Access Point The two peers can be from different manufacturers 265 Chapter 266 3 WLAN PARAMS SSID Name A 1 32 character case sensitive string that identifies the Extended Service Set Identification ESS_ID network the unit is part of ESS_ID is also called NET_ID These characters can be alphanumeric symbols
29. Bold Chars This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of bold text fonts This menu will not take effect unless you save it in a configuration and the printer is powered up with that configuration The factory default is 448 and the range is from 0 to 512 Extra Bold Char This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of extra bold text fonts The factory default is 504 and the range is from 0 to 512 NOTE For most applications the default settings for font memory are acceptable Therefore do not change the defaults unless your application requires an uncommon memory configuration OCR A Chars Character weight adjustment of resident OCR A characters The factory default is 384 and the range is from 0 to 512 OCR B Chars Character weight adjustment of resident OCR B characters The factory default is 304 and the range is from 0 to 512 Tall Characters Increases the point height of resident Intellifont characters e Enable Increases the point height of resident Intellifont characters approximately 10 e Disable Standard resident font character point height is maintained The factory default is Disable PRINTER CONTROL Submenus Batch Counter Displays the number of pages remaining in a print job e Enable The Pages remaining to be printed will display on the second line of the control panel LCD This feature is supported in PGL and PPI ZGL only The PGL Execut
30. Host Override Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host or continues to use the current operator panel settings e Disable Allows these host commands to override operator panel settings line length forms length lines per inch LPI characters per inch CPI print quality and text orientation Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting No values will change upon initial selection of the Disable option e Enable The operator panel settings override the host commands The factory default is Disable Host PI Disable The host does not send PI signals e Enable The host sends PI signals The Data Bit 8 configuration option must be disabled to transmit the PI line to the printer The factory default is Disable l 2 5 Selection This option is added to be compatible with a special IGP X00 customization Usually if Interleaved 2 5 bar codes have an odd number of digits a leading zero is inserted in front of the data However this special IGP X00 customization gives you the option of adding a space character at the end of the bar code instead e Leading Zero A leading Zero is inserted in front of the data e Trailing Space A space is inserted at the end of the data instead of a leading zero e X2 DPD When selected I 2 5 bar code with a magnification X2 will use the specially configured ratios 3 3 6 5 rather than 3 6 9 12 for compatibili
31. Minutes MIN Hours HR or Days DAY as specified by the Renew Life Units before warning that a new Kerberos password is needed e Seconds The range is 0 604800 and the default is O e Minutes The range is 0 10080 and the default is 0 e Hours The range is 0 168 and the default is 0 e Days The range is 0 7 and the default is 0 NOTE Whatever submenu is selected in Renew Life Units will display on the Renew Life SEC menu For example if you select Days the Renew Life SEC menu name will change to Renew Life DAY 271 Chapter WLAN EAP 3 WLAN EAP WLAN EAP 2 from page 105 272 Auth EAP EAP User EAP User EAP User Reset EAP Method Mode 01 15 16 30 31 32 User Open None Shared LEAP Kerberos 1 PEAP LEAP 2 TTLS l EAP Pswd EAP Pswd EAP Pswd Reset EAP 01 15 16 30 31 32 Pswd Notes Factory Default 1 This option appears only if a Symbol 4121 radio card is installed 2 This menu appears only if a Cisco Aironet 350 radio card is installed WLAN EAP Submenus Auth Method This feature allows the user to select the authentication method used for the wireless network interface e Open the default Selects open authentication Shared Selects shared key authentication e Kerberos Selects Kerberos authentication for use when a Symbol 4121 RF card is installed e LEAP Selects
32. Numerics 06 HOST REQUEST fault message 317 08 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT fault message 317 1284 parallel interface 295 15 COMM CHECK fault message 317 20 CPI Condensed option 193 203 DPI fault message 318 22 INVALID ADDR fault message 317 27 CU TIMED OUT fault message 317 28 CU NOT ENAB fault message 317 300 DPI fault message 318 33 HEAD OPEN Timeout fault message 318 40V POWER FAIL fault message 318 5225 World Trade option 193 A Absorb After PN option 193 Absorb After PY option 194 Accessories 355 ACK NAK 247 Acoustic noise levels 351 Active Char Set option 194 Active IGP Emul option 150 Active IGP Emulation option 114 Admin User option 155 159 Advanced gap 71 Advanced notch 71 Al 00 Spaces option 194 Alarm option 152 Alarm printer 316 Alt Char Set option 194 Alt Set 80 9F option Coax Twinax TN3270 TN5250 195 Alt Set 80 9F option P Series Serial Matrix Epson FX 194 Ambient light Validator failure fault message 318 Amp Hour Used option 275 Ant Diversity option 266 Antenna option 266 Append Rotated option 195 ASCII Data Port option 259 Auth Method option 267 Auth Method WLAN EAP menu 272 Auto Calibrate option 113 139 Auto calibrate running 72 Auto FF at PN option 195 Auto Label Width option 128 Auto LF option P Series P Series XQ 195 Auto LF option Serial Matrix Proprinter XL Epson FX 195 Auto Locking option 155 Aut
33. RS 422 You also may need to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance The factory default is 9600 Word Length Sets the length of the serial data word The length of the data word can be set to 7 or 8 bits and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the host computer The factory default is 8 Stop Bits Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word Either 1 or 2 stop bits can be selected The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting in the host computer The factory default is 1 Parity The options are Odd Even Mark Sense or None The setting must match the corresponding parity setting in the host computer The factory default is None SERIAL PORT Submenus Data Protocol You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the host interface requirements XON XOFF the default The printer controls the flow of communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off In some situations such as when the buffer is full or the timing of signals is too slow or too fast the printer will tell the host to stop transmission by sending an XOFF character An XOFF character is sent when the number of empty bytes in the buffer is less than or equal to 25 percent of the buffer size If the host keeps sending data after an XOFF is sent the printer firmware will continue to send an XOFF for every 16 characters received When cleared the print
34. Sensed Distance Slew Stop Bits Thermal Transfer Media Thermal Transfer Printing Transmissive Sensing Twinax Media supplied in a roll format usually wound on a 1 inch or 3 inch cardboard core The T5000 media hanger assembly accepts both core sizes Gap Mark Sensor Gap Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch The Sensed Distance value is the physical length of one label plus the length of one gap Gap Mark Sensor Mark The Sensed Distance value is the physical distance from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next Vertical paper movement The signal which indicates the end of a character or element Media specifically designed to work with a ribbon for image transfer In Thermal Transfer mode compatibility between the ribbon and the media is critical in producing a high quality long lasting image A printing method in which the printhead presses a specially coated ribbon against the media The printhead elements react with the ribbon and bond the image to the media Use of the upper media sensor to transmit infrared light through the top of media which is then received by the lower media sensor to detect gaps holes or notches for determining the Top of Form position on labels or for indicating a Paper Out condition Twinaxial A type of cable with two wires surrounded by insulation and a braided shield 375 Appendix F 376 Index Symbols ADnn Dot Slew option 193
35. Standard 2 ips Coarse Forward Only 1 to 6 ips Fine Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 The Peel Off option under Media Handling must be enabled for this menu to function 2 The Continuous option under Media Handling must be enabled for this menu to function 3 In increments of 0 01 inch 4 Default is Fine on Small Label Printer 5 Menu available only if Small Label Printer option is installed MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Print Intensity This option specifies the level of thermal energy from the printhead to be used for the type of media and ribbon installed Large numbers imply more heat thermal energy to be applied for each dot This has a significant effect on print quality The print intensity and speed must match the media and ribbon type to obtain the best possible print quality and barcode grades The range is from 15 to 15 The factory default is 3 119 Chapter 120 3 MEDIA CONTROL Print Speed This option specifies the speed in inches per second ips at which the media passes through the printer while printing The range is from 1 to 10 ips in increments of 1 ips The factory default is 6 ips NOTE The maximum print speed varies based on maximum printer width and dot per inch dpi resolution of the printhead installed 203 or 300 dpi See Table 18 on page 345 Print Mode This option spe
36. dwn extension of each file you want to download to the printer 290 Download Mode 10 At the command prompt type copy b filename dwn LPT1 lt Enter gt where filename dwn is file name you noted in step 9 NOTE If you are loading the file using the LPT2 port on the computer type 11 the following command copy b filename dwn LPT2 lt Enter gt where filename dwn is a file you noted in step 9 If you are loading the file using the serial port on the computer type the following commands mode COM1 9600 N 8 1 P lt Enter gt copy b filename dwn COM1 lt Enter gt where filename dwn is a file you noted in step 9 The 9600 baud rate is the only selection some systems can use The baud rate information entered in the above commands must match the Baud Rate setting in the SERIAL PORT menu saved in the Power Up Config You can download the fonts one at a time by entering one file name per the copy command or you can copy multiple files in one copy command To download one file at a time enter the following at the command prompt copy b filename dwn LPT1 lt Enter gt To download multiple files enter the following at the command prompt for example copy b filenamel dwn filename2 dwn LPT1 lt Enter gt While the font file is copied into the flash memory the printer LCD informs you of the download process and status After the new file successfully downloads into memory the printer resets itself and goe
37. g Appears only if RFID is installed and there is no CST bundle in the Flash File System 2 Appears only if RFID is not installed and there is a CST bundle in the Flash File System QUICK SETUP Submenus Print Intensity This option specifies the level of thermal energy from the printhead to be used for the type of media and ribbon installed Large numbers imply more heat thermal energy to be applied for each dot This has a significant effect on print quality The print intensity and speed must match the media and ribbon type to obtain the best possible print quality and barcode grades The range is from 15 to 15 The factory default is 3 Print Speed This option specifies the speed in inches per second ips at which the media passes through the printer while printing The range is from 1 to 10 ips in increments of 1 ips The factory default is 6 ips NOTE The maximum print speed varies based on maximum printer width and dot per inch dpi resolution of the printhead installed 203 or 300 dpi See Table 18 on page 345 107 Chapter 108 3 QUICK SETUP Print Mode This option specifies the type of printing to be done e Transfer Indicates Thermal Transfer printing ribbon installed e Direct Indicates Direct Thermal printing no ribbon and requires special heat sensitive media The factory default is Transfer Media Handling This option specifies how the printer will handle the media labels or t
38. media handling option is enabled The allowable range is 0 50 inches to the current Label Length value setting up to a maximum of 12 80 inches in 01 inch increments The factory default is 0 00 inches QUICK SETUP Submenus Label Length This option specifies the user selected Label Length in inches or millimeters In most applications the user selected Label Length will match the physical label length Physical label length is the actual label length of the media installed When setting label length consider the following Label Length can also be manually entered via the control panel MEDIA CONTROL menu or sent via host computer using the appropriate software command A Host Forms Length Label Length value sent from the host computer will override and change the manually entered Label Length value in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu e Physical Label Length is the actual measurable length of the label The following list of different media types explains how the physical label lengths are determined e Die cut labels measurable length of the removable label leading edge to trailing edge This does not include the liner material or gap e Tag Stock with notches or holes measurable length from the trailing edge of one notch or hole to the leading edge of the next notch or hole e Tag Stock with black marks on underside measurable length from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the
39. on the LCD before doing the next step This can take about a minute to appear depending on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer 8 On your computer create a directory named download at the root level of the hard drive e g C download on a Windows computer 9 Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer s CD drive 10 Copy the FDU jar file from the CD to your computer 11 Open the readme txt file on the CD There are two emulation sets with corresponding part number files from which to choose CT IPDS IGP ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL TN IGP ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL Both emulation sets include the LP emulation They are offered in two file formats exe and prg You can use either format with the FDU 280 12 13 14 Identify which emulation set you want to download into the printer and note the filename that corresponds to that emulation The filename is a six digit number plus exe or prg For example 123456 exe or 123456 prg This is the file you will download into the printer Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 8 Double click the FDU jar file for command line prompt users type java jar fdu jar lt Enter gt It will launch in its own window Use the FDU to enter the emulation part number to select the I O connection and its corresponding settings and to initiate the download IMPORTANT Do not interrupt the downloading process once it ha
40. or spaces Reset SSID Name Allows you to reset the SSID name Min Xfer Rate Allows you to set the minimum speed at which the Wireless Option will accept a connection in millions bits per second The options are Auto negotiate 1Mb sec 2Mb sec 5 5Mb sec and 11Mb sec The factory default is Auto negotiate Channel Allows you to select the RF channel The options are Default the factory default and 1 15 Ant Diversity 802 11b only or Antenna 802 11b g The RF antenna to use e Diverse the default Select when you want to use the antenna with the best reception 802 11b only e Primary Select when you want to use the Primary antenna on the RF card 802 11b and 802 11 b g Default setting for 802 1 1b g e Auxiliary Select when you want to use the Auxiliary antenna on the RF card 802 11b and 802 11 b g Preamble The length of the preamble in transmit packets Default the default The Wireless option automatically determines the length e Short For newer printers which can handle higher transfer rate speeds e Long For older printers which cannot handle higher transfer rate speeds Power Mgmt This allows you to set power save mode and sleep time A value specifying the sleep time in milliseconds will be provided If set to zero power save mode will be disabled The range is 0 1000 ms and the factory default is 0 ms WLAN PARAMS Submenus Transmit Power The power level as
41. send a response character n milliseconds later configurable from the Poll Character xx MS on the front panel from 0 through 30 This n milliseconds is called the poll delay The poll character will be removed from the input data stream and will not be processed This may cause problems with the transmission of binary data e g control codes bit image etc If a poll delay is started due to the receipt of a poll character and another poll character is received the second poll character has no effect and is removed from the input data stream If a transition from buffer full to empty or online to offline occurs during a poll delay the new printer state will be sent at the end of the poll delay 247 Chapter 3 SERIAL PORT The response characters are described below Printer State Response Online and Buffer Empty CR Online and Buffer Full 3 Offline and Buffer Empty 0 Offline and Buffer Full 2 e Series1 2 Char This protocol behaves exactly the same as the Series 1 Char except there is a two character response to the host The response characters are described in the following table Printer State Response Online and Buffer Empty 1CR Online and Buffer Full 3 CR Offline and Buffer Empty OCR Offline and Buffer Full 2 CR e DTR The printer controls the data flow by sending this hardware signal to the host If there is enough room in the printer buffer the printer will send a h
42. you can allocate more memory to forms fonts and logos by increasing the Glob Mem Adjust value The amount of installed DRAM is 32 MB The range is from 0 to 12160 KBytes and the default is 9120 KBytes NOTE Due to the large amount of memory required for font support the global memory adjust option is not available for P7000 H Series printers Max Font Buffer The maximum amount of DRAM allocated to store the global font information of any resident and downloaded scalable font e g Intellifont TrueType Each font contains its own global font information that is required for all character generation from that font Some fonts may require more font buffer memory than others to generate characters Insufficient font buffer memory causes characters to be missing on the page and prints blank If a font needs more memory for character generation increase the Max Font Buffer value to allow the printer to print the missing character The range is from 100 to 1800 Kbytes and the factory default is 100 Kbytes PRINTER CONTROL Submenus Max Cache Memory The Maximum Cache Memory option specifies the size of the memory block that can be allocated to the font cache The font cache stores bitmaps that are created on demand from the font outlines stored on the printer flash The cache allows the printer to print scalable fonts at optimum speed To calculate the memory requirement use this equation average average character character
43. 1 1 0 Hours 16 0 Volts 9 5 Volts 3 12 0 Hours 12 5 16 0 Volts 8 5 11 5 Volts Notes Factory Default 1 Available only when Battery Monitor is set to Enable in the BATTERY CONTROL menu Functional only when the printer is connected to a power cart via serial interface and the cart has an ICP Intelligent Control Panel option 2 You cannot change this value it is a display only item BATTERY CONTROL Submenus Battery Monitor e Disable the default When set to Disable the other Battery Control menus do not display The Serial Port is restored to normal use and the Serial Port menu displays e Enable When set to Enable the other Battery Control menus display The Serial Port is reserved for monitoring the power cart and the Serial Port menu does not display When Battery Monitoring has been enabled and the printer is online the second line of the LCD message displays the time remaining as Batt XXX XX Hrs The factory default is Disable 274 BATTERY CONTROL Submenus Time To Go This displays the Time to Go status on the LCD in hundredths of an hour NOTE This menu is available only when you select Enable in the Battery Monitor submenu When the power cart charger is connected to an AC outlet the Time To Go will be 0 00 Hours This message updates approximately every two minutes Percent Charge This displays the Charge Percentage in tenths of a percent NOTE This menu is av
44. 3270 option is installed 4 Appears only if the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu is selected IGP VGL eH SETUP page 181 Select SFCC Power up X Power up F Power up PY LPI Btm Margin Ctl Text Length Autoeject Copy Count Host Form Length Slash 0 Repeat Form Ignore Dots Append Rotated Truncate Alpha True Vert 1 10 Absorb After PY UPC Descenders Select SO Char Rot Char Size Ignore Spaces Ignore Lxx Cmd Midline PY Width Limit Absorb After PN Expanded Font Auto FF at PN Vertical Density PDF Size Comp C128 Mode Comp C39 Compatbl Ignore Chars Ignore Ch 1 Ignore Ch 2 Data Bit 8 Cmd Resolution Dnn Dot Slew Barcode var Character Group Standard Sets Uniform Fonts Prop Line Length Printer PI Host PI Max PI 16 PPI ZGL SETUP 2 Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter PPI ZGL Programmer s Reference Manual NOTES PPI TGL SETUP 2 Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter PPI TGL Programmer s Reference Manual PPI IGL SETUP 2 Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter PPI IGL Programmer s Reference Manual Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Appears only if Active IGP Emul is set to IGP VGL in the Printer Control Menu 2 Appears only if Active IGP Emul is set to PPI emulation 3 Appears only on 203 dpi prin
45. 328 ERROR WRITING TO FLASH fault message 328 ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM fault message 328 ESC d command option 209 ETHERNET ADDRESS menu 256 submenus 257 ETHERNET PARAMS menu 258 submenus 259 Ethernet Speed option 259 ETX ACK 247 EVFU Select option 209 Exchange data 302 Expanded Font option PGL 209 Expanded Font option VGL 209 Expanded Fonts option IPDS 210 Ext Execute Copy option 210 Extended Subset option 210 Extra Bold Char option 158 F FAN WARNING fault message 329 Fanfold media 46 Fault 295 Fault message 06 HOST REQUEST 317 08 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT 317 15 COMM CHECK 317 203 DPI 318 22 INVALID ADDR 317 27 CU TIMED OUT 317 28 CU NOT ENAB 317 300 DPI 318 33 HEAD OPEN Timeout 318 40V POWER FAIL 318 Ambient light Validator failure 318 BAD VFU CHANNEL 318 BAR CODE IMPROPER Data Format 318 BAR CODE QUIET Zone too small 319 BATT HIGH VOLT 319 BATT LOW VOLT 319 BUFFER OVERFLOW 319 BUFFER OVERRUN 320 CALIBRATION Warning 320 Calibration warning 320 CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel Off 320 Checksum Failure 320 CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH 321 CONTRAST TOO LOW Check media 321 CUTTER FAULT Check Cutter 321 DEACTIVATING HOST SERIAL 321 DIAGNOSTICS PASSED 321 DIRECT THERMAL Remove Ribbon 321 DO NOT POWER OFF 322 DOWNLOADING TO VALIDATOR 322 EC SOFTWARE FAIL 326 E NET INIT 326 E NET READY 326 E NET RESET 326 ENTER to Stop 327 ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID 327 381 ERROR
46. AEAEE 241 PARALLEL PORT SubMenus ccscccccccccccccsssssssseateeeeeeeees 242 SERIAL POR Wisc nie ei E EA AG oe Bae 245 SERIAL PORT SubMenuS cccccccssceceeeceeeeesessssseeaeeeeeeeeees 246 C T POBT EEE EA es dates Sac evden its BES bac 253 C T PORT SubMemuS iis r e aa aaia iaaa 253 USB POR T nonae a e ea aa a a a a a A 254 USB Port Submen ssania ed ea es es 254 ETHERNET PORT rarene ioaea pesca tind Eaa AEE eaaa 255 ETHERNET PORT Submenu c ccccccccccccccccessssssssseeeeseeeeeeess 255 ETHERNET ADDRESS s2c c tenet ee eet ees 256 ETHERNET ADDRESS SubmemuS ccccccceeeeseeseeeceeeeeeeeees 257 ETHERNET PARAMS a aai todas sind ives itaaaradidnichiivinaketeaeat 258 ETHERNET PARAMS SubmMenue cccccccceeesssssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 259 WLAN ADDRESS cccccccccccccecceseessneeeeeeseeeeeeesecsseeaaseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 261 WLAN ADDRESS Submenu ccccccesseeeceeeeeeseesssssseeeeeees 262 WLAN PARAMS oiean aier aa a a trees e a hanes 263 WLAN PARAMS SubMemusG ccccccceeessseeeeeeeeeeeceessssssaeeeeeees 265 KERBEROS PARAMS iaratn ae A ee i i A e 269 KERBEROS PARAMS SubmMems cccccccccccssssssssseaeeeeeeeeees 269 WLAN EAP arina e A O iouhena id osedsesvieaads acd 272 WLAN EAP Submenus ccccccccceccesssseseeeeeeceeeesessssssseeeneeees 272 BATTERY CONTROL cccccccccccccssseessseseeeseceeeceesessssseseaeeeeeeeeeeeees 274 BATTERY CONTROL S
47. Base 1 Align the flanges of the cutter tray bin with the slots in the cutter tray base 2 Push the flanges into the slots then push the cutter tray bin downward to secure it 3 Attach the cutter tray bin in a position so that the labels will not interfere with cutter operation For longer labels attach the cutter tray bin to a lower position for shorter labels attach it to a higher position 367 Appendix E _ Installing The Media Cutter Tray Installing The Media Cutter Tray Figure 2 Placing the Media Tray Cutter in Position 1 Position the output area of the printer adjacent to the edge of the supporting table or stand 2 Open the media cover and slide the lip of the media cutter tray over the lip of the printer base pan 368 Figure 3 Installing the Media Cutter Tray 3 Rotate the media cutter tray into position with the tray resting against the table 4 Close the media cover 369 Appendix E _ Installing The Media Cutter Tray 370 F Glossary Baud rate BIT Boot up Buffer Coax Configuration Continuous Media Continuous Media Handling Mode Controller Baud Rate is the number of information bits that can be transmitted between the printer and the computer in one second For example one baud equals one bit per second in a series of binary signals Both the printer and the computer must be configured to the same baud rate Binary digIT A di
48. CONTROL SubmentS cccecceeeeseceeeseeeeeeeneeeteneeetees 119 CALIBRATE CTRL aaa aeaaeae aaae ouaa s aa aaa naia Ep aa ania Eiaa aaia 138 CALIBRATE CTRL SubmenUuSs eeeeeeeeeeeeeeerieerrreerreereerre 139 PRINTER CONTROL oaee loien ranie aperea a ea a dedtes 146 PRINTER CONTROL Submenmts ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseneeetens 148 EMULATIONS inira tes oor ant adie ee ates 160 OVEIVIOW A eran e eee A au deta ark ation tees ET 160 GOAX SETUP E E due stees det pact eevhivietieeatandes de eens 164 TIWINAX SETUP cinri aac oe htiel dessitehs vedight koh cane Teens 167 Table of Contents SPC COAX SETUP wise ten sel hiiedt satel E TTE E 169 SPCTWINAX SET UP aoea a a eaae aie eias 170 IPDS aE E ETEA E E E EE TO A NS 171 TN3270 SETUP nr OE nation a a e ete eee 175 TN5250 SETUP eae ae a a aa a aa aae aaa Geeta de 177 IGP PGL e AI E E ETE davies ipeetbcanccelestidine hive 179 LEA e E EMU A A E EE EE S E A S S EA A EN 181 P SERIES SETUP E E E 183 P SER XQ SETU Pa apea epea fete aa aaar a aa adaa t ear ae a Aa aa ae 185 SERIAL MATRIX SETUP a ae ae e aaa a a Ea eaa ataa 187 PROPRINTER XL SETUP ccccsccccccccceecceseesseesseeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeees 189 EPSON PX SETUP isieriecteciencees ee rar ar inana aa aaa ERa 191 Emulation SUbMENUS sepeser aieeaa i aa 193 DIAGNOSTICS E E ETE N TE 237 DIAGNOSTICS SubMemnus c ccccscccesceeeeceessssssseeeseeeeeeeeess 238 PARALLEL PORT sects fu scot E E E ernie ta ieee
49. Cod Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable character that is received from the host Choose a hex character from 40 through FE The character becomes the printer default when e The printer is powered off and then powered on e An SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default e The Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled The range is 40 through F4 and the factory default is 60 Graphic Chek Err Allows overriding of the host setting for the SGEA Set Graphic Error Action command For more information about the SGEA command refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual e Enable The host setting for the SGEA used by the printer If the SGEA command is requested to stop on graphic errors the printer will stop when a graphic error is detected e Disable Ignores the SGEA command from the host The printer does not stop when an error is detected instead it substitutes the character selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter The factory default is Enable Hexdump Mode Hexdump mode allows you to place the printer into the hex dump mode in which the printer outputs a hexadecimal data stream The purpose of hexdump mode is to see exactly what data is received by the printer in order to debug forms for example When enabled the hexdump mode translates all host interface data to its hexadecimal equivalent then prints the hex code and its printable symbol if one ex
50. Comp Name Shared Name Persistent YES lt Enter gt where Comp_Name is the computer name found in the computer s System Properties Computer Name tab and Shared_Name is the printer s shared name found in the printer s Properties Sharing tab This command should be all on the same line It redirects output on LPT1 to the shared printer 9 Tocheck status of connection type Net View Comp_Name lt Enter gt where Comp_Name is the computer name found in the computer s System Properties Computer Name tab Now the printer is ready 10 To use the COPY command to send the program file to the printer type COPY b filename prg lpt1 lt Enter gt where filename prg is the file name you noted in step 4 11 To stop using LPT1 for USB type NET USE LPT1 DELETE lt Enter gt 286 Downloading Software If Flash Contains Only Boot Or Corrupt Code If the flash memory contains only boot code e g if it is new or if a download was interrupted e g by a power outage you must download software through the printers parallel port using the three key initialization sequence covered in this section 1 10 11 13 Make sure the printer s parallel port is available In some configurations you may have to remove an external NIC If you need to re install the Centronics I O cable and connector contact your support facility Set the printer power switch to O Off Disconnect the data signal cable s from the pr
51. DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX 327 ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM 327 ERROR IPDS needs 300 DPI Head 327 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED 327 ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING QUEUES 328 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM 327 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH 327 ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE 328 ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID 328 ERROR SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED 328 ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXxXX 328 ERROR WRITING TO FLASH 328 ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM 328 FAN WARNING 329 FILE EXISTS Enable Overwrite 329 FILE SYS INVALID Optimize amp Reboot 329 FILE SYS WRITE Check Flash 329 FILE SYSTEM FULL Add Flash 329 FILE SYSTEM FULL Delete Files 329 FILE SYSTEM FULL Optimize amp Reboot 329 FPGA FILE NOT FOUND 330 FRAMING ERROR 330 GAP NOT DETECTED See Manual 330 GRF CHK ERROR PRESS PAUSE 330 Half Speed Mode 331 HEAD POWER FAIL 331 IGP PGL ERROR 332 INCOMPATIBLE WITH CUTTER 333 INSUFFICIENT RAM Reboot Add RAM 332 LABEL MISSING Check Paper Path 332 LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX 333 LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH 333 MENU MODE QUICK SETUP 333 NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED 334 OPTION NOT INSTALLED 334 OVERALL GRADE FAIL 335 PAPER OUT Load Paper 336 PAPER OUT TIMEOUT 337 PARITY ERROR 337 POOR SCANNING Check Head amp Heat 337 POOR SCANNING Check media 337 POOR SCANNING Inspect head 337 POWER SAVER MODE 337 PRINT HEAD COLD See Manual 338 PRINT HEAD HOT 338 PRINT HEAD UP Close Print Head 338 PRINTER HOT 338 PRINTER
52. Data RD signal RS 232 serial interface 299 RS 422 serial interface 300 RECHARGE BATTERY fault message 339 Remove Label fault message 340 Removing media from the rewinder 59 Removing the media guide 63 Renew Life SEC option 271 Renew Life Units option 271 Repeat Form Opt option 225 Repeat Form option 225 Report Status option C T Port 253 Report Status option Parallel Port 243 Report Status option Serial 249 Request To Send RTS signal RS 232 serial interface 299 Request to Send option 250 Reset Cfg Names option 117 Reset Cmd CFG Ld option 225 Reset EAP Pswd WLAN EAP menu 273 Reset EAP User WLAN EAP menu 273 Reset Head Data option 240 Reset Kerb Pwd option 270 Reset SSID Name option 266 Reset WEP Keys option 267 Reset WPA P Phs option 268 RESETTING PLEASE WAIT fault message 340 Resident Fonts option 225 Resistors configuration 298 Resp Polarity option 244 RESTORING BOOT CODE fault message 340 Ret Status Port option 153 225 Rewinder 24 353 removing printed media from 59 using 54 Ribbon 26 loading 38 51 Printronix 356 Ribbon 8300 356 Ribbon 8500 356 Ribbon 8550 356 Ribbon 8600 356 Ribbon 8700 356 Ribbon 8770 356 specifications 348 RIBBON BROKEN Reload Ribbon fault message 340 Ribbon Calibrate option 137 RIBBON FAULT Timeout fault message 340 RIBBON LOAD BAD Reload Ribbon fault message 340 Ribbon Low fault message 341 Ribbon Low option 133 RI
53. Define LF code P Series P Series XQ e LF CR LF Forces an automatic carriage return with each Line Feed command received The next print position is position 1 of the next line e LF LF Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a Line Feed command is received The next print position will be the current print position on the next line The factory default is LF CR LF 207 Chapter 208 3 Do FF at TOF Determines whether the printer with media already set at the TOF Top of Form position will advance media to the next TOF position upon receipt of an FF command e Enable The printer will advance media from the present TOF position to the next TOF position upon receipt of an FF command causing a blank form Disable The printer will not advance media from the present TOF position to the next TOF position upon receipt of an FF command The factory default is Enable Early Print Cmpl Coax TN3270 Early Print Complete capability allows the printer to send print order complete status to the host before the printer is actually done printing all data This option is valid only when the printer is in DSC DSE mode e Disable The printer will suppress the Early Print Complete response until all printing is complete e Enable The printer will send an acknowledgement to the host when it is able to accept more data NOTE When an Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs there may be data
54. Euro Dan Norw Euro Fin Swed Euro Italian Euro Spanish Euro UK Ireland Euro French Euro Internat Euro Icelandic Notes Factory Default Although these options are listed vertically here use your plus and minus keys to cycle through the options when you are operating your printer 1 Refer to page 206 for a more detailed description of this submenu 2 Refer to page 206 for a more detailed description of this submenu IPDS Setup Print IPDS Fonts This feature allows you to print a list of all resident fonts currently available in the active IPDS emulation 4028 or 3816 15308 Resident_IPDS Fonts 4028 Emulation FONT FGID FONT PT STYLE Hex _Deci WIDTH CPI SIZE PRINTSAMPLE OCR B 0003 3 144 10 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdef ghi j0123456789 Courier 000b 11 144 10 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Prestige Pica 000c 12 144 10 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Courier Italic 0012 18 144 10 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 OCR A 0013 19 144 10 ABCDEFGHIJabcdef ghi j012345b789 Courier Bold 002e 144 10 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 APL 004c 76 12 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi 30123456789 Courier 0055 85 120 12 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Prestige Elite 0056 86 12 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdef ghi j0123456789 Courier Italic 005c 92 12 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Prestige Elite Bold oo6f 111 12 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdef ghi j0123456789 Prestige Elite Italics 0070 12 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdet ghi j0123456789 Document PSM ooof PS ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij
55. FILE EXISTS Yes The printer operator Enter the PRINTER Enable Overwrite tried to save a file CONTROL menu and enable using the name of an the Overwrite Files feature to existing stored file overwrite the existing file FILE SYS FULL Yes No Insufficient flash Install a larger flash memory Add Flash memory available to SIMM For additional flash store file contact your authorized service representative FILE SYS FULL Yes Insufficient flash Enter the PRINTER Delete Files memory available to CONTROL menu Use Delete store file Files to delete unwanted files FILE SYS FULL Yes Insufficient flash Enter the PRINTER Optimize amp Reboot memory available to CONTROL menu and use the store file Optimize amp Reboot feature FILE SYS INVALID Yes No File system not Enter the PRINTER Optimize amp Reboot detected or flash was CONTROL menu and use the corrupted Optimize amp Reboot feature FILE SYS WRITE Yes No Problem writing to flash Power off the printer for 15 Check Flash memory seconds then power back on If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative 329 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued PRESS PAUSE over a twinax interface the printer received a non printable character Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution FPGA FILE Yes No The program file was 1 Download t
56. FLASH Installed DRAM Installed Ptr On Time Ptr Media Dist Head Print Dist Head On Time Reset Head Data Head Type Head Voltage PARALLEL PORT page 241 Port Type Data Bit 8 PI Ignored Buffer Size in K Auto Trickle Trickle Time Timeout Report Status Switch Out On Prime Signal Data Polarity 1 Resp Polarity 1 Busy on Strobe 1 Latch Data On Offline Process SERIAL PORT page 245 Port Type Baud Rate Word Length Stop Bits Parity Data Protocol Buffer Size in K Trickle Time Timeout Report Status Data Term Ready Request to Send Poll Character Poll Response Idle Response One Char Enquiry Printer Status Framing Errors Offline Process Reset Cmd CFG Ld Form Length inches gt Form Length mm Form Length lines gt Form Width inches gt 7 Form Width mm 7 Form Width char NOTES Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Available only when the Centronics option is set to Enable in the Port Type submenu of PARALLEL PORT 2 Menu shown only if Feature File has been loaded 3 Available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 4 The presence of this menu depends on the LP Emulation selection under PRINTER CONTROL 5 These menus do not display when CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 6 All three Form Length submenus work in conjunction When you change t
57. Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice 0500 Internat 5 Secondary Sets English US Austrian German Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Finnish Swedish French Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Spanish Spanish Speak English UK Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Latin 2 ROECE Yugoslavian Multinational Notes Factory Default Although these options are listed vertically here use your plus and minus keys to cycle through the options when you are operating your printer IGP PGL SETUP IGP PGL SETUP from page 98 Character Standard Select LPI Define CR Define LF Autowrap Group Sets Code Code Standard Sets 0 ASCII 6 CR CR LF LF Disable Arabic Sets 1 German 1 to 1000 CR CR LF LF CR LF Enable Cyrillic Sets 2 Swedish European Sets 3 Danish Greek Sets 4 Norwegian Hebrew Sets 5 Finnish Turkish Sets 6 English UTF 8 7 Dutch 8 French See page 200 pay 9 Spanish 10 Italian 11 Turkish 12 CP 437 13 CP 850 14 15 Reserved 16 23 Dwn Overlay 21 31 User Def Auto Slash 0 Select SFCC Host Form Var Form Var Form Uppercase Length Adjust Type Disable Disable 126 Ena
58. Gothic Standard Sets IBM PC ASCII USA 12 0 CPI 8 0 LPI Courier Arabic Sets Multinational French 13 3 CPI 10 3 LPI OCR A Cyrillic Sets ECMA Latin 1 German 15 0 CPI OCR B European Sets DEC Mult English 17 1 CPI Greek Sets CP 858 EURO Danish 20 0 CPI Hebrew Sets Swedish Turkish Sets Italian UTF 8 Spanish Japanese Soe pago 202 French Canadian Latin American Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin Am II Extended Horizontal Vertical Prop Italic Print Slashed Subset DPI DPI Spacing Zero Code Page 437 120 DPI 72 DPI Enable Disable Disable Code Page 850 60 to 400 DPI 72 to 400 DPI Disable Forward Slant Enable Backward Slant Left Right Top Bottom Print Margin Margin 2 Margin Margin Char Set gt 0 characters 0 to 369 characters 0 characters 0 to 369 characters 0 linespaces 0 to 451 linespaces 0 linespaces 0 to 451 linespaces Notes Factory Default 1 This menu is available only when you enable Admin User under PRINTER CONTROL 2 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 3 The presence of this menu depends on the LP Emulation selection under PRINTER CONTROL 187 Chapter 3 SERIAL MATRIX SETUP SETUP SERIAL MATRIX from page 187 Define CR Auto LF Define LF Control Bold Ove
59. IT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT OR REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT NO CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY BY USING THIS PRINTER YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT Communication Notices This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Unaut
60. If necessary change them so they match the settings of the attached host POOR SCANNING Yes Data validation failure Adjust heat speed pressure Check Head amp Heat The ratio between bar code elements is too small POOR SCANNING Yes Data validation failure Check for ribbon wrinkle Roll Check media The bar code is only wrinkled area onto take up good in small bands spindle that are difficult to scan POOR SCANNING Yes No Data validation failure 1 Check paper and ribbon to Inspect head Defects failure make sure they are clean blemishes with the bar unwrinkled and installed code are detected properly Clean printhead If message persists replace the printhead POWER SAVER Yes This is a status No action required MODE message The printer is in low energy idle state the fan and higher voltages are off and only 5Vdc logic circuits are active 337 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued REMOTE CONTROL control of the printer Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution PRINT HEAD COLD Yes Printer is in a cold 1 Reseat P401 on printhead See Manual environment or h th thead connector P401 has Changenic Punthicns become dislodged Place printer in a warmer from the back of the location printhead 4 If problem persists contact your authorized service representative PRINT HEAD H
61. Key 2 BYTE12 WEP Key 2 BYTE13 WEP Key 3 Format WEP Key 3 Width WEP Key 3 BYTE1 WEP Key 3 BYTE2 WEP Key 3 BYTES WEP Key 3 BYTE4 WEP Key 3 BYTES WEP Key 3 BYTE6 WEP Key 3 BYTE7 WEP Key 3 BYTES WEP Key 3 BYTE9 RRA A WEP Key 3 BYTE10 4 WEP Key 3 BYTE11 4 WEP Key 3 BYTE12 4 WEP Key 3 BYTE13 WEP Key 4 Format WEP Key 4 Width WEP Key 4 BYTE1 WEP Key 4 BYTE2 WEP Key 4 BYTES WEP Key 4 BYTE4 WEP Key 4 BYTES WEP Key 4 BYTE6 WEP Key 4 BYTE7 WEP Key 4 BYTES WEP Key 4 BYTE9 anoa a WEP Key 4 BYTE10 WEP Key 4 BYTE11 5 WEP Key 4 BYTE12 WEP Key 4 BYTE13 Default WEP Key Reset WEP Keys WPA Mode WPA Cipher WPA P Phs 01 15 WPA P Phs 16 30 WPA P Phs 31 32 Reset WPA P Phs KERBEROS WLAN BATTERY PRINTER PARAMS EAP CONTROL MGMT page 269 page 272 page 274 page 277 Kerberos Enable Auth Method Battery Monitor PNE Port Kerb Pwd 01 15 Kerb Pwd 16 30 Kerb Pwd 31 40 Reset Kerb Pwd KDC Port Number Clock Skew Units Clock Skew SEC Tckt Life Units Tckt Life SEC Renew Life Units Renew Life SEC EAP Mode EAP User 01 15 EAP User 16 30 EAP User 32 32 Reset EAP User EAP Pswd 01 15 EAP Pswd 16 30 EAP Pswd 31 32 Reset EAP Pswd Time To Go 2 Percent Charge 7 Current Draw 2 Voltage Amp Hour Used 7 Time To Go Alert 2 High Volt Alert 2 Low Volt Alert 2 Low Volt F
62. LEAP authentication for use with a Cisco Aironet 350 RF card installed EAP Mode e None default EAP authentication is disabled e LEAP Selects Cisco LEAP authentication e PEAP Selects PEAP authentication e TTLS Selects TTLS authentication WLAN EAP Submenus EAP User 01 15 The first 15 characters of the EAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 EAP User 16 30 Characters 16 to 30 of the EAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 EAP User 31 32 Characters 31 to 32 of the EAP user name maximum number of characters is 32 Reset EAP User Resets the EAP user name to an empty string EAP Pswd 01 15 The first 15 characters of the EAP password maximum number of characters is 32 EAP Pswd 16 30 Characters 16 to 30 of the EAP password maximum number of characters is 32 EAP Pswd 31 32 Characters 31 to 32 of the EAP password maximum number of characters is 32 Reset EAP Pswd Resets the EAP password to an empty string 273 Chapter 3 BATTERY CONTROL BATTERY CONTROL BATTERY CONTROL from page 105 Percentage Current Voltage 1 Amp Hour Charge Draw Used Battery Time Monitor To Go Disable Enable 2 2 xxx xx Hours 2 XXX X 2 xx xx Amps 2 xx xx Volts xx x Amp Hours Time To High Volt Low Volt Low Volt Go Alert Alert 1 Alert Fault
63. Menu options selecting 86 Menu overview 94 Mgmt Port Number option 277 Mgmt Protocol option 277 Midline PY includes PN option 220 Min Calib Delta option 144 Min Xfer Rate option 266 Minute option 278 Modifying saved configurations 91 Month option 278 N Name Config 1 8 option 117 NetBIOS Protocol option 259 Network Interface Card 24 Network Interface Card NIC 354 Nibble mode 296 NIC and FTP downloading software 284 NIC downloading software 283 NL at MPP 1 option 221 NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED fault message 334 Notches 68 Null Handling option 221 Null Suppression option Coax TN3270 221 Null Suppression option IPDS 221 Num Auto Labels option 129 O OCR A Chars option 158 OCR B Chars option 158 Offline mode 37 Offline Process option 244 252 260 One Char Enquiry option 251 Online Auto Cal option 142 Online barcode validator 25 Online data validator 353 Online mode 37 Online signal Centronics parallel interface 295 Online Status indicator 33 386 Operating modes 37 Operation Mode option 265 Optimize amp Reboot option 155 Optimized Ratio option 221 OPTION NOT INSTALLED fault message 334 Optional features 24 Optional host interfaces 293 Options dual NIC 354 fonts 24 hardware 353 internal label rewinder 24 internal rewinder 353 IPDS 24 media cutter 24 353 media cutter tray 24 353 memory expansion 353 memory
64. Nibble Mode 1284 Active nAStrobe Driven by the host A peripheral device is selected Host Logic High Driven by the host When set to high the host indicates all of its signals are in a valid state When set to low the host indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state ninit Resets init interface from the host Terminating Resistor Configurations The factory equips the printer with terminating resistors that are used for parallel interface configurations suitable for most applications The 1K ohm pull down resistor pack is located at RP1 and the 470 ohm pull up resistor pack is located at RP2 on the Controller PCBA If the values of these terminating resistors are not compatible with the particular interface driver requirements of your host computer call your printer service representative 298 RS 232 And Optional RS 422 Serial Interfaces RS 232 And Optional RS 422 Serial Interfaces NOTE The RS 232 and RS 422 serial interface circuit characteristics are compatible with the Electronic Industry Association Specifications EIA 232 E and EIA 422 B The RS 232 and RS 422 serial interfaces enable the printer to operate with bit serial devices that are compatible with an RS 232 controller The input serial data transfer rate in baud is selectable from the printer s control panel Baud rates of 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 are available NOTE If you select a bau
65. Not character Hex 5F is received from the host e User Defined the default Set 1 lt gt e Set2 s Set 3 ey os SFCC d command This menu option is for backward compatibility e Even dot plot the default This option interprets the SFCC d command as even dot plot e Double high This option interprets the SFCC d command as double high Select this option for backward compatibility Emulation Submenus Skip Cmd Prefix Stands for Skip Command Prefix This parameter determines if the printer will print any data before a PGL command is received e Enable the default The printer ignores all data before a PGL command e Disable The printer will print all data before a PGL command Slash 0 This parameter allows you to print the numeral 0 with or without the slash This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B Disable the default Zero is printed without a slash e Enable Zero is printed with a slash Slashed Zero This parameter allows you to print the numeral 0 with or without the slash This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B e Disable the default Zero is printed without a slash e Enable Zero is printed with a slash Slew Relative Slewing is rapid vertical paper movement This parameter determines the number of lines slewed either 1 15 lines or 1 16 lines when an EVFU Slew Relative command is received The options are 1
66. Pressure Adjustment Printhead Pressure Adjustment Dial Active Pressure Setting Sometimes you will need to adjust printhead pressure because of variations in media thickness and width The printhead pressure adjustment dial is shown above The value shown at the bottom of the dial is the active setting In general adjust printhead pressure to the lowest value which produces the desired print quality Die cut labels usually require a setting of 4 while heavy stock requires a setting of 6 to max The numbers on the printhead pressure adjustment lever are relative only and do not indicate a specific printhead pressure or media thickness By following this procedure you will minimize printhead wear 64 Printhead Pressure Block Adjustments Printhead Pressure Block Adjustments Right Pressure Block Right Pressure Block Pointer Left Pressure Block Lead Screw Pressure Block Knob Adjustment Scale Left Pressure Block Handle pesdog Printhead pressure block adjustments are used to obtain a uniform print density across the width of the installed media under a variety of media and ribbon conditions Left Pressure Block Under normal printing conditions the left block should be set with its handle aligned with the bold mark on the pressure block adjustment scale When using media or ribbon widths less than one third the printer s maximum printing width you may need to manually slide the left pressur
67. Programmer s Reference Manual for the Simple Protocol Converter Option The factory default is Standard Host Interface This option allows you to send print jobs through any interface with auto switching selected as host interface It also allows a particular interface from the menu to be selected The options are Auto Switching Centronics Serial IEEE 1284 Twinax Coax Ethernet and USB NOTE The Twinax and Coax options appear only if the CT emulation is installed The Ethernet option appears only if Ethernet is installed The factory default is Auto Switching Active IGP Emul This function allows you to activate any IGP emulation listed in the menu The choices are IGP PGL PPI ZGL PPI TGL PPI IGL PPI STGL PPI DGL PPI MGL PPI IEGL and IGP VGL See page 23 for descriptions of each emulation The default is IGP PGL There are two methods for selecting the desired emulation e Select the emulation under the Active IGP Emulation menu option and save it as Power up Config e Send a host command to switch the emulation automatically see the appropriate Programmer s Reference Manual for details PRINTER CONTROL Submenus xxx Diagnostics This menu sets the error reporting capability of the printer for emulation XXX PGL ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL and VGL XXX corresponds to the selected option of the Active IGP Emul menu For PGL the options are as follows On default Full error checking rep
68. QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu agrees with the width of the installed media Too large a value will start the image too far to the right and off the media 311 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 16 Printer Problems and Solutions continued Symptom Solution Explanation Printing is faded or of poor quality Clean the printhead 2 Check that both latches on the pivoting deck are closed and latched Close the printhead by pressing down on both sides of the pivoting deck and rotating the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise 3 Verify that the head pressure adjustment dial is properly set Try increasing the pressure 4 Verify that the Print Speed and Print Intensity values are correct Adjust Print Speed and Print Intensity in the QUICK SETUP menu MEDIA CONTROL menu or via host software Print is light on the left or right side of the label Check if the pressure blocks are set for the width of the media being used Set each block near the edge of the media Prints strange characters instead of the correct label format 1 If the printer serial interface is being used check that the printer serial baud rate setting matches the baud rate of the host computer Reset the printer via software or turn the printer off and then on 2 Check if the printer serial host interface is set for 8 data bits but the transmitting device is set for 7 data bits or vice versa Check the c
69. Reset Cmd Form Relative Position Command CFG Ld Length 1 2 1 to 15 lines Bottom of Line Enable Disable 4 or 6 inches 3 1 to 16 lines Top of Line Ignore All Power up config 00 0 to 24 0 inches Ignore CPI Current config Ignore LPI Factory config Form Form Form Form Length Length 1 Width 2 4 Width 2 4 104 1 168 0 ir 215 9 mm 3 00 0 to 345 4 mm 04 1 06 6 or 08 5 inches 3 00 0 to 13 6 inches 24 or 36 lines 3 0 to 144 lines 101 6 or 152 4 mm 3 00 0 to 609 6 mm Form Width 4 41 66 or 85 characters 3 0 to 272 characters Notes Factory Default 1 All three Form Length submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 2 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 3 The factory default value depends on the width of the printer model 4 All three Form Width submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 186 SERIAL MATRIX SETUP SERIAL MATRIX SETUP t from page 101 Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Character Character Primary Group Set Subset 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Letter
70. Sensor SMT Status 4 Print Speed Auto Calibrate PAA Select Tool Print Mode Media Profile LP Emulation Media Handling Sensed Distance CTHI Emulation 2 Paper Feed Shift Gap Mark Thresh Active IGP Emul Label Length Paper Out Thresh xxx Diagnostics Host Interface Power Saver Time Pwr Save Control Display Language Alarm Power up State Ptx Setup SFCC Cancel Key Ret Status Port Compatibility Del Char frm Fls Ld Char from Fls Save Char to Fls Del Char frm RAM Ld Char at PwrUp Del Set frm Flsh Ld Set from Flsh Save Set to Flsh Del Set from RAM Ld Set at PwrUp Overwrite Files View File List Delete Files Flash Avail Optimize amp Reboot continued in next column Print File List Auto Locking Set Lock Key Ptx Setup Parse PJL Enable 7 Glob Mem Adjust Max Font Buffer Max Cache Memory Max Cached Char Standard Chars Bold Chars Extra Bold Char OCR A Chars OCR B Chars Tall Characters Batch Counter Admin User Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Gap Mark Sensor and Paper Out Sensor work in conjunction as shown in Table 6 on page 138 If you change the Gap Mark Sensor or Paper Out Sensor you must recalibrate the media 2 Appears only if the CTHI option is installed 3 This menu will not appear on Direct Thermal only printers 4 This menu appears only if RFID is installed and there is no CST bundle in the Flash File System 5
71. Sets Swedish Turkish Sets Italian UTF 8 Spanish Japanese 202 s60 page 20 French Canadian Latin American Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin Am II Extended Horizontal Vertical Prop Italic Slashed Subset DPI DPI Spacing Print Zero Code Page 437 120 DPI 72 DPI Enable Disable Enable Code Page 850 60 to 400 DPI 72 to 400 DPI Disable Forward Slant Disable Backward Slant Left Right Top Bottom Print Char Define CR Margin 2 Margin 2 Margin Margin Set Code gt 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces CR CR 0 to 369 characters 0 to 369 characters 0 to 451 linespaces 0 to 451 linespaces CR CR LF Notes Factory Default 1 This menu is available only when you enable Admin User under PRINTER CONTROL 2 This menus does not appear when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 3 This menu appears only if the emulation is selected in the LP Emulation submenu 183 Chapter 3 P SERIES SETUP from page 183 P SERIES SETUP Auto LF Define LF Control Control Bold Overstrike Code Code 06 Code 08 Disable LF CR LF 8 0 LPI Elongated Disable Enable Enable LF LF 10 3 LPI Backspace Enable Disable 6 0 LPI Select EVFU Alt SFCC d PSeries Dbl FF valid at SFCC Select Set 80 9F Command Hig
72. The factory default is Printable Append Rotated e Disable Logos and alphanumeric strings are treated as separate elements e Enable Appends logos to an alphanumeric string rotated in a clockwise counterclockwise or inverted orientation The factory default is Disable Auto FF at PN When enabled an FF will be generated automatically to slew to the end of form when the PN command is encountered and when the current vertical position is not at the top of form The options are Disable the factory default and Enable Auto LF P Series P Series XQ This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting e Disable Discards any data past the forms width e Enable Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width The factory default is Disable Auto LF Serial Matrix Proprinter XL Epson FX This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting e Enable Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width e Disable Discards any data past the forms width The factory default is Enable 195 Chapter 196 3 Auto Skip at End Specifies whether to perform an automatic form feed at the end of a print buffer If form feed is the last character in the print order the form feed function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option e
73. UNDER REMOTE CONTROL 338 PWR SUPPLY HOT 339 RBN TAKEUP FULL Remove Used Rbn 339 REACTIVATING HOST SERIAL 339 RECHARGE BATTERY 339 Remove Label 340 RESETTING PLEASE WAIT 340 RESTORING BOOT CODE 340 RIBBON BROKEN Reload Ribbon 340 RIBBON FAULT Timeout 340 RIBBON LOAD BAD Reload Ribbon 340 Ribbon Low 341 RIBBON OUT Load Ribbon 341 SECURITY CODE VIOLATION 341 SECURITY VIOLATION 341 SOFTWARE ERROR Recycle Power 341 Speed Exceeds Validator Limit 341 TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT 342 Unscannable xx Missing Codes 342 Validator not communicating 342 WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD 342 WIRELESS ADAPTER NOT COMPATIBLE 343 Fault Message Troubleshooting Table 317 Fault messages 316 E00 EXE ADDRO 322 E01A TYPE 0x40 322 E01B TYPE 0x60 322 E02 MACHINE CHK 323 E03A DSI HASH L 323 E03B DSI HASH S 323 E03C DSI BAT PL 323 E03D DSI BAT 324 E03E DSI CXIWX 324 E03F DSI CXOWX 324 E03G DSI ECXIWX 324 E03H DSI ECXOWX 325 E04A ISI NO TRA 325 E04B ISI DIRECT 325 E04C ISI PROTEC 325 E06 NOT ALIGNED 326 E07 ILLEGAL INS 326 E08 FLOATINGPNT 326 Fault Message Troubleshooting Table 317 HOO PCI SLOT 331 H01 PCI J24 331 H02 PCI J25 331 operator correctable 316 requiring field service attention 316 Fault mode 37 Feature File option 239 FF After Job option 210 FF valid at TOF option 211 FF Validity option 211 FILE EXISTS Enable Overwrite fault message 329 FILE SYS INVALID Optimize amp Reboot fau
74. a 39 Loading Fanfold Media ccccccceeeseseeeeeeeeneeeeeeennneeeeeeenaeeeeetenaa 46 Loading RIDDON ainen noran ae aee E E 51 Using The Optional Internal Rewinder eeseseeseeesreeereserrerrrreree 54 Batch Rewind Mode ccccceeeeceeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeneeeeeseseeeeeseenaeeeeeneaaes 54 Label Peel Off steir nispera e iaaa 60 Removing The Media Guide c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeessieeeeeaes 63 Table of Contents Printing AGjUStMONtS cscs oi cotiedstcecdesend conhedetits chsdee E EENE AEE ea 64 Printhead Pressure Adjustment cceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaaees 64 Printhead Pressure Block Adjustment eeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeaes 65 Positioning The Media Sensors ccccceeeeeeeeeneeeseneeeseeeeeeaes 66 Sensing Different Media Types ccccceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeaeeees 71 Running Auto Calibrate 0 ccceccceseeeeceeeeeeeneeeseeeeseaeeessneeeesaees 72 Running Media Profile cecececeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeseaes 74 Running Manual Calibrate cccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseneeeseneeessaes 79 Cleaning iea ee cats eae a tedden ese aa aed E nga teased heared gs 80 EEXTQ MON se seen oe daehand ceca cteeebadvalt cevuediada cpusises vate a a Sutphen ee 80 ILS TION pesos hose tect a ieee ete teed hee tiedh E e EA ie 80 General Cleaning ccc cccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeesecaeeeeeaeetenaeeene 80 Cleaning The Printhead Platen R
75. a percentage of full power The range is 0 100 and the factory default is 100 Internat Mode When enabled the Wireless option adapts to international frequency requirements in Europe The options are Disable the factory default and Enable Auth Method The wireless authentication scheme e Open the default This option allows all devices that have the authentication algorithm number for open system to authenticate e Shared This option enables a four step authentication process using secure or encrypted text by means of WEP Default WEP Key This feature enables you to encrypt scramble information for security purposes With this feature you can set up to four encryption keys in either ASCII or hexadecimal format and in either 40 or 128 bits The more bits you choose the more difficult it will be to decode the information NOTE None of the WEP Key Configuration menus display on the configuration printout WEP Key Format Allows you to format the WEP keys in ASCII or hexadecimal code The factory default is Hexadecimal WEP Key Width This is the encryption strength The options are 40 Bits and 128 Bits 40 bits are weaker and 128 bits are stronger NOTE If you select 40 bits the WEP Key BYTE6 through WEP Key BYTE13 menus will not display The factory default is 128 bits WEP Key BYTE1 through BYTE13 These are the individual characters of the encryption key Reset WEP Keys Allows you to rese
76. and continue to print a dynamic profile image depicting the relationship of the label and any label length indicators detected 5 Press J The printer will stop printing 6 Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE displays NOTE The Gap Mark and Paper Out Threshold values shown on the Profile printout represent the last values determined from a successful Auto or Manual Calibrate or the factory default values if no Auto or Manual Calibrate was performed Running Media Profile 255 191 Paper Out 144 Ea te ak be LO Gap Mark 105 aa H 4e Je I 3 063 000 J Figure 1 Media Profile Printout Gap Sensing This figure shows a Media Profile printout of a smart label where Gap Mark Sensor is set to Gap in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu In this example the gap threshold value the printer selected represented by the Gap Mark dotted line is too close to the amplitude of the antenna pulse This may cause the printer to falsely use the antenna as the gap top of form Media Sensor Position FEED 255 191 127 Paper Out 110 7 Do ee fey I funy 000 gdeBoq Detected Amplitude Detected Amplitude Indicates Type of Gap Mark of the Antenna of the Gap Sensing Selected 75 Chapter 2 Printing Adjustments To avoid this problem increase the Threshold Range value to 60 or 70 in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu
77. being overwritten by disabling the overwrite function The options are Enable the factory default and Disable View File List Displays the list of files in the file system Pressing displays the file size Delete Files Allows you to delete files in the file list Contact your administrator for assistance Flash Avail The amount of flash available for the user to save or download files into flash PRINTER CONTROL Submenus Optimize amp Reboot Reclaims flash space from deleted flash files After pressing wait for the printer to reboot Print File List Prints a summary of the files stored in flash memory and several statistics on File System usage Auto Locking e Disable The ENTER key must be locked manually e Enable The printer automatically locks the key five minutes after the last control panel key press The factory default is Disable Set Lock Key Normally to lock or unlock the printer menu the J and keys are pressed at the same time The Set Lock Key parameter lets you choose different keys to lock or unlock the printer menu You may choose almost any group of keys as the new lock and unlock keys You cannot use the key or any key combinations which are already used for another function There is no limit to how many keys can be selected To set the new lock key 1 Go to the PRINTER CONTROL main menu and select Set Lock Key 2 Press The display reads Select a new lock
78. cut labels or tag stock supplied in roll or fanfold format Media is further described by the type of sensing used to detect the Top of Form position based on the label length indicators used Transmissive Gap media uses a liner gap notch or hole between labels and Reflective Mark media uses a horizontal black mark located on the underside of the tag stock or label liner Continuous media with no label length indicators uses no sensing method and the operator determines which label length is desired The sensor used to detect the presence of media in the paper path as well as the gap notch or hole position of Transmissive media or the horizontal black mark on Reflective media See RAM Nonvolatile Memory DRAM and Flash Memory 373 Appendix F Nonvolatile Memory Nonvolatile memory stores variables that must be preserved when the printer is turned off such as configuration parameters and printer usage statistics Nonvolatile memory is preserved because RAM is housed on the controller board which contains an independent battery operated power supply When printer power is turned off the battery supplies the power needed to keep stored data active Nonvolatile memory also includes storage in disk NVRAM Acronym of Nonvolatile Random Access Memory See Nonvolatile Memory Parity check Parity checking is the addition of a non data bit to data resulting in the number of 1 bits being either always even or alway
79. exception is generated when the IPDS data stream contains an 0x00 e Enable When enabled this option ignores the EBCDIC value 0x00 in the IPDS data stream Optimized Ratio This option selects different bar code ratios for certain bar codes including Code 39 and Interleaved 2 of 5 It is included for compatibility with the IGP X00 printers e Disable the default Use standard bar code ratios e Enable Select the alternate bar code ratios Overstrike Overstrike determines the action required when a line is printed over a previous line because a carriage return was received without a line feed e Enable the default Prints the second line on top of the first line e Disable Replaces the characters from the first line with the second line 221 Chapter 222 3 PA1 PA1 is only valid when the printer is in the offline state and the coax Systems Network Architecture Character Set SCS data stream is active This function displays the PA1 ENABLED message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is put back online Refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual for more information about SCS NOTE Selecting PA1 again PA1 DISABLED appears on the operator panel or selecting PA2 will reset the pending PA1 function PA2 PA2 is only valid when the printer is offline and the coax SCS data stream is active This function displays the PA2 ENAB
80. factory default is Head First when IGP PGL or IGP VGL is enabled The factory default is Foot First when PPI ZGL is enabled Label Wait Time When Media Handling is set to Tear Off Strip or Continuous and Continuous Mode is set to Tear Strip Full Label Wait Time specifies the number of seconds after printing stops that the printer will wait before it advances media to the tear bar position When Media Handling is set to Peel Off or Tear Off Label Wait Time specifies the number of seconds the printer will wait after a label is removed from the peel tear bar before starting to print the next label The range is 0 1 to 60 0 seconds and the factory default is 0 1 second 130 MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Pre Peel Mode e Disable e Enable When Media Handling Peel Off and Peel Off Mode Standard enabling Pre Peel Mode adds a forward and reverse motion to each label prior to printing The added forward pre peel motion temporarily breaks the die cut label from the liner and the reverse motion places the label back on the liner prior to printing peeling or dispensing the label Pre Peel Mode is usually enabled only when using die cut labels with an aggressive adhesive that makes automatic label removal from the liner difficult The factory default is Disable Pre Peel Adjust When Pre Peel Mode Enable Pre Peel Adjust represents the selectable distance that the label advances during Pre Peel Mode The Pre Peel Adjust distance s
81. fix this a Perform Auto Calibrate See Running Auto Calibrate on page 72 b Decrease Gap Threshold value by 2 or 3 increments See Gap Mark Thresh on page 140 c Set Clip Page to Disable Set Label Length to correct physical length value See Clip Page on page 131 Media moves but no image prints in ONLINE mode 1 Make sure the J402 power supply cable has a good connection to the right side of the printhead 2 Place the printer offline and print the Checkerboard diagnostic test pattern see page 238 If the pattern prints there is a communication problem between the host computer and the printer Media moves but no image prints in Direct Thermal mode 1 Media is not the type for direct thermal printing Install direct thermal media 2 Direct thermal media is installed wrong side up Reinstall the media with the correct side facing the printhead Media and ribbon move but no image prints in Thermal Transfer mode 1 Print the Checkerboard diagnostic test pattern and check that the image appears on the used portion of ribbon If the image is on the ribbon the ribbon may be installed with the transfer side against the printhead instead of against the media 2 The ribbon may be designed for another model printer 3 The ribbon may not be compatible with the media When narrow media is installed the media moves but no image prints Verify the Label Width value in the
82. in four three digit segments SEG1 through SEG4 If the IP Address is assigned by Bootp ARP or DHCP it is dynamic and read only The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000 000 000 and 000 NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online Subnet Mask This item allows you to set the Subnet Mask for the TCP IP protocol in four three digit segments SEG1 through SEG4 If the Subnet Mask is assigned by Bootp Arp or DHCP it is dynamic and read only The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000 000 000 and 000 NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online Gateway Address This item allows you to set the Gateway Address for the TCP IP protocol in four three digit segments SEG1 through SEG4 If the Gateway Address is assigned by Bootp ARP or DHCP it is dynamic and read only The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000 000 000 and 000 NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online MAC Address This item is the Manufacturer s Assigned Number and is unique for the NIC and the Wireless option It is read only DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting The options are Disable the factory default and Enable NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online WLAN PARAMS Signal Strength XX 2 Operation S
83. is to adjust printer dpi to expand and shrink the vertical position or the height of the graphic elements The option is only available for 203 dpi printers The default is 203 dpi The adjustment range is from 195 to 210 dpi Vertical DPI This feature enables the thermal printer to print images as close as possible to the same size as those originally programmed for a line matrix or laser printer by selecting a vertical resolution that matches that of the printer that the file was originally generated for Although the range allows a selection of up to 400 dpi the thermal printer is capable of printing up to 203 dpi T5204 T5206 T5208 and 300 dpi T5304 T5306 T5308 vertical resolution The range is 72 400 DPI and the factory default is 72 DPI VPA Check e Enable the default The printer checks for dots that fall outside the intersection of the logical and physical pages If dots fall outside the area the printer reports an error to the host if the IPDS Exception Handling Control command setting requires error reporting e Disable The printer does not report dots outside the valid printable area Width Limit When enabled the system will limit the length and width for expanded characters to a limit shown in Table 7 which shows the maximum width allowed for a specific height in the range of 00 through 40 0 0 through 4 0 inches The factory default is Disable Table 7 Width Limit Table He
84. key until OFFLINE displays 2 Press the JOB SELECT key until the desired configuration displays 3 Press J Loading Saved Configuration displays 93 Chapter 3 Menu Overview Menu Overview QUICK RFID VALIDATOR 2 CONFIG MEDIA SETUP CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL Set the basic RFID encoder Online data Name store and Control various menus neededto setup and status validator setup retrieve up to parameters configure the reporting and status eight custom related to print printer reporting printer quality media configurations and ribbon CALIBRATE PRINTER SELECTED DIAGNOSTICS PARALLEL CTRL CONTROL EMULATIONS PORT Selectthe correct Select the Emulations Select various Select various media sensing desired Active selected fromthe printer tests parallel port for the media IGP emulation PRINTER monitor and related typeinstalledand other emulations CONTROLmenu record printer parameters perform media and various appear here performance sensor printer operating These calibration parameters emulations relate to graphics languages particular printers and optional host interface protocols SERIAL USB OPTIONAL OPTIONAL PRINTER PORT PORT PORTS FEATURES MGMT Select various serial port related parameters Selects various USB port related parameters Select optional host interfaces Select optional feat
85. loss The factory default is Disable Early Print Comp IPDS This parameter allows you to choose when to send a Print Complete to the Controller e Off Print Complete is sent if the page is printed completely e On Print Complete is sent immediately The next page will be created This improves the print performance when starting the next page but degrades error recovery The factory default is Off Elong Alt Font Controls which host command sets elongated double high fonts and extended character set e ELNG BS hex 08 FONT SO hex 0E e ELNG SO FONT BS The factory default is Elng BS Font SO Emulation Submenus Emulation This item allows you to select the desired IPDS emulation either 4028 IPDS or 3816 IPDS The factory default is 4028 IPDS Epson Set This item allows you to select the Epson character subset used by the printer The options are listed on page 199 The factory default is ASCII USA ESC d command This item is for backward compatibility e Even dot plot This option interprets the ESC d command as even dot plot Double high This option interprets the ESC d command as double high Select this option for backward compatibility The factory default is Even dot plot EVFU Select Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting e Enable Selects P Series compatible Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU e Disable Disables all EVFU processing The factory default i
86. lt Enter gt 13 Start the FTP file transfer protocol program by typing ftp xxx xxx xxx xxx lt Enter gt where xxx xxx xxx xxx is the IP Address of the printer 14 Log in to the printer by typing root lt Enter gt You are given a password prompt NOTE The default is no password If the FTP program requires a password contact the system administrator 15 At the password prompt press lt Enter gt 16 Once logged in type the following sequence at the command prompt to download the filename prg file to the printer cd dest lt Enter gt ed dlprn lt Enter gt bin lt Enter gt put filename prg lt Enter gt where filename prg is the file name you noted in step 9 Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller PCBA and NIC incompletely loaded and the printer may not boot up 17 When the download is complete exit the FTP program by typing quit lt Enter gt 18 When the new software has successfully downloaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself set the printer power switch to O Off 19 Remove the CD from the host computer and store it with the printer 20 If required reconnect the data input cable s to the printer 21 Set the printer power switch to On 22 Using the configuration printout s you made in step 1 on page 284 restore the printer configurations 285 Chapter 4 Downloading Software Thro
87. next black mark e Continuous media no label length indicators measurable length should be within 1 2 the Label Length value entered in the QUICK SETUP MEDIA CONTROL menu or the value sent via host software command e Logical Label Length Host Forms Length is the length that a user or programmer bases his printable image on In most cases this length should be slightly less than the Physical Label Length This allows the entire image to be printed within the boundaries of the label length indicators gaps notches holes or black marks When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length and Clip Page Enable in the MEDIA CONTROL menu the printer will clip the bottom portion of the image that exceeds the Physical Label length In this case the printable data that was not printed will be lost When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length and Clip Page Disable the printer will continue to print the image onto the next physical label and ignore the gap or mark based on the label length value set in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu When the Logical Label Length is less than the Physical Label Length the printer will print the entire image and leave blank space the remaining length of the physical label as it advances to the Top of Form of the next label This is true regardless of the Clip Page setting 109 Chapter 3 QUICK SETUP The allowable Label Length range i
88. on the VGL and you can also define custom symbols Reverse and Shaded Print permit highlighting and contrasting by printing white characters on a dark background or white characters on a gray shaded background Various levels or patterns of gray shading and reverse printing may combine with the many other print features to create distinctive designs Automatic Increment Decrement Capability allows batch form processing Individual alphabetic numeric and bar code data fields can be identified and automatically incremented or decremented by any amount beginning from a specified reference point Standard Character Sets provide you with many different character sets Based on the Multinational Character Set you may create your own character sets using characters defined and stored in flash memory P Series P Ser XQ Ser Matrix Proprinter and Epson FX These menus are available only when you enable Admin User under the PRINTER CONTROL menu 163 Chapter 3 COAX SETUP COAX SETUP COAX SETUP 23 from page 97 Primary Sets Translation PA1 PA2 Buffer Buffer Tbl Reprint Print See page 166 Disable Disable Enable Enable Coax Type Active _ Secondary _ EarlyPrint _ SCS Buffer __ Alt Set 80 9F Char Set Sets Cmpl Cntrl 4234 Secondary Set Seepage 166 Disable 4 Don t Wait Printable 3287 Primary Set Enabl
89. or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast This function is not applicable for C T hotport The options are 1 4 1 2 1 2 4 8 and 16 seconds and Off The factory default is 1 4 sec Timeout This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and check the other selected Port Types for data to print When the printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time it needs to time out in order to service the other ports The range is from 1 to 60 seconds and the factory default is 10 seconds Report Status When a fault condition occurs in the printer normally only the active port reports the fault to the host With this menu item enabled the port will report any fault even when it is not the current active port The options are Disable the factory default and Enable Data Term Ready Stands for Data Terminal Ready This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the Data Terminal Ready DTR signal is generated This signal indicates if the printer is ready to receive data e True the default Continuously asserts the DTR signal e On Line and BNF buffer not full Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full e Off Line or BF buffer full Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is offline or the internal serial buffer is full e On Line Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online e Fal
90. printed normally e Enable Text is printed with a heavy line thickness The factory default is Disable Bottom Margin Defined in linespaces starting from line zero at the bottom of the page and incrementing from the bottom up The range is 0 451 linespaces and the factory default is O linespaces Boundary Check This option turns on or off the page boundary check for all print elements e Enable When enabled an out of bound error is reported if the print element is out of the page boundary e Disabled When disabled no out of bound error is reported The out of bound print element prints over the page boundary The factory default is Enable Btm Margin Ctl Determines the page s bottom margin If this option is set to VGL Text Length then text length changes the bottom margin value in the LP Emulation submenu as follows bottom physical page length top margin text length If the option is set to LP Menu then a change in text length has no effect and the bottom margin setting in the LP Emulation menu will be used although the new text length value still shows in the menu The options are LP Menu the factory default and VGL Text Length Buffer Print e Disable The printer will print normally e Enable The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received from the host as hex values NOTE Use of this parameter may alter print attributes set by the host computer A power cycle may be required afte
91. printed will be lost 121 Chapter 122 3 MEDIA CONTROL When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length and Clip Page Disable the printer will continue to print the image onto the next physical label and ignore the gap or mark based on the label length value set in the MEDIA CONTROL menu When the Logical Label Length is less than the Physical Label Length the printer will print the entire image and leave blank space the remaining length of the physical label as it advances to the Top of Form of the next label This is true regardless of the Clip Page setting The allowable Label Length range is 00 1 to 99 0 inches 2 5 2514 6mm The factory defaults are listed below Table 3 Factory Default Label Length Printer Inches mm Lines T5X04 6 152 4 36 T5X06 4 101 6 24 T5X08 6 152 4 36 Maximum Label Length range is dependent on the Label Width value selected printhead installed 203 or 300 DPI and the amount of DRAM installed in the printer See Appendix A for specifications NOTE See Set Label Length on page 134 Label Width This option specifies the physical width of the image to be printed The value can be specified in inches or millimeters depending on the setting of the Units submenu under the MEDIA CONTROL menu The allowable range in inches is 00 1 to the maximum print width of the printer The allowable range in millimeters is 2 5 to the maximu
92. selection matches the type of media installed See Sensing Different Media Types on page 71 49 Chapter 2 Loading Media And Ribbon For direct thermal operation no ribbon required e Ifyou have not run an Auto Calibrate do so now See Running Auto Calibrate on page 72 e Ifyou have already run an Auto Calibrate complete the following steps a Close the media cover b Press the FEED key once to verify that the media advances c Press the PAUSE key to place the printer online For thermal transfer operation which uses a ribbon Complete the ribbon loading procedure see Loading Ribbon on page 51 50 Loading Ribbon Loading Ribbon Skip this section for 4 inch DT models or when using direct thermal printing Ribbon Take Up Core Ribbon Take up Spindle Pivoting Deck Ribbon Supply Spindle Ribbon Roll Deck Lock f K Lever 1 Install the ribbon take up core on the ribbon take up spindle NOTE The first ribbon take up core comes with the printer Thereafter use the core from the old used up ribbon 2 Slide the ribbon roll onto the ribbon supply spindle until it stops against the spindle flange 3 Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise until the deck swings upward 51 Chapter 2 Loading Media And Ribbon Ribbon Printhead zanos Media Rear Ribbon Guide Roller
93. sensor directly over the lower media sensor see Positioning The Media Sensors on page 66 The factory default is Reflective Manual Calibrate Manual Calibrate is another method of improving the printer s media sensing and is only used when Auto Calibrate has failed or the Gap Mark Threshold or Paper Out Threshold values derived from Auto Calibrate do not improve the media sensors gap or mark sensing capability To initiate Manual Calibrate press when Manual Calibrate displays under the CALIBRATE CTRL menu You will then be prompted for the remaining steps Example REMOVE RBN amp MEDIA Press Enter or LOAD RBN ONLY Press Enter etc During the last stage of Manual Calibrate the printer uses the statically derived values advances media stops at the Top of Form position and momentarily displays the Sensed Distance This process takes longer than Auto Calibrate and the end result is a change to the Gap Mark Threshold Paper Out Threshold and Sensed Distance values that the printer will use These value changes take effect immediately within the current configuration menu Manual Calibrate is completed successfully when the displayed Sensed Distance correctly matches that of the installed media When Gap is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge of one gap to the trailing edge of the next gap or one label one gap When Mark is selected the Sensed Distance should m
94. than 18 dBi dB are strictly prohibited for use with this device The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms To reduce potential radio interference to other users the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power e i r p is not more than that permitted for successful communication CE Notice European Union Marking by the CE symbol indicates compliance of this Printronix system to the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive of the European Union Such marking is indicative that this Printronix system meets the following technical standards e EN 300 220 1 2000 Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum Matters Short Range Devices Radio equipment to be used in the 25 MHz to 1000 MHz frequency range with power levels ranging up to 500 mW e EN 55022 Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment e EN 50082 1 1992 Electromagnetic compatibility Generic immunity standard Part 1 Residential commercial and light industry e EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment This printer is a Class B product for use in a typical Class B domestic environment CE Symbol CE Taiwan Jea EEATT E BSMIGS I E AERES C ERE ERAS E HER FECES CRIS EDEA EIJTIE ESENE o ERRE EA EA PEP SAGER WRASSE RTS FRA BAA gt TER PER EA FUE 5G EARLE A AE BPS EE LET DS PAI PT E
95. the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 This menu appears only if you select the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu 165 Chapter 3 166 COAX SETUP Coax Setup Primary Sets and Secondary Sets COAX SETUP from page 164 Primary Sets 0037 English US 0037 Eng Nether 0285 English UK 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0287 Danish Alt 0278 Finnish 0288 Finn Alt 0297 French 0500 Internat 5 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0289 Span Alt 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0803 Hebrew Old 0424 Hebrew 0892 OCRA 0893 OCR B 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril Old 0423 Greek Old 875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0905 Turk Old 0256 Intern 1 0924 Euro Lat 9 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1143 Euro Finn 1144 Euro Ital 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice Secondary Sets English US English UK Austrian German German Alt Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Danish Alt Finnish Swedish Finnish Alt French International Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Portug Alt Spanish Spanish Alt Spanish Speak Swiss Fren Ger Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Turkish Old Lati
96. the amount of ribbon remaining on the supply spindle is approximately 75 to 50 meters or less the Online status indicator flashes and Ribbon Low displays on the second line of the LCD A Ribbon Low warning message will not prevent printing The options are Disable the factory default and Enable NOTE The Display Ribbon option must be set to Enable for the warning to display Rbn Takeup Full This enables or disables a fault message to display for a Ribbon Takeup Full condition The options are Enable the factory default and Disable Units This item selects either millimeters or inches as the unit of measure The options are In Inches the factory default and In Millimeters 133 Chapter 3 IMPORTANT 134 MEDIA CONTROL Set Label Length This feature selects whether the Sensed Distance value derived from an Auto or Manual Calibrate will be used to set the Label Length value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu and the QUICK SETUP menu e Manual The Sensed Distance value derived from an Auto or Manual Calibrate will not override or change the Label Length value Automatic When an Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed the Sensed Distance value derived from either calibrate will override and change the Label Length value If no Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed the current Label Length value will be used The factory default is Manual NOTE When Set Label Length Automatic and Gap Mark Sensor Gap Ad
97. the bottom back panel of the printer To apply power place the switch in the ON position When you first power on the printer a series of initialization messages will appear on the Liquid Crystal Display LCD on the control panel To remove power place the power switch in the O OFF position Control Panel The control panel is located on the front of the printer and includes an LCD indicators and control keys buttons These are described in the following tables Also refer to Chapter 3 Online Status Indicator Devlay een p SELECT FEED TEST PRINT Job In Process Indicator 33 Controls And Indicators 2 Chapter Status and Display Indicators JOLING y Ul SUeWe gyep ou u ym JO penigoes Bulag SI yep OU UBUM LO peyulid aq 0 Bunrem s pue pesseo0id u q sey eyep uayM y SABIS gyep Bulaiaoes JOLING y UI SUTeWaJ Byep OU u ym JO peAlaoes Buraq SI yep OU UBUM IO paund aq o uem s pue p ss vo d u q sey eyep u ym yi SAeIS gegep gyep Buisseooid Jo Bulaigoe si 1 zUud 9 UON u ym soyse Hula UayM S YSE JJA y UBYM S IIPUI SS9901g Ul qof uonoe uonoe AM1 991109 y pue UOROL A1 991109 A1 991109 y pue ebessow ney ooads y s ejds p uoipuoo yne e Buung uondo Jo nuawqns nuew urew sAejdsig ebessow yne ooads y s ejds p uoipuoo yne e Buung INI1440 sheldsiq au pue eHessow
98. the default is 50 then run an Auto Calibrate again Cross Ref to Auto Calibrate NOTE Any changes to Threshold Range will not take effect until you run an Auto Calibrate again This will raise the Gap Mark threshold high enough so that the printer will not falsely use the antenna as the gap top of form Media Sensor Position FEED 127 Paper Out 110 7 Gap 072 4 S Indicates Type of Gap Mark Sensing Selected 76 Detected Amplitude of the Antenna Detected Amplitude of the Gap debog Running Media Profile Advanced Gap Sensing This figure shows a Media Profile printout of a smart label where Gap Mark Sensor is set to Advanced Gap in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu In this example the gap threshold value the printer selected represented by the Gap Mark dotted line is too close to the baseline die cut label If there is an increase in noise or the opacity of the liner or ribbon the printer may falsely use the noise as the gap top of form Media Sensor Position 4 FEED 127 Paper Out 075 4 ae 063 Adv Gap 030 4 B altas LA a VVV VVV 7 Detected Amplitude Detected Amplitude Indicates Type of Gap Mark of the Antenna of the Gap Sensing Selected Baseline die cut label gedebog 77 Chapter 2 Printing Adjustments To avoid this problem increase the Threshold
99. them to attach the cutter assembly to the lower support assembly 363 Appendix D _ Installing The Cutter Installing The Cutter Asepyes Lower Support Assembly jie Cutter Assembly Mounting Bracket we Magnetic Catch 2 nc 1 Plug the RJ 11 connector into the RJ 11 receptacle 2 Pull the metal tabs from the magnetic catches and swing open the cutter assembly mounting bracket from the cutter assembly Cutter Assembly Screw 2 Figure 2 Cutter Assembly WARNING The cutter blades are sharp Keep your fingers away from the cutter blades 3 Place the cutter assembly in position 4 Install the two screws using the appropriate metric hex key 5 Place the cutter assembly into the up closed position NOTE The printer cannot detect the presence of the cutter unless the cutter is in the up closed position and the cutter top cover is installed when the printer is powered on 364 Restore The Printer To Operation Restore The Printer To Operation NOTE The printer cannot detect the presence of the cutter unless the cutter is in the up closed position and the cutter top cover is installed when the printer is powered on Set the printer power switch to ON 2 Press to place the printer in Menu Mode Press the J and keys at the same time until ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED appears on the printer display Press until MEDIA CONTROL displays Press J until Media Handling
100. to the LCD Message Troubleshooting table on page 317 2 Check for an Out of Media condition or missing labels in the middle of a roll Load the correct media 3 Check that the ribbon and label stock are correctly routed Load ribbon and label stock correctly Power Failures Printer fails to turn on the display is not backlit and the fan is not running 1 Check that the printer AC power cord is correctly attached to the printer and to the AC power outlet 2 Have a qualified electrician test the AC wall outlet for the correct power range Locate the printer in an area that has the correct power range 3 Check the AC power cord Replace a damaged AC power cord or one that you suspect may be bad 4 Call your authorized service representative 310 Solving Other Printer Problems Table 16 Printer Problems and Solutions continued Symptom Solution Explanation PRINT QUALITY e Label s did not get printed within a multi label print job e A portion of the printed image was clipped off and the beginning of the next label was printed on the same physical label 1 If the serial interface is being used verify that the correct data protocol is selected to match the host interface protocol 2 If Clip Page Enable in the MEDIA CONTROL menu the printer may have falsely detected a gap hole or black mark and then clipped discarded the remaining printable data for the label To
101. to the printer interface On the printer control panel press and hold down the and J keys Without releasing the keys power the printer on When you see BO1 STATUS on the on the LCD release the keys Wait until you see PROGRAM DOWNLOAD on the LCD before proceeding This can take about a minute to appear depending on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer Using Windows Explorer create a directory named download at the root level of your C hard drive C download Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer s CD drive Open the readme txt file on the CD There are two emulation sets with corresponding part number files from which to choose CT IPDS IGP ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL TN IGP ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL Both emulation sets include the LP emulation They are offered in two file formats exe and prg Use prg files to download through the NIC using FTP Identify which emulation set you want to download into the printer and note the filename that corresponds to that emulation The filename is a six digit number plus prg For example 123456 prg This is the file you will download into the printer Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 6 Start a command prompt session in Windows The Start Menu icon is usually labeled MS DOS Prompt or Command Prompt IMPORTANT 12 At the command prompt type c lt Enter gt cd download
102. value parameter attribute or option that is assigned by a program or system when another has not been specified by the user Pertaining to the detection and isolation of a printer malfunction or mistake Media coated with special chemicals that act as an accelerator acceptor dye and binder In Direct Thermal mode the heat from the selected rectangular elements in the thermal printhead makes direct contact with the media no ribbon is used and causes a chemical reaction that creates the image on the media A printing method in which no ribbon is used to transfer data from the printhead to the media to create an image The thermal printhead selectively heats small rectangular elements which make direct contact with the coated media Dynamic Random Access Memory Can be read from or written to at any time DRAM is volatile whatever is in DRAM is lost when power is turned off Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Programs instructions and routines permanently stored in the printer that cannot be written to Files in EPROM are not lost when power is turned off Resident fonts are fonts permanently stored in EPROM and available at any time via software commands Media supplied in a fanfold stack instead of a roll format Nonvolatile memory See Nonvolatile Memory A collection of printing characteristics for printing alphanumeric characters all of which combine to produce a distinctive style of print Host Compute
103. want the printer to ignore all existing label length indicators on the installed media NOTE When you select Disable the length of each label is based on the Label Length value entered in the QUICK SETUP menu or the value sent via host software NOTE If the printer detects a false PAPER OUT message when you change from Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch to Gap or Mark sensing or vice versa press the PAUSE key and run Auto Calibrate 6 Press to enable the displayed option An asterisk appears next to the selection Press PAUSE until OFFLINE appears on the LCD Review Calibrating The Media Sensors on page 72 Perform the Auto Calibrate procedure on page 72 71 Chapter 72 2 Printing Adjustments Calibrating The Media Sensors Due to manufacturing differences in media and ribbon the media sensors may have difficulty differentiating between the label and the liner or the label and the black mark When this occurs the printer may intermittently skip a label or display a fault message such as GAP NOT DETECTED See Manual or PAPER OUT Load Paper Media sensor sensitivity and reliability can be improved by changing the Gap Mark Threshold and or Paper Out Threshold values You can change these values automatically by performing the Auto Calibrate or Manual Calibrate procedure in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu or change them manually by entering your own Gap Mark Threshold or Paper Out Threshold values The c
104. when you select Enable in the Battery Monitor submenu Low Volt Alert This allows you to set the minimum voltage for determining when a BATT LOW VOLT warning displays on the LCD When the printer receives a status from the battery that is less than the value of the Low Volt menu the BATT LOW VOLT warning displays on the LCD The range is 8 5 11 5 Volts and the factory default is 9 5 Volts Low Volt Fault A Low Voltage Fault occurs when the printer receives a status from the battery that is 1 0 VDC less than the value of the Low Volt menu In addition to the BATT LOW VOLT warning the Online Status Indicator flashes the printer sounds a beeping alarm stops printing and goes offline The operator can press the PAUSE key to attempt to clear the fault but printing cannot continue unless the battery is recharged NOTE This menu is available only when you select Enable in the Battery Monitor submenu PRINTER MGMT Submenus PRINTER MGMT PRINTER Notes Factory Default PNE Port Mgmt PNE Port PNE Port Status Port Mgmt Port Protocol Number Timeout Numb Number Ethernet UCP 3001 100 Seconds 3006 3007 Disable PXML 1023 65535 1 255 Seconds 1023 65535 1023 65535 Serial PRINTER MGMT Submenus PNE Port This menu selects which port the printer expects PNE to connect to via Ethernet or Serial The factory default is Ether
105. 0 seconds 300 6 Diagnostics And Troubleshooting Printer Tests A sequence of automatic tests is performed during printer power up If any faults are detected at that time a fault message will display Before setting the printer for online operation run the Test Print program The Test Print program has a number of tests which allow you to check for proper printer operation and print quality You can enable the Test Print program from the TEST PRINT key or the DIAGNOSTICS menu For more information see page 238 NOTE Before attempting to print test labels you must set up the printer for the type of media installed See the MEDIA CONTROL menu on page 118 for more information Troubleshooting Common Situations Occasionally situations occur that require some troubleshooting skill Possible problem situations and potential solutions are listed in this section While not every conceivable situation is addressed here you may find some of these tips helpful Contact a qualified service technician for problems that persist or are not covered in this section 301 Chapter 302 6 Troubleshooting Common Situations Improving Processing Time Before looking at solutions for decreasing processing time and increasing throughput it may help to understand what happens during processing When the printer receives a format command it enters the label formatting mode Label formatting requires time to process the labe
106. 0123456789 Prestige PSM 00a4 PS ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Prestige elite 00dd 15 ABCDEF GHI Jabcdefghij0123456789 Courier oodf 15 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghij0123456789 Courier oofe ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Prestige Elite 0100 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Gothic Text 0119 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdef ghi j0123456789 Letter Gothic Bold 0194 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Courier Bold 01a4 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Times Roman 1637 ABCDEFGH lJabodefghij0123456789 Times Roman 1637 ABCDEFGH Jabcdefghij01 23456789 Times Roman 1637 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Times Roman 1637 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Times Roman 164b ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Times Roman 164b ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Times Roman 164b ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Times Roman 164b ABCDEFGHIJ abcdefghij0 1234567 89 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij 0123456789 Times Roman Italic 16b7 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0 23456789 Times Roman Italic 16b7 ABCDEFGH Wabcdefghij01 23456789 Times Roman Bold Ital 16cb 10 ABCDEFGH IJabcdef ghij0123456789 Times Roman Bold Ital 16cb 12 ABCDEFG HI Jabcdefghijf0123456789 32 Resident Bitmap Fonts Typographic 2 Scalable Fonts PS Proportionally Spaced SC Scalable NOTE The Scalable fonts are currently rendered at 12 points They are scalable to any integer point size Figure 3 IPDS Fonts 4028 Emulation Sample Printout 173 Chapter 3 IPDS SETUP IPDS Setup Print IPDS Fonts cont
107. 10 OA r 42 2A J 74 4A j 106 6A VT 11 0B 43 2B K 75 4B k 107 6B FF 12 oC i 44 2C L 76 4C 108 6C CR 13 oD 45 2D M 77 4D m 109 6D SO 14 0E 46 2E N 78 4E n 110 6E SI 15 OF 47 2F O 79 4F o 111 6F DLE 16 10 0 48 30 P 80 50 p 112 70 DC1 17 11 1 49 31 Q 81 51 q 113 71 DC2 18 12 2 50 32 R 82 52 r 114 72 DC3 19 13 3 51 33 S 83 53 s 115 73 DC4 20 14 4 52 34 T 84 54 t 116 74 NAK 21 15 5 53 35 U 85 55 u 117 75 SYN 22 16 6 54 36 V 86 56 v 118 76 ETB 23 17 7 55 37 W 87 57 w 119 77 CAN 24 18 8 56 38 X 88 58 x 120 78 EM 25 19 9 57 39 Y 89 59 y 121 79 SUB 26 1A 58 3A Z 90 5A Zz 122 7A ESC 27 1B F 59 3B 91 5B 123 7B FS 28 1C lt 60 3C 92 5C 124 7C GS 29 1D 61 3D 93 5D 125 7D 361 Appendix C Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex RS 30 1E gt 62 3E A 94 5E 126 7E US 31 1F 63 3F 95 5F 127 7F NOTE For the hardware handshake XON XOFF commands XON Ctrl Q DC1 XOFF Ctrl S DC3 362 D Media Cutter Installation Prepare The Printer Peel Tear Assembly Screw 2 ee ee Lower Support we ele y Peel Tear Door Figure 1 Peel Tear Assembly 1 Set the printer power switch to O Off 2 Open the peel tear door by pulling it upward then forward 3 Using the appropriate metric hex key remove the two screws attaching the peel tear assembly to the lower support assembly NOTE Keep the two screws you have removed you will use
108. 15 lines the default and 1 16 lines SPC Char Set Allows you to select the print language character set See page 170 for the options The default is 0500 Internat 5 SPC Null Supp SPC Null Supp stands for SPC Null Suppression e Disable the default Ignores nulls The print position does not move e Enable Treats nulls as blank spaces SPC Space Supp This option is only available in Coax SPC emulation and is used in LU3 DSC DSE mode only e Disable the default Treats nulls and spaces normally e Enable If the entire line consists of spaces and nulls the line will be discarded 229 Chapter 230 3 SPC Type SPC Coax Setup e PTX NI Printronix Non impact the default This option causes the printer to not line wrap at 132 characters e Avatar Comp This option causes the printer to line wrap at 132 characters despite the current print density allowing more characters per line SPC Type SPC Twinax Setup Allows you to select a convertor which mimics a specific type of external protocol convertor e MODE PTX NI the default for Printronix non impact e MODE 219 for Model 219 protocol convertor e MODE P5000 for Printronix protocol convertor e MODE IBM for the IBM protocol convertor Standard Sets This item allows you to select various character sets available from the Character Group item The options are Standard Arabic Cyrillic European Greek Hebrew and Turkish Sets The fact
109. 187 See page 189 See page 191 Notes Factory Default PRINTER CONTROL Submenus SMT Status See Software Migration Tools SMT in the RFID Labeling Reference Manual e Disable factory default The printer disables the use of the Software Migration Tools functionality e Enable The printer enables the use of the Software Migration Tools functionality The factory default is Disable PAA Select Tool Refer to the PrintNet Enterprise Suite User s Manual e Disable The printer disables the use of PAA functionality e Enable The printer enables the use of PAA functionality The factory default is Disable PRINTER CONTROL Submenus LP Emulation This item selects the line or dot matrix printer to be emulated by the printer P Series see page 183 P Series XQ see page 185 Serial Matrix see page 187 Proprinter XL see page 189 Epson FX see page 191 The factory default is P Series CTHI Emulation This item appears only when the CTHI option is installed CTHI Emulation selects the operation of the CTHI option as either a standard or simple protocol converter Standard With a standard coax interface the printer emulates the following IBM coax printer models e 3287 Models 1 and 2 e 4234 Model 1 With a standard twinax interface the printer emulates the following IBM twinax printer models e 4234 Model 2 e 5225 Models 1 2 3 and 4 The standard Coax Twinax emulation selection
110. 2 Translation Tbl User Defined Stp PA1 SPC Char Set PA2 Translation Tbl Buffer Reprint Buffer Print Null Handling SPC Null Supp SPC Space Supp SFCC Char User Defined St1 User Defined St2 User Defined Stp NL At MPP 1 Intervention Req Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Gap Mark Sensor and Paper Out Sensor work in conjunction as shown in Table 6 on page 138 If you change the Gap Mark Sensor or Paper Out Sensor you must recalibrate the media 2 Appears only if the CTHI option is installed R Appears only if selected as the Port Type under C T PORT 4 Appears only if the CTHI emulation under PRINTER CONTROL is set to Simp Prot Conv 5 Appears only if the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu is selected Does not appear if IPDS is installed 7 Does not appear if CTHI emulation under Printer Control is set to Simp Prot Conv 97 Chapter 3 98 Main Menu IPDS SETUP 2 3270 SETUP page 171 page 175 Default Font Default Code Pag Code Page Subset Emulation Early Print Comp Host Form Length Null Suppression Page Rotation VPA Check Expanded Fonts Resident Fonts XOH SMO Support Hexdump Mode Print IPDS Fonts NOTES Primary Sets Translation Tbl Active Char Set Secondary Sets Early Print Cmpl Alt Set 80 9F Intervention Req CR At MPP 1 NL At MPP 1 Position Aft F
111. 21 The SL5000r T5000r Series RFID Label Printer 22 Standard Features ciarn aa ra aa aa iaa aaa 23 Optional Features cceccceceseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeesenaeeeeeaeeees 24 Thermal Printer Technology ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeaaeeees 25 The Printing ProCeSs ee E AE OR 25 Dynamic Print Control ccceccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeesecaeeeseneeeneas 26 Thermal COnSUMADIES ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseaeeeeeaaeeseeeeseaeeeesaes 26 Media Selection cccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeetenaeeseeeeseneeeee 26 RIBBONS ire dah etae E T E Quine ad 26 Setting Up The Printer ccccceeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseaeessieeeeeaes 27 Unpacking The Printer eesssessessrssssrrrnnesernrnesrrnnnnrnnnnnererrnnerennnnenne 27 aee EE E a TE AEA EEE ETE EE E N IE AT 29 Operation o se eA E E EE 33 Controls And Indicators cccccecesceeeseeeeeceeceeeeteaeeeseeeeseneeeeeeeeesaees 33 Power SWitehis idire a ai eii atean ea aea iea Te KE Kaeni dain i eedan 33 Control Pafe aaaeeeaei naneda naate eda raa adea es eae deed 33 Powering On The Printer eeeeeeesesesieeirerirrsrirsrrrterrnserneerrnsene 37 Operating MOES eae aa a ar tae raa esa eit e aan eaa 37 Media Handling Modes ccceceeceeeeeeesneeeeeeenneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaees 37 Loading Media And Ribbon eeecceeeeeseeeeeeenneeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaaees 38 Loading Roll Medial ssla aeaea
112. 24 Hebrew 0892 OCRA 0893 OCR B 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril Old 0423 Greek Old 875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0905 Turk Old 0256 Intern 1 0924 Euro Lat 9 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1143 Euro Finn 1144 Euro Ital 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice Secondary Sets English US English UK Austrian German German Alt Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Danish Alt Finnish Swedish Finnish Alt French International Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Portug Alt Spanish Spanish Alt Spanish Speak Swiss Fren Ger Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Turkish Old Latin 2 ROECE Yugoslavian Notes Factory Default Although these options are listed vertically here use your plus and minus keys to cycle through the options when you are operating your printer TN5250 SETUP 5250 SETUP from page 98 Primary Sets Translation Active Secondary Lead in User Tol Char Set Sets Chars Defined Stl See page 178 Secondary Set Seepage 178 Set1 lt gt 5F Primary Set Set 2 37 40 to FF Set 3_ _ User De
113. 4 Thread the end of the ribbon under the rear ribbon guide roller then between the platen and the printhead You can also refer to the arrows on the printer frame or to the upper right corner of the label inside the media cover for ribbon loading instructions 52 Loading Ribbon Media Cover Media and Ribbon Loading Instructions Ribbon Take up Core Equo Ribbon Take up Spindle IMPORTANT Do not attach the ribbon to the ribbon take up spindle without a fiberboard take up core installed 5 Attach the ribbon to the ribbon take up core on the ribbon take up spindle using the adhesive on the ribbon leader 6 Manually rotate the spindle clockwise until the clear leader has passed the printhead 7 Close the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise 8 Verify that Print Mode in the QUICK SETUP menu is set for Transfer See QUICK SETUP on page 106 for more information 53 Chapter 2 Using The Optional Internal Rewinder 9 If you have not run an Auto Calibrate with this media and ribbon do so now See Running Auto Calibrate on page 72 10 Press the FEED key once to verify that the media and ribbon advance 11 Press the PAUSE key to place the printer online 12 Close the printer media cover if the rewinder is not needed Using The Optional Internal Rewinder The printer can be set up to rewind labels after they have been printed Batch Rewind Mode
114. 5 PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Notes Unisys Turkish _ NCR Turkish Factory Default PST Turkish To access the desired basic character set use UNIS 1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 Azeri the and keys To select the set press the key After you have selected the basic set access the subset selection menu by pressing the J key Once in the subset menu access the desired subset by pressing the and keys and select it by pressing the J key Chapter 3 Character Group and Character Sets P Series Serial Matrix From page 183 page 187 This menu item selects the character set used by the printer The available character sets are shown below Character Group P Series Serial Matrix Standard Arabic Sets Cyrillic Sets European Greek Sets Hebrew Sets Sets Sets ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek Hebrew Old ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Code Page 852 ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 Hebrew DEC ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek Latin 1 Hebrew MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek Win CP 1255 MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek Sakr CP714 Cyrillic 7 Bit Slavic 1250 Greek 851 Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 CP 786 Bulgari
115. 5mm 0 25 in 6 35mm 99 in 2515mm 1 in minimum 25 4 mm 99 in 2515 mm 1 in minimum 25 4 mm 99 in 2515 mm 1 in minimum 25 4 mm 99 in 2515 mm T5X08 3 0 8 75 in 76 2 222 3 mm 3 0 8 75 in 76 2 222 3 mm 0 10 in 2 54 mm 0 10 in 2 54 mm 0 5 in 12 7 mm 0025 010 in 0635 254 mm 0 25 0 50 in 6 35 12 7 mm These figures are approximate and depend upon the active emulation and application 1 4 5 inch with validator support 347 Appendix A 348 Ribbon Table 21 Ribbon Specifications T5X04 T5X06 T5X08 SL5X04 MP2 SL5X06 MP2 Ribbon Width Range 0 75 4 5 in 2 0 6 8 in 3 0 8 75 in 19 114 3mm 50 8 172 7 mm 76 2 222 25 mm Max Ribbon Length m 625 625 625 Max Ribbon Roll 3 60 in 3 60 in 3 60 in Diameter Indicators And Switches Table 22 Indicators and Switches Indicator Lights ONLINE Job In Process Switches POWER Keys PAUSE JOB SELECT Decrement FEED T Up TEST PRINT Increment Menu x Cancel Down Enter Message Display 2 row 16 characters per row for error messages print status and recalling stored formats Memory Table 23 Memory Specifications Flash Memory standard 8MB SIMM plugged into Controller PCBA Flash Memory optional 16MB SIMM plugged into Controller PCBA DRAM standard 32MB SIMM plugged into Controller P
116. AIL fault message 331 Head Print Dist option 239 Head Type option 240 Head Voltage option 240 HeadClose Action option 142 Hex Dump Mode option 239 Hexdump mode option 213 High Volt Alert option 276 383 Holes 68 Hor Image Shift option 110 123 Horizontal black marks 67 Horizontal DPI option 214 Host Command option 214 Host Form Length option IPDS 215 Host Form Length option PGL 215 Host Forms Length option VGL 216 Host interface characteristics 349 Host Interface option 150 Host Override option 216 Host PI option 216 Hour option 278 2 5 Selection option 216 Idle Response option 250 IEEE 1284 interface 295 operating modes 295 Ignore Lxx Cmd option 217 Ignore Ch 1 option 217 Ignore Ch 2 option 217 Ignore Chars option 217 Ignore Dots option 217 Ignore Mode option 217 Ignore Spaces option 218 Ignore Text option 218 IGP PGL 162 IGP PGL ERROR fault message 332 IGP PGL SETUP menu 179 IGP VGL 163 IGP VGL SETUP menu 181 IGP100 Compatibl option 218 Improving processing time 302 INCOMPATIBLE WITH CUTTER fault message 333 Indicators 33 Indicators and switches 348 Installing the media guide 55 Installing the printer 29 INSUFFICIENT RAM Reboot Add RAM fault message 332 384 Interface options 354 Interfaces 293 Centronics parallel 294 Dataproducts Long Lines 294 IEEE 1284 295 Interfacing 303 Internal rewinder 24 54 59 353 Internat Mode option 267
117. ASE WAIT running its initialization complete initialization and routine continues displaying this message when the CT emulation is installed the expansion CT board may not be connected to the controller PCBA Unscannable Yes Data validation error Check the paper and ribbon for xx Missing Codes missing barcode cleanliness wrinkles etc or an obstructed validator beam If there is no validator beam at all or if the LED is not flashing as barcodes pass through the validator beam recycle validator power If the problem persists contact your service representative NOTE xx represents the number of missing barcodes on the form that caused the warning fault to be declared Validator not Yes The Validator Funct Check that the validator signal communicating Enable in the cable is securely connected to VALIDATOR menu but the validator unit when the printer was first powered up it could not communicate with the validator WAITING FOR Yes Normal message when 1 Complete the downloading PROGRAM the printer is powered software procedure See DOWNLOAD up while holding down Downloading Software on page 279 2 Exit this procedure by cycling printer power Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message eee Explanation Solution WIRELESS No The type of wireless The PCMCIA radio card that ADAPTER card is incompatible you installed may be NOT COMPATIBLE wi
118. AUSE key e LCD fault messages display the specific fault in uppercase letters on the top line A corrective action in upper and lowercase letters displays on the bottom line Example PAPER OUT Load Paper e Key combinations are indicated by the plus symbol Example Press 7 means Press the Up T key and the Down J key at the same time 21 Chapter 1 The SL5000r T5000r Series RFID Label Printer The SL5000r T5000r Series RFID Label Printer NOTE As used in this manual the terms T5000r and printer refer to all models within the series SL refers to all SmartLine RFID models The T5000r series consists of a family of high quality direct thermal and thermal transfer printers specifically designed for printing labels and tags from any MS DOS Windows ASCII or EBCDIC with the Coax Twinax option based compatible computer The T5000r Smart Ready and SmartLine series are comprised of the products detailed in Table 1 NOTE All 4 models are Smart Ready Table 1 The T5000 Smart Ready and SmartLine Series Model Max Print Printing Max Print Speed ips Density dpi Width inches T5204r 10 203 4 1 T5204r DT 10 203 4 1 SL5204r MP2 10 203 4 1 T5304r 8 300 4 1 T5304r DT 8 300 4 1 SL5304r 8 300 4 1 SL5304r MP2 8 300 4 1 T5206r 10 203 6 6 SL5206r MP2 10 203 6 6 T5306r 8 300 6 6 SL5306r MP2 8 300 6 6 T5208r 8 203 8 5 T5308r 6 300 8 5 Direct Thermal only 4
119. BBON OUT Load Ribbon fault message 341 Ribbon specifications 348 Ribbon Width option 133 Right Margin option 226 Right pressure block 65 Roll media 39 Rot Char Size option 226 RS 232 serial interface Clear To Send CTS 299 Data Carrier Detect DCD 299 Data Set Ready DSR 299 Received Data RD 299 Request To Send RTS 299 Transmitted Data TD 299 RS 422 option 355 RS 422 serial interface received data RD 300 transmitted data TD 300 Running auto calibrate 72 Running manual calibrate 79 Running media profile 74 S Save Char to Fls option 153 Save Config option 114 116 Save Set to Fish option 154 Save auto 89 Saving new configurations 88 Scalable Size option 226 SCS Buffer Cntrl option 226 SECURITY CODE VIOLATION fault message 341 SECURITY VIOLATION fault message 341 Select Char option 226 Select CPI option 226 Select LPI option 227 Select SFCC option 228 Select SFCC option PGL 227 Select SFCC option P Series 227 Select SO Char option 227 Selecting a menu option 86 Self test printer 301 Sensed Distance option 140 Sensing different media types 71 389 SERIAL PORT menu 245 submenus 246 Serial Port downloading software 280 Series1 1 Char 247 Series1 2 Char 248 Set Label Length option 134 Set Lock Key option 155 Set Text Orientn option 228 Setting printer configuration parameters 85 Setting up the printer 27 SFCC Char option SPC Coax SPC
120. CBA Media Cutter Option Media Cutter Option Cutters are designed to cut tags and label liner Avoid cutting through the adhesive backed portion of any media Cutter The cutter is designed to cut tags and label liner Table 24 4 6 and 8 inch Models Typical Life gt 1 000 000 cuts Warranty 500 000 cuts Environment Same specifications as printer Cutting Method Rotating single edged blade Media Thickness Range 0 0025 to 0 010 in 0 064 to 0 254 mm Media Width Range Same range as printer Media Length Range 1 00 to 99 in 25 4 to 2515 mm Host Interfaces Table 25 Host Interface Characteristics 1 Serial RS 232 or RS 422 at 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 baud 2 Parallel Centronics compatible or IEEE 1284 bi directional 3 USB 2 0 The RS 232 and optional RS 422 host interfaces shall have the following characteristics Word Length Selectable 7 bit or 8 bit data format Handshaking XON XOFF in receive mode only and CTS DTR Input Buffer Selectable from 1k through 16 kbytes XOFF is transmitted and DTR goes low when buffer is equal to or less than 25 of full XON is transmitted and DTR goes high when buffer is 25 above empty Characters are transmitted with no parity from the printer 349 Appendix A Power Table 26 Power Source and Grounding Power Source 115 or 230 VAC 50 60Hz switching p
121. Cable Assembly Figure 8 Replacing the Printhead Assembly To prevent electrostatic damage to electronic components ground yourself by touching an unpainted part of the printer frame before handling and installing the printhead 5 10 Touch an unpainted part of the printer frame before touching the printhead Behind the pivoting deck gently pull the lower tabs of the retainer clips upward to release the printhead assembly You only need to pull the tabs a small amount to release the printhead assembly Hold the printhead assembly by the printhead cover as it is released Push the release tab down on the power supply cable assembly and remove the cable from the printhead assembly Use the pull tab to remove the printhead controller cable assembly from the printhead assembly Push the release tab down on the upper media sensor cable assembly and remove the cable from the printhead assembly 307 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation NOTE The upper media sensor cable assembly connects in the middle for 4 inch models on the left side for 6 inch models Figure 8 and on the right side for 8 inch models 11 Position the new printhead assembly below the pivoting deck and connect the printhead controller power supply and upper media sensor cable assemblies NOTE You may need to gently pull the lower tabs of the retainer clips upward to install the printhead assembly 12 Slide the printhead assembly upwar
122. EC option 271 Tckt Life Units option 270 Tear Off strip media handling 37 Tear Off media handling 37 Technical support 19 Terminating resistor configuration 298 Test Count option 238 Test labels printing 301 TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT fault message 342 Text Length option 230 Text Position option 230 Thermal consumables 26 Thermal printer series product line 22 Thermal printer technology 25 Thermal transfer printing 25 Thermal transfer ribbons 356 Threshold Range option 145 Ticket Save Mode option 136 Time processing improving 302 Time To Go Alert option 275 Time To Go option 275 Timeout option C T Port 253 ETHERNET Port 255 USB Port 254 Timeout option Parallel Port 243 Timeout option Serial 249 TN3270 SETUP menu 175 TN5250 SETUP menu 177 TN5250 TN3270 25 TOF Adjust Mode option 137 TOF Adjust option 137 TOF Detect Fault option 136 Top Margin option 231 Training classes for T5000 20 Translate Table option 231 Translation Tbl option Coax 231 Translation Tbl option SPC Coax 231 Translation Tbl option SPC Twinax 231 Translation Tbl option TN3270 TN5250 Twinax 232 Transmit Power option 267 Transmitted Data TD signal RS 232 serial interface 299 RS 422 serial interface 300 Trickle Time Serial option 249 Trickle Time option Parallel Port 243 Troubleshooting 301 control panel 309 Fault Message Troubleshooting Table 317 fault messages 316 LCD M
123. ER to Stop Yes Normal message when Press the ENTER key to stop a test print pattern that printing the test pattern will run continuously has been enabled ERROR DC Yes No The printer cannot find Power off the printer for 15 PROGRAM the data controller seconds then power back on NOT VALID program or the If the problem persists contact validation checksum is your authorized customer corrupt service representative ERROR DRAM AT Yes No The printer found a Power off the printer for 15 ADDRESS defective memory seconds then power back on XXXXXXXX location If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ERROR FLASH Yes No The printer Power off the printer for 15 DID NOT PROGRAM encountered an error seconds then power back on trying to program flash If the problem persists contact memory your authorized customer service representative ERROR IPDS needs Yes The printer has Power off the printer and 300 DPI Head detected a 203 DPI replace the 203 DPI printhead printhead installed with with a 300 DPI printhead IPDS software downloaded IPDS software only supports the 300 DPI printhead ERROR NO DRAM Yes No The printer could not Power off the printer for 15 DETECTED find any DRAM seconds then power back on If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ERROR PROGRAM Yes No The program exceeds Download a smaller program NEEDS MORE the memory limitatio
124. F Disable Enable Disable Control Code Disable LF CR LF Enable Disable Enable Printable 1 Text Host Reset Cmd Form Form Position Command CFG Ld Length 23 Length 2 3 Bottom of Line Enable Disable 4 or 6 inches 4 101 6 or 152 4 mm 4 Top of Line Ignore All Power up config 00 0 to 24 0 inches 0 00 to 609 6 mm Ignore CPI Current config Ignore LPI Factory config 24 or 36 lines 4 0 to 144 lines 192 00 0 to 13 6 inches Notes Factory Default 04 1 06 6 or 08 5 inches 4 104 1 168 0 215 9 mm 4 0 00 to 345 4 mm 41 66 or 85 characters 4 0 to 272 characters 1 When the CTHI option is installed the factory default is Printable 2 All three Form Length submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 3 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 4 The factory default value depends on the width of the printer model 5 All three Form Width submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically Emulation Submenus Emulation Submenus NOTE The following descriptions are grouped together for all emulations and are listed in alphabetical order The emulations do not include PPI ZGL PPI TGL PPI IGL PPI STGL PPI DGL PPI MGL and PPI IEGL See individual Programmer s Reference Manua
125. F Last Char FF Null Suppression FF Validity Auto Skip At End FF After Job CR EM amp NL Host Override Format Control Lead in Chars User Defined Stl 4 User Defined St2 4 User Defined Stp Change Case Set Text Orientn Max Print Width 5250 SETUP 8 page 177 Primary Sets Translation Tbl Active Char Set Secondary Sets Lead in Chars User Defined St1 4 User Defined St2 A User Defined Stp f Alt Set 80 9F Graphic Chek Err Graphic Chek Cod Set Text Orientn Host Override Format Control Max Print Width IGP PGL SETUP page 179 Character Group Standard Sets Select LPI Define CR Code Define LF Code Autowrap Auto Uppercase Slash 0 Select SFCC Host Form Length Var Form Adjust Var Form Type Optimized Ratio PI Slew Range CR Edit Skip Cmd Prefix Ignore Text Power on IGP PGL Ext Execute Copy Al 00 Spaces Select SO Char Ignore Mode Select Char Do FF at TOF IGP100 Compatbl Expanded Font Scalable Size Forms Handling PGL Normal UPC Descenders 1 2 5 Selection C39 Compatbl User Def Ratio Lead PDF Dist Trunc Dyn Data Vertical Adjust Boundary Check Repeat Form Opt Preparser Port Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Appears only if Active IGP Emul is set to IGP PGL in the Printer Control Menu 2 Appears only if the IPDS emulation is installed and the correct security key is used Appears only if the TN5250
126. II USA 12 0 CPI 8 0 LPI Courier Arabic Sets OCR A French 13 3 CPI 10 3 LPI OCR A Cyrillic Sets OCR B German 15 0 CPI OCR B European Sets Multinational English 17 1 CPI Greek Sets Code Page 850 Danish 20 0 CPI Hebrew Sets CP 858 EURO Swedish Turkish Sets IBM PC Italian UTF 8 Spanish Japanese See page 199 Norwegian Danish II Latin Am Il French Canadian Latin Am Horizontal Vertical Prop Italic Print Slashed Left DPI DPI Spacing Zero Margin 120 DPI 72 DPI Enable Disable Disable 0 characters 60 to 400 DPI 72 to 400 DPI Disable Forward Slant Enable 0 to 369 characters Backward Slant Right Top Bottom Print Define CR Margin 2 Margin Margin Char Set Code gt 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces CR CR 0 to 369 characters 0 to 451 linespaces 0 to 451 linespaces CR CR LF Notes Factory Default 1 This menu is available only when you enable Admin User under PRINTER CONTROL 2 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 3 The presence of this menu depends on the LP Emulation selection under PRINTER CONTROL 191 Chapter 3 EPSON FX SETUP from page 191 EPSON FX SETUP Auto LF Define LF Printer Select 20 CPI Bold Alt Set lt Code Condensed 80 9F Enable LF L
127. Intervention Req option 218 IP Address option 257 262 IPDS Data Port option 259 IPDS for use with PrintNet 10 100 Base T UTP Ethernet and twinax host interface 355 IPDS for use with PrintNet 10 100 Base T UTP Ethernet interface 354 IPDS for use with twinax host interface 354 IPDS SETUP menu 171 Italic Print option 218 J Job Control option 260 Job In Process indicator 33 K KDC Port Number option 270 Keep Alive Timer option 259 Kerb Pwd 01 15 option 269 Kerb Pwd 16 30 option 270 Kerb Pwd 31 40 option 270 Kerberos Enable option 269 KERBEROS PARAMS menu 269 submenus 269 L Label Length option 109 121 LABEL MISSING Check Paper Path fault message 332 Label Peel Off 60 Label Resolution option 137 Label Wait Time option 130 Label Width option 110 122 Labeling Applications 292 Labels printing test 301 LAC Approx option 218 LAC Option option 219 Last Char FF option 219 Latch Data On option 244 LbI Missing Flt option 131 LCD 33 LCD Fault Message Troubleshooting Table 317 Ld Char at PwrUp option 154 Ld Char from Fls option 153 Ld Set at PwrUp option 154 Ld Set from Fish option 154 Lead PDF Dist option 219 Lead in Chars option 219 Left Margin option 220 Left pressure block 65 Liquid Crystal Display LCD 33 Load Config option 116 Load saved configuration 93 Loading Flash Memory 279 Loading media 38 fanfold 46 roll 39 LOADING PROGRAM FROM PO
128. LED message when the key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is put back online NOTE Selecting PA2 again PA2 DISABLED appears on the operator panel or selecting PA1 will reset the pending PA2 function Page Rotation This option rotates the physical IPDS page The options are 0 90 180 and 270 The factory default is 0 PDF Size Comp This option is for compatability of the font size of the barcode printable data field on the old build e Enable Matches the font size of the old build e Disable Uses the normal font size The factory default is Disable PGL Normal This option determines whether PGL passes the text data in Normal mode according to LP or whether PGL will print the text data itself e LP Menu the default PGL will pass the text data to LP only in the default setting state 6 LPI default character set and font attribute e PGL Menu PGL will always print the text data itself PI Slew Range You can specify how many lines the paper will feed e 15 A paper slew of 1 15 will move 1 15 lines A paper slew of 0 will move 1 line e 16 the default A paper slew of 0 15 will move 1 16 lines Emulation Submenus Position Aft FF Allows you to select the location of the print position after a Form Feed command is sent e Off the default Sets the printer to print at position 2 of the first print line on the next form e On Sets the printer
129. M Ptr On Time Ptr Media Log Log Installed Installed Dist XX Megabytes 3 XX Megabytes 3 XXX X Hours XXXXX inches 3 Head Print Head On Reset Head Head Type Head Dist Time Data Voltage XXXXX inches 3 XX X Hours 3 XXX DPI 3 XX XX4X XX volts 3 Factory Default 1 Appears only if the Ethernet Interface adapter is installed 2 Appears only if the validator and or RFID encoder is installed 3 You cannot change this value it is a display only item 4 The menu appears only if a feature file has been downloaded to the printer 237 Chapter 238 3 DIAGNOSTICS DIAGNOSTICS Submenus Printer Tests The printer tests below allow you to check for proper printer operation and print quality Auto Calibrate the default Senses paperout perforation gap or mark and calibrates the printer for the currently installed media Checkerboard This pattern helps identify marginal printhead elements quality of edge sharpness and uneven print quality Grey This pattern helps identify burned out printhead elements and uneven print quality Grid This pattern helps identify edge sharpness and uneven print quality Current Config Prints the current printer configuration and helps identify the text print quality Also prints Printhead statistical data in the header Left Test Prints a pattern containing a series of ladder type bar code symbols starting with four and decrementing by one symbol on each print until a sin
130. Menu Pressing the MENU key takes the printer offline and into Menu mode In this mode you can navigate through all configuration and status menus and change the printer configuration Fault In fault mode a fault condition exists that must be cleared before printing can continue The ONLINE status indicator flashes the alarm beeps if configured to do so and a descriptive fault message displays The fault must be corrected first and then the message cleared by pressing the PAUSE key before normal printing can continue Media Handling Modes Before you load media you must decide which media handling mode to use e Continuous Prints on the media and sends it out the front of the printer When the optional internal rewinder is installed use Continuous for Batch Rewind mode see page 54 e Tear Off Strip Prints on the media and sends it out the front until the print buffer is empty then positions the last label over the tear bar for removal e Tear Off After each label is printed the printer positions the label over the tear bar and waits for you to tear off the label before printing the next label on demand printing A Remove Label message will display to remind you to remove the label before the next one can be printed 37 Chapter 2 Loading Media And Ribbon e Peel Off When the optional internal rewinder is installed the printer prints and peels die cut labels from the liner without user assistance Th
131. N condition is required for the printer to receive data Data Terminal Ready DTR Control signal from the printer Subject to configuration 299 Chapter 5 USB RS 422 NOTE The RS 422 serial interface connector is optional Table 15 RS 422 Serial Interface Connector 9 Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Receive Data RXD 1 Transmit Data TXD 3 Chassis Signal Ground 5 Receive Data RXD 6 Transmit Data TXD 8 NOTE RXD and TXD form signal and return paths of a differential line signal RXD RXD Serial data stream differentially received by printer TXD TXD Differentially driven serial data stream for transmitting status and control information to the host Subject to protocol selection USB Menus The Universal Serial Bus USB port is part of Auto Switching and is active when the Host Interface menu is set to Auto Switching It can also be selected as the only Host Interface under the Host Interface menu by selecting USB The Host Interface menu is only available when the Admin User menu is enabled A top level USB Port menu with two submenus is also available e Buffer Size in K the input buffer size used by the USB port The range is from 1 to 16 The default is 16 e Timeout the Hotport Timeout value used to determine when the port is inactive The range is from 1 to 60 seconds The default is 1
132. Notes SETUP Factory Default from page 181 C39 Ignore Ignore Ch 1 Ignore Ch 2 Data Bit 8 Cmd Compatbl Chars Resolution Disable Disable 0 o Enable Low Resolution Enable Char 1 0 to 255 0 to 255 Disable High Resolution Char 2 Char 1 amp 2 ADnn Dot Barcode var Character Standard Uniform Prop Line Slew Group Sets Fonts Length Low Resolution Low Resolution Standard Sets 0 ASCII Disable Enable High Resolution High Resolution Arabic Sets 1 German Enable Disable Cyrillic Sets 2 Swedish European Sets 3 Danish Greek Sets 4 Norwegian Hebrew Sets 5 Finnish Turkish Sets 6 English 7 Dutch See page 201 pag 8 French 9 Spanish 10 Italian 1 Turkish 12 CP 437 3 CP 850 182 Disable Enable Disable Enable Enable Disable P SERIES SETUP P SERIES SETUP 3 from page 100 Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Character Character Primary Group Set Subset 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Letter Gothic Standard Sets IBM PC ASCII USA 12 0 CPI 8 0 LPI Courier Arabic Sets Multinational French 13 3 CPI 10 3 LPI OCR A Cyrillic Sets EMCA Latin 1 German 15 0 CPI OCR B European Sets DEC Mult English 17 1 CPI Greek Sets CP 858 EURO Danish 20 0 CPI Hebrew
133. OL menu Remove Labe change Media Handling to message the correct selection remained e The incorrect Media Handling mode was selected RESETTING Yes Printer finished loading No action required PLEASE WAIT the program into flash memory and is automatically resetting itself RESTORING Yes Normal download No action required BOOT CODE initialization message RIBBON BROKEN Yes Ribbon is broken Reattach ribbon Reload Ribbon between the ribbon take up spindle and the printhead RIBBON FAULT Yes In the CT emulation 1 Clean the printer Timeout with a coax interface 2 Power off wait 15 the ite ha not i seconds then power back PRISE minutes on again If the message after dt ben persists contact your e f eara authorized customer MODON TAYE service representative RIBBON LOAD BAD Yes Ribbon was incorrectly 1 Reload the ribbon correctly For ribbon loading instructions see page 51 340 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution Ribbon Low Yes 1 The supply spoolis 1 Replace ribbon getting low 2 Disable Ribbon Low in the 2 If there is a large MEDIA CONTROL menu amount of ribbon still on the supply spool then the Ribbon Low message is being displayed falsely RIBBON OUT Yes 1 The ribbon supply 1 Replace ribbon Load Ribbon spool is empty 2 Reinstall ribbon 2 The ribbon has broken SECURIT
134. OT No The controller board is Call your authorized service See User Manual not communicating representative with a PCI card This could indicate a bad PCI card poor connection or problem in the PCI bus H01 PCI J24 No The controller board is Call your authorized service not communicating representative with the PCI card in PCI slot J24 or J25 This could indicate a bad PCI card poor connection or problem in the PCI bus H02 PCI J25 No The controller board is Call your authorized service not communicating representative with the PCI card in PCI slot J24 or J25 This could indicate a bad PCI card poor connection or problem in the PCI bus Half Speed Mode Yes The printhead or power Allow printer to continue supply is approaching printing Full speed will a hot state Half Speed resume automatically Mode helps the cooling when a lower printhead or process and should power supply temperature permit completion of is achieved print jobs Let the printer cool down Full speed will be restored Half Speed Mode helps ee prevent a PRINT when printing is resumed HEAD HOT or PWR Lower Print Intensity and SUPPLY HOT fault Print Speed to reduce which will stop the frequency of Half Speed printer Mode HEAD POWER FAIL Yes No Printhead lost power Replace the printhead Power off the printer for 15 seconds then power back on again If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative
135. OT Yes No The printhead has 1 Allow the printhead to cool See Manual become overheated down for 5 minutes then press PAUSE Resume printing 2 If possible reduce print intensity 3 If problem persists contact your authorized service representative PRINT HEAD UP Yes Printhead is not closed Close and latch the printhead Close Print Head and completely pivoting deck latched PRINTER HOT Yes No The printer has 1 Determine that the fan is See Manual detected higher than operating and that all air usual temperatures on vents are unobstructed inp conmolle PCBA 2 Power off the printer for 15 seconds then power the printer back on 3 Move the printer to a cooler location 4 Ifthe problem persists after moving the printer to a cooler location contact your authorized customer service representative PRINTER UNDER Yes Indicates that PNE has Press any key on the printer 338 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution PWR SUPPLY HOT Yes Power supply is hot Determine that the fan is See Manual operating and that all air vents are unobstructed Move the printer to a cooler area If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative RBN TAKEUP FULL Yes The ribbon takeup Empty the takeup spool Remove Used Rbn spool is full If the takeup spool is not full try re threading the ribb
136. Off Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next line e On Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the next form The factory default is Off Auto Uppercase This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using the ALPHA command e Disable The printer will print text in upper and lowercase e Enable The printer will print text in uppercase only The factory default is Disable Autoeject VGL Determines paper handling upon exiting the VGL Repeated Form and Dynamic Form commands e Disable Holds the print position at the bottom of the form e Enable Issues a form feed after the last form is printed so all pages will be physically printed The factory default is Disable Autowrap This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of text exceeds the right margin e Disable Truncates the text beyond the right margin until a CR or CR LF is received e Enable Automatically inserts a CR LF after a full print line The factory default is Disable Barcode var This command only applies for IBARC barcode command format e Low Resolution Sets barcode ratio dot values to be interpreted as line matrix printer dots 60 x72 High Resolution Sets barcode ratio dot values to be interpreted as print engine dots 800 x 300 or 203 x 203 The factory default is Low Resolution Emulation Submenus Bold e Disable Text is
137. One Char Enquiry The One Char Enquiry mode uses the Poll Character to detect a request from the host and sends a response back to the host This option also allows you to turn on and off this feature Table 8 One Char Enquiry Response Characters Printer State Response hex Online and Buffer Not Full 22 Online and Buffer Full 23 Offline and Buffer Not Full 20 Offline and Buffer Full 21 The Poll Character is removed from the data stream If the Data Protocol is set to ETX ACK ACK NAK or Series1 One Char Enquiry is automatically disabled The options are Disable the default and Enable Printer Status e Disable Printer status ignored e ENQ STX see Table 9 e ENQ see Table 10 When enabled the printer will respond to an ENQ character by sending a status byte to the host The type of status byte is determined by a Front Panel Menu selection The selections allowed are ENQ STX and ENQ The ENQ is removed from the data stream Table 9 ENQ STX Status Byte Bit Printer Status 0 Set when the printer is not online or the buffer is full 1 Set when the printer is offline Clear during a paper out or RibbonMinder fault Always set Set during a Head Open fault Set during a buffer overflow fault Set during a parity or framing error fault NIOJ O B OIN Always clear 251 Chapter 252 3 SERIAL PORT Table 10 ENQ Status B
138. P SPC TWINAX SETUP 3 from page 97 SFCC Char User SPC Type User Defined Defined St1 4 User Defined St2 4 User Defined Stp 4 SPC Char Set 170 MODE PTX NI 5F 5F 5B 0500 Internat 5 MODE 219 Set 1 lt gt 40 to FF 40 to FF 40 to FF 0037 English US MODE P5000 Set2 0273 Austr Germ MODE IBM Set 3_ _ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0290 Japan Kata 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK Translation Buffer Tbl Print Disable Enable Notes Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed 2 This menu appears only if Port Type under C T PORT is set to Twinax Appears only if CTHI emulation under PRINTER CONTROL is set to Simp Prot Conv 4 This menu appears only if you select the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu IPDS SETUP IPDS SETUP from page 98 Default Font Default Code Code Page Emulation Early Print Host Form Pag Subset Comp Length See page 172 See page 172 Version 0 4028 IPDS Off Disable Version 1 3816 IPDS On Enable Null Page Suppression Scalable Compatible Disable Enable Rotation VPA Check Enable Disable Expanded
139. PRINTRONIX User s Manual SL5000 and T5000 RFID Smart Label and Thermal Printers Software License Agreement Your printer contains among other software Printronix operating software including but not limited to the Embedded Configurable Operating System the eCos Software as embedded software The terms of this Agreement apply only to the eCos Software and all other embedded software supplied with the printer You accept the terms of this Agreement by your initial use of your printer 1 Object Code License Printronix grants you a nonexclusive license to use the Printronix Software the eCos Software and all other embedded software collectively the Embedded Software or the Software only in conjunction with the printer As the rightful possessor of the printer you may make a reasonable number of copies of the Software as necessary for backup configuration and restoration of the printer You must reproduce the copyright notice and any other legend of ownership on each copy of the Software you make You may transfer possession of the Software and its media to another party only with the transfer of the printer on which the Software is used If you do so you must give the other party a copy of these terms and provide all user documentation to that party When you do so you must destroy any copies of Software not resident in the printer Your license for the Software terminates when you no longer
140. RT XX fault message 333 LOADING PROGRAMINTO FLASH fault message 333 Loading ribbon 38 51 Logical Buf Size option 220 Low Volt Alert option 276 Low Volt Fault option 276 LP Emulation option 149 LPI option 220 M MAC Address option 257 262 Main configuration menu 95 Manual Calibrate option 141 Manual calibrate running 79 Manual conventions 21 Mark 71 Max Cache Memory option 157 Max Cached Char option 157 Max Font Buffer option 156 Max PI 16 option 220 Max Print Width option 220 Media 26 357 fanfold 46 general information 346 loading 38 Printronix 357 roll 39 MEDIA CONTROL menu 118 submenus 119 Media cutter 24 353 363 installing 363 Media cutter tray 24 353 367 installing 367 Media dimensions 347 Media guide installing 55 removing 63 Media handling modes 37 continuous 37 cut 38 peel off 38 tear off 37 tear off strip 37 Media Handling option 108 120 Media profile 74 Media Profile option 140 Media sensing dark background media with notches or holes 70 with dark background labels with gaps 69 with gaps notches or holes 68 with horizontal black marks 67 Media sensor 66 calibrating 72 disable 71 gap 71 mark 71 positioning 66 Media Sensor cleaning 81 Media specifications matrix 347 Memory expansion 353 385 Memory expansion for non IPDS printers only 24 Memory specifications 348 Menu mode 37 MENU MODE QUICK SETUP fault message 333
141. Range value to 60 in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu the default is 50 then run an Auto Calibrate again Cross ref to Auto Calibrate NOTE Any changes to Threshold Range will not take effect until you run an Auto Calibrate again This will raise the Gap Mark threshold high enough so that the printer will not falsely use the antenna or noise as the gap top of form Media Sensor Position M FEED 255 191 127 gedebog Paper Out 075 4 F a5 063 Gap 040 j H H ar JA 000 Detected Amplitude Detected Amplitude Indicates Type of Gap Mark of the Antenna of the Gap Sensing Selected 78 Running Manual Calibrate Running Manual Calibrate Manual Calibrate should be performed only when the values derived from Auto Calibrate fail to improve the media sensors ability to sense label length indicators on the installed media You must first enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu before accessing or initializing Manual Calibrate in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu NOTE Verify the Gap Mark Sensor option Gap Mark Advanced Gap Advanced Notch or Disable matches the installed media See Sensing Different Media Types on page 71 Ensure the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit sensing of the label length indicators See Positioning The Media Sensors on page 66 Ensure the Print Mode option selected in the QUICK SETUP menu matches th
142. Resident_IPDS Fonts 3816 Emulation FONT FGID FONT STYLE ari Hex Deci WIDTH PRINTSAMPLE OCR B 0003 3 144 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 orator 0005 5 144 ABCDEFGHI JABCDEFGHI J0123456789 Courier 000b 11 144 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Prestige Pica 000c 144 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Courier Italic 0012 18 144 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghij0123456789 OCR A 0013 19 144 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0l23456789 Arabic Kateb 0021 33 144 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghi j0123456789 Gothic Text 0028 144 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Katakana Gothic 002c 44 144 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Gothic Text 0042 66 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghij0123456789 Gothic Text Italic 0044 68 ABCDEFGHI Jabcde fghi j0123456789 Script 0054 84 ABCDEFGHI Jabedefght j01 23456789 Courier 0055 85 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Prestige Elite 0056 86 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghij0123456789 Letter Gothic 0057 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Prestige Italic 0070 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdet ghi j0123456789 Boldface Italic PSM 009b ABCDEFGHI Jabcdef ghi j 0123456789 Essay PSM 00a0 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Essay Italic PSM 00a2 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdef ghij0123456789 Arabic Yasmin PSM 00a6 ABCDEFGHIJabcdef ghij0123456789 Arabic Expanded PSM 00a9 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij012345 6789 Essay Light PSM 00ad ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Document PSM OOaf ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Gothic Text 00cc ABCDEF GH Jabcdef ghi j0123456789 Serif Text 00e5 ABCDEFGHIJabcdef ghi j0123456789 Gothic Text 00e6 ABCDEF GHIJabede f
143. SID Name SSID Name SSID Name Reset SSID Mode 01 15 16 30 31 32 Name Infrastructure XXX Pseudo IBSS Ad Hoc Min Xfer Channel Antenna Ant Preamble Power _ Rate Diversity 8 Mgmt Auto negotiate Default Primary Diverse Default 0 ms 1Mb sec 1 15 Auxiliary Primary Short 100 ms 2Mb sec Auxiliary Long 200 ms 5 5Mb sec 300 ms 11Mb sec 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms 800 ms 900 ms 1000 ms Transmit Internat Auth WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 Power Mode Method Format Width Byte1 100 Disable Open Hexadecimal 128 Bits 0 100 Enable Shared ASCII 40 Bits WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 WEP Key 1 4 WEP Key 1 4 Byte2 Bytes Byte4 Byte5 Byte6 Byte7 Notes Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if a Wireless Option is installed 2 You cannot change this value it is a display only item 3 A 1 32 character case sensitive string Characters can be alphanumeric symbols or spaces 4 This menu appears only if WEP Key 1 Width is set to 128 Bits 3 Appears only if a Symbol LA 5127 802 11 b g RF card is installed g Appears only if 802 11b only RF card is installed 263 Cha pter WLAN PARAMS from page 263 3 WLAN PARAMS
144. Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using a C T or TN5250 host interface Set for 13 2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the printer All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be truncated e 13 2 inches e Printer Width the maximum width of the printer The factory default is 13 2 inches Midline PY includes PN e Disable The Graphics mode Enabled command PY must be the first three characters of a line e Enable The PY or PN can occur anywhere in a line The factory default is Disable Emulation Submenus NL at MPP 1 Specifies the linespacing action when the printline exceeds the rightmost print position and text continues from the leftmost print position on a new line e On the default Moves to the first print position two lines down from the current position e Off Moves to the first print position of the next print line Null Handling This item allows the printer to either treat nulls as blank spaces or ignore them If nulls are ignored the print position does not move e Space the default Treats nulls as spaces e Ignore Ignores nulls Null Suppression Coax TN3270 This item allows the printer to either treat nulls as blank spaces or ignore them If nulls are ignored the print position does not move e Off the default Ignores nulls e On Treats nulls as spaces Null Suppression IPDS e Disable the default When disabled an
145. The range is from 1 to 60 seconds and the factory default is 10 seconds ETHERNET PORT Submenu ETHERNET PORT ETHERNET PORT from page 103 Timeout Switch Out On Notes 10 sec Data Timeout i 1 60 sec Session Close Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if the Ethernet option is installed ETHERNET PORT Submenu Timeout This item allows you to set the time that the printer when it has not received data from its host will begin to service all other host ports looking for data to print The range is from 1 to 60 seconds and the factory default is 10 seconds Switch Out On e Data Timeout factory default Allows Autoswitching when no data has been received for the selected Time Out period e Session Close Allows Autoswitching only when the Network Socket is closed If the Ethernet Adapter is not installed the Network Socket is always reported as closed and this menu option is ignored 255 Chapter 3 ETHERNET ADDRESS ETHERNET ADDRESS ETHERNET ADDRESS IP Address SEG1 from page 103 IP Address SEG2 IP Address SEG3 IP Address SEG4 Subnet Mask SEG1 Subnet Mask SEG2 000 000 000 000 000 000 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Subnet Mask Subnet Mask Gateway Gateway Gateway Gateway SEG3 SEG4 Address SEG1 Address SEG2 Address SEG3 Address SEG4
146. This menu appears only if RFID is not installed and there is a CST bundle in the Flash File System 6 Menu available if the small label printer option is installed 7 Menu available if CTHI option and IPDS option are not installed 8 xxx represents the emulation name selected in the Active IGP Emul menu COAX SETUP 37 page 164 TWINAX SETUP 37 page 167 Primary Sets Translation Tbl PA1 PA2 Buffer Reprint Buffer Print Coax Type Active Char Set Secondary Sets Early Print Cmpl SCS Buffer Cntrl Alt Set 80 9F Intervention Req CR At MPP 1 NL At MPP 1 Position Aft FF Last Char FF Null Suppression FF Validity Auto Skip At End FF After Job CR EM amp NL Translate Table Host Override Format Control Cancel IGP DCU Lead in Chars User Defined Stl 5 User Defined St2 User Defined Stp Change Case Set Text Orientn Max Print Width NOTES Primary Sets Translation Tbl Buffer Print Twinax Type Active Char Set Secondary Sets 5225 World Trade Cancel IGP DCU Lead in Chars User Defined St1 2 User Defined St2 5 User Defined Stp Alt Set 80 9F Graphic Chek Err Graphic Chek Cod LAC Option LAC Approx Set Text Orientn Host Override Format Control Max Print Width SPC COAX SPC TWINAX SETUP 3 4 SETUP 234 p page 169 page 170 SPC Type SPC Type Logical Buf Size SFCC Char User Defined St1 Buffer Print User Defined St
147. Threshold Range This option allows the user to select the optimal threshold range for the label stock in use The printer defaults to using a threshold range of 50 of the positive going pulse see Media Profile that represents each gap notch or mark detected after doing an Auto or Manual Calibrate The printer then detects anything within the label with that threshold range as TOF While this range is ideal for most medias some labels with a preprinted image liner gap or inlay can confuse the media sensor s causing a false TOF detection In most cases this can be resolved by selecting a higher threshold range so the printer will only trigger on the true TOF gap notch or mark position NOTE A new threshold range will not take affect until an Auto or Manual Calibrate is successfully performed A Media Profile should be run after a Calibrate to visually verify that the new range is the best possible selection The range is 5 to 95 in 5 increments The factory default is 50 Dynamic Sensing Disable Uses a fixed media sensor threshold Enable Continuously adjusts the media sensor s threshold to compensate for changing environmental factors such as temperature label liner contrast ribbon darkness etc The factory default is Enable 145 Chapter 3 PRINTER CONTROL PRINTER CONTROL PRINTER CONTROL from page 96
148. Treats the CR EM and NL commands as spaces The factory default is On Data Bit 8 e Enable The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer all 8 bits are used for data bits and characters in the hex 80 FF range can be accessed e Disable When the host PI line is enabled data bit 8 internally indicates PI line status To use the PI line disable data bit 8 and enable the Host PI configuration option under the PI Ignored option NOTE Data bit 8 is interpreted as either data bit 8 or PI signal but never both When enabled as data bit 8 data bit 8 has priority over the PI signal and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data and not to interpret PI line data Conversely when data bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used data bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function and you cannot access characters in the hex 80 FF range Therefore to access characters in the hex 80 FF range data bit 8 must be enabled The factory default is Enable Default Code Pag This item allows you to select the desired default codepage to be used when IPDS is not activating a Code Page ID Refer to the IPDS Programmer s Reference Manual for a list of the code pages The factory default is English USA Can Default Font This item allows you to select the desired default resident font to be used when IPDS is not activating a Font Global ID Refer to the PDS Programmer s Reference Manual for a list of the f
149. Twinax 228 SFCC d command option 228 Signal Strength option 265 Signals Centronics parallel interface 295 Simple Protocol Converter 149 161 Skip Cmd Prefix option 229 Slash 0 option 229 Slashed Zero option 229 Slew Relative option 229 Slew Speed option 129 SMT option 148 SMT Status option 114 Software Build option 239 SOFTWARE ERROR Recycle Power fault message 341 Software handshaking 302 Software downloading 279 Solving printer problems 309 SPC 161 SPC Char Set option 229 SPC COAX SETUP menu 169 SPC Null Supp option 229 SPC TWINAX SETUP menu 170 SPC Type option SPC Coax Setup 230 SPC Type option SPC Twinax Setup 230 Specifications 345 acoustic noise levels 351 cutter 349 environmental information 350 host interface 349 indicators and switches 348 media 346 390 media dimensions 347 memory 348 physical dimensions 351 power 350 power consumption 350 printer model 22 printing 345 ribbon 348 Specifying a power up configuration 90 Speed Exceeds Validator Limit fault message 341 SSID Name option 266 Standard C T Interface 161 Standard Chars option 158 Standard features 23 Standard host interfaces 293 Standard Sets option 230 Status and Display Indicators matrix 34 Status indicators 34 Status Port Numb option 277 Stop Bits option 246 Subnet Mask option 257 262 Supplies Department 19 Switch Out On option 243 255 T Tall Characters option 158 Tckt Life S
150. Units Set Label Peel Ribbon Low Full Length Present a Enable Disable Enable In Inches Manual Next TOF Disable Enable Disable In Millimeters Automatic End Of Form End Of Image Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Maximum value depends on the width of the printer model and printhead 2 You can change the unit value from inches to millimeters under Units in MEDIA CONTROL when Admin User is enabled 3 Based on the current value setting for Label Length in MEDIA CONTROL up to a maximum of 12 80 inches 4 Maximum value depends on the width of the printer model see Appendix A Specifications 5 Maximum value depends on model width and size of DRAM installed see Appendix A Specifications 6 This menu will not appear on Direct Thermal only printers 7 Resolution changes based on Label Resolution menu under MEDIA CONTROL if Small Label Printer option is installed 118 MEDIA CONTROL from page 118 MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Peel Off Continuous TOF Detect Ticket Save TOF Adjust A Mode Mode Fault Mode Mode Fast Standard 3 Labels Disable Disable Standard Tear Off 9 Labels Enable Enable Tear Strip Full 1 Label Cut Strip TOF Adjust Ribbon Reverse Label Calibrate Speed Resolution gt 0 00 to 0 40 inches
151. XL SETUP 9 from page 101 Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Character Character Horizontal Group Set DPI 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Letter Gothic Standard Sets Code Page 437 120 DPI 12 0 CPI 8 0 LPI Courier Arabic Sets Code Page 850 60 to 400 DPI 13 3 CPI 10 3 LPI OCR A Cyrillic Sets OCR A 15 0 CPI OCR B European Sets OCR B 17 1 CPI Greek Sets Multinational 20 0 CPI Hebrew Sets CP 858 EURO Turkish Sets UTF 8 See page 203 Vertical Prop Italic Print Slashed Left DPI Spacing Zero Margin 2 72 DPI Enable Disable Disable 0 characters 72 to 400 DPI Disable Forward Slant Enable 0 to 369 characters Backward Slant Right Top Bottom Print Define CR Margin 4 Margin Margin Char Set Code 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces CR CR 0 to 369 characters 0 to 451 linespaces 0 to 451 linespaces CR CR LF Notes Factory Default 1 These menus are available only when you enable Admin User under PRINTER CONTROL 2 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 3 The presence of this menu depends on the LP Emulation selection under PRINTER CONTROL 189 Chapter 3 PROPRINTER XL SETUP PROPRINTER XL SETUP from page 189
152. Y CODE Yes The software being Load the correct software VIOLATION aie is ee correct for 2 Power off the printer for 15 C PUNISI seconds then power back on again If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative SECURITY Yes The security key is Install the security key VIOLATION missing SOFTWARE Yes No 1 Application 1 Recycle the printer power ERROR software tried to If possible print a job that Recycle Power perform an illegal has previously worked printer function 2 If the problem persists 2 There are contact your authorized damaged logic service representative circuits on the controller PCBA Speed Exceeds Yes The Print Speed or Change the Print Speed or Validator Limit Slew Speed value is above 6 IPS as the power up default with the validator option installed or the user attempted to increase Print Speed or Slew Speed above 6 IPS Slew Speed value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu to 6 IPS or less when using the validator option and save the new value as the power up default 341 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued 342 both the MENU key and the DOWN arrow key in preparation to download software to the printer Displayed Message pada Explanation Solution TESTING Yes Normal power up 1 No action required HARDWARE message Printer is 2 If the printer does not PLE
153. a Software Product or any other performance under this Agreement 4 Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind including liability for negligence except liability for personal injury caused solely by our negligence for the Software Product covered by this Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or related to this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this Agreement 5 California law governs this Agreement Termination of License Agreement This License shall continue until terminated This license may be terminated by agreement between you and Printronix Inc or by Printronix Inc If you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not corrected within thirty 30 days after notice When this License is terminated you shall return to the place you obtained them the printer and all copies of the Software and documentation U S Government Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 242 227 7013 subdivision b 3 ii or subparagraph c 1 ii as appropriate Further use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52 227 19 c 2 Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTAND
154. a cover 3 Remove the foam pad between the front door and the frame 27 Chapter 1 Setting Up The Printer Foam 4 Remove the foam pad between the pivoting deck and the frame Pivoting Deck F Platen ae opt apes j wet pod D gt 7 lt Deck Lock Foam Pad Printhead Lever Open the pivoting deck by rotating the blue deck lock lever fully clockwise Remove the foam pad from between the printhead and the platen rubber roller 7 Close the pivoting deck and media cover 28 CAUTION WARNING CAUTION Installation Installation The following sections will guide you through the printer installation process 1 Place the printer on a flat level surface that allows easy access to all sides of the printer Never operate the printer while it is resting on its side or upside down 2 Check that the printer power switch is in the OFF O position Failure to properly ground the printer may result in electric shock to the operator In compliance with international safety standards this printer has been equipped with a three pronged power cord When inserted in a correctly wired power outlet the ground conductor will ensure that the printer chassis is at ground earth potential Do not use adapter plugs or remove the grounding prong from the cable plug If an extension cord is required ensure that a three wire cable with a properly grounded plug is used 3 Attach the AC power cord to the AC p
155. a width guide inward against the outer edge of the media Check the horizontal position of the lower media sensor located under the media guard and refer to Positioning The Media Sensors on page 66 47 Chapter 2 Loading Media And Ribbon Media left edge Guide Notch we Ne Ql X SS we i t 25 N S Paks 12 Align the left inside edge of the media with the guide notch located on the front edge of the tear bar t5calign 48 Loading Fanfold Media Pivoting Deck Lock Lever 13 Close the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise This locks the pivoting deck and printhead assembly into the printing position IMPORTANT Ensure the pivoting deck is down and locked before attempting to advance media or print Failure to do so will cause the PRINTHEAD UP fault message to display 14 Verify that Print Mode submenu is set for the media type installed direct or transfer The Print Mode submenu is located in the QUICK SETUP menu See Main Menu on page 95 for more information Also if thermal transfer media is installed see Loading Ribbon on page 51 15 Verify the printhead pressure is properly set See Printhead Pressure Adjustment on page 64 16 Verify the pressure blocks are properly positioned See Printhead Pressure Block Adjustments on page 65 17 Verify the Gap Mark Sensor
156. ad the latest attempted in the emulation software application program 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E03F DSI CXOWX Yes An illegal or 1 Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears load the latest attempted in the emulation software application program 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E03G DSI ECXIWX Yes An illegal or 1 Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears load the latest attempted in the emulation software application program 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message KARRA Explanation Solution E03H DSI ECXOWX Yes An illegal or Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears load the latest attempted in the emulation software application program Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E04A ISI NO TRA Yes An illegal
157. ag stock e Tear Off Strip Printer prints on the media and sends it out the front until the print buffer is empty then positions the trailing edge of the last label over the tear bar for removal e Tear Off After each label is printed the printer positions the label over the tear bar and waits for you to tear off the label before printing the next one on demand printing A Remove Label message will display to remind you to remove the label before the next one can be printed e Peel Off Prints and peels die cut labels from the liner without assistance The printer waits for you to take away the label before printing the next one on demand printing When the optional internal rewinder is installed with liner attached a Remove Label message will display to remind you to remove the label before the next one can be printed e Cut When the optional media cutter is installed it automatically cuts media after each label is printed or after a specified number of labels have been printed when a software cut command has been issued It cuts continuous roll paper labels or tag stock e Continuous Printer prints on the media and sends it out the front See Continuous Mode on page 135 for more information The factory default is Tear Off Strip Paper Feed Shift This option represents the distance to advance shift or pull back shift the stop position of a label when Tear Off Strip Tear Off Peel Off or Cut
158. ailable only when you select Enable in the Battery Monitor submenu Current Draw This displays the Current Draw in hundredths of an amp NOTE This menu is available only when you select Enable in the Battery Monitor submenu Voltage This displays the Voltage in hundredths of a volt NOTE This menu is available only when you select Enable in the Battery Monitor submenu Amp Hour Used This displays the Amp Hour Used in tenths of an amp hour NOTE This menu is available only when you select Enable in the Battery Monitor submenu Time To Go Alert This allows you to set the minimum Time to Go value for determining when a RECHARGE BATTERY warning occurs When the printer receives a status from the battery that is less than the value of the Time To Go menu the RECHARGE BATTERY warning displays on the LCD The range is 3 12 0 and the factory default is 1 0 Hours NOTE This menu is available only when you select Enable in the Battery Monitor submenu 275 Chapter 276 3 BATTERY CONTROL High Volt Alert This allows you to set the maximum voltage for determining when a BATT HIGH VOLT warning occurs When the printer receives a status from the battery that is greater than the value of the High Volt menu the BATT HIGH VOLT warning displays on the LCD The range is 12 5 16 0 Volts and the factory default is 16 0 Volts NOTE This menu is available only
159. al applications Outdoor environments Environments with chemicals Compliance labeling Accessories Accessories Field installable accessories available for your thermal printer are listed below Contact your authorized supplier for more details e Coax Twinax Host Interface e GPIO e Internal Rewind Kit e Media Cutter 4 6 and 8 inch e Media Cutter Tray used with a Media Cutter option e Memory Expansion 16 MB Flash SIMM e Network Interface Card 10 100 Base T e Online Barcode Validator e Print Cart e RFID Encoder e RS 422 e Scalable Fonts e Wireless NIC e Maintenance Manual e LP Programmer s Reference Manual e IGP PGL Programmer s Reference Manual e IGP VGL Programmer s Reference Manual e C T Programmer s Reference Manual e Network Interface Card User s Manual e PrintNet Enterprise Suite User s Manual 359 Appendix B _ Supplies And Accessories 360 ASCII Control Codes Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex NUL 0 00 32 20 64 40 96 60 SOH 1 01 33 21 A 65 41 a 97 61 STX 2 02 34 22 B 66 42 b 98 62 EXT 3 03 35 23 C 67 43 c 99 63 EOT 4 04 36 24 D 68 44 d 100 64 ENQ 5 05 37 25 E 69 45 e 101 65 ACK 6 06 amp 38 26 F 70 46 f 102 66 BEL 7 07 39 27 G 71 47 g 103 67 BS 8 08 40 28 H 72 48 h 104 68 HT 9 09 41 29 73 49 i 105 69 LF
160. al printhead must reach a set temperature in the shortest possible time Then it must cool down to the original temperature in the shortest possible time after printing Thus print quality is dependent on the precise control of the energy supplied to the thermal dots The dynamic print control is a method for predicting the quantity of heat required to print dots based on the results of the previous printing This prevents unevenness of print density and results in the printing of narrow ladder bar codes or vertical grid lines that are straight from the microscopic viewpoint Thermal Consumables Media Selection Since there are two print modes of operation there are two kinds of thermal media e Direct thermal media e Thermal transfer media Direct thermal media is paper coated with special chemicals that act as an accelerator acceptor dye and binder During direct thermal mode the heat from the thermal printhead contacts the paper and causes a chemical reaction Thermal transfer media requires ribbon A wide range of Printronix thermal transfer media is available such as film or synthetic paper substitutes Most of these media options can be die cut for easy label applications The wide selection of media sizes and face stocks have been tested with Printronix ribbons for print quality and usage Consult your Genuine Printronix Supplies Catalog call the Printronix Customer Solutions Center at 714 368 2686 or access the Prin
161. an Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 IBM CP864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 IBM CP1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO Arabic Lam One Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO Arabic Lam Two Polish POL1 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Turkish Sets UTF 8 Serbo Croatic 2 t CP 774 eas Data Gen Turk DEC Turkish IBM Turkish IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult Semene TRI IBC Turkish Bull Turkish Primary Subset ASCII USA Primary Subset ASCII USA AS400 Turkish ASCII USA EBCDIC ASCII USA French Unisys Turkish French German German NCR Turkish German Swedish English PST Turkish English Danish Norw Danish UNIS 1 Turkish Danish Norwegian Swedish Code Page 853 Swedish Finnish Italian INFO Turkish Italian English Spanish Win CP 1254 Spanish Dutch Japanese Code Page 857 Japanese French French Canadian Azeri French Canadian Spanish Dutch Latin American Italian Finnish Norwegian Turkish Swiss Danish II Japanese Spanish II Extended Subset CP 858 Latin Am II Multinational EURO Extended Subset Barcode 10 cpi Code Page 437 Mult DP 10 cpi Code Page 850 Mult DP 12 cpi Notes Mult LQ 10 cpi Greek DP 10 cpi Greek DP 12 cpi Greek LQ 10 cpi Grap DP 10 cpi Grap LQ 10 cpi Factory Default To access the desired basic character set use the and keys To select the set press the key After you have selected the
162. and trailing character spacing distance of the PDF for UPC EAN barcodes The range is 0 01 0 10 inches in 0 01 inch increments and the factory default is 0 10 inches Lead in Chars You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through standard coax emulations To access these features send text commands in the data stream The commands must have a start and end code Three sets each containing a start and end code are available e User Defined e Set1 start code lt end code gt e Set2 start code end code e Set3 start code _ end code _ The factory default is User Defined 219 Chapter 220 3 Left Margin Set in characters Character zero is defined as the far left edge of the page and column numbering increments from left to right The range is 0 369 characters and the factory default is 0 characters Logical Buf Size Refers to the size of the printer buffer which should be set the same as the host screen buffer size If the host screen size is unknown use 1920 The options are 960 1920 2560 3440 and 3564 The factory default is 1920 LPI This item selects the number of lines printed per inch The range is 6 10 and the factory default is 6 Max PI 16 e Enable A paper slew of 0 15 will move 1 16 lines e Disable A paper slew of 1 15 will move 1 15 lines A paper slew of 0 will always move 1 line The factory default is Enable Max Print Width
163. anual displays run Manual Calibrate again NOTE The amount of media sampled during Manual Calibrate is based on the length of a label and the transitions detected without error between a label and its label length indicators 10 Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE displays 79 Chapter 2 Cleaning Cleaning 11 Press the FEED key several times Each time you press FEED the media advances one label length and stops NOTE After a form feed the position of the leading edge of the next label depends on the type of Media Handling mode selected under the QUICK SETUP menu Tear Off and Tear Off Strip Media Handling positions the label edge at the tear bar while Continuous positions the label edge under the printhead 12 Once the correct values are confirmed save them to the desired configuration menu before powering off the printer See Saving A Configuration on page 88 80 Depending on the media used the printer may accumulate residues media dust adhesives etc as a by product of normal printing To maintain top printing quality you should remove these residues by cleaning the printer periodically Exterior Clean the exterior surfaces with a clean lint free cloth If necessary use a mild detergent or desktop cleaning solution NOTE Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or solvents Interior Clean the interior of the printer by removing any dirt and lint with a soft bristled non metal
164. ard with this option NIC Wireless This card provides wireless 802 11b g connectivity without expensive cabling and reconfigurations required from a wired network PNE is standard with this option The Printing Process e Online Barcode Validator Analyzes each bar code to ensure it meets stringent scanning standards This inspection validates the symbology specifications of both linear and PDF417 bar code images Bad bar code labels are cancelled and good replacement labels are printed automatically e Power Cart The power cart is an ergonomically designed cart with durable steel frame and battery support systems for maximum maneuverability The combination of the wireless T5000r and the rugged power cart delivers a mobile on demand bar code printing system e RFID Encoder The RFID Radio Frequency Identification encoder reads and writes information to smart labels with embedded RFID tags NOTE The RFID encoder is standard on the SL5000r and optional for the T5000r e RS 422 Serial interface option e TN5250 TN3270 Enables your printer to communicate with an IBM host through a NIC using the 5250 3270 datastream This feature allows you to use an application generated for the coax twinax emulation to be printed through the NIC NOTE RFID is not supported by TN5250 3270 applications For more information about printer options see Appendix B Thermal Printer Technology Quiet and fast with excellent print quality
165. atch the length from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark Manual Calibrate supports label lengths up to 24 inches Pwr Up Action e Disable No movement at power up e Auto Cal When the printer is first powered on it will complete its initialization and self tests and then perform an Auto Calibrate Once the Auto Calibrate is complete the printer will momentarily display the Sensed Distance determined by the Auto Calibrate e Seek TOF Assumes user has already calibrated media and used gap mark sensor This moves the media to TOF Top of Form at power up Seek TOF will not be performed if the Gap Mark Sensor is set to Disable or if the Ticket Save Mode is set to Enable The factory default is Disable 141 Chapter 142 3 CALIBRATE CTRL HeadClose Action Selects whether the printer performs a selected action after a print head open fault condition is cleared e Disable No media motion after a print head open fault condition is cleared e Auto Cal Performs a media calibration every time the print head open fault condition is cleared e Seek TOF Moves the media to TOF Top Of Form when the printhead is closed The media should already be calibrated using Gap Mark sensor NOTE A seek to TOF will not occur if Gap Mark Sensor is set to Disable or Ticket Save Mode is set to Enable The factory default is Disable NOTE If Ticket Save Mode is enabled you will not be a
166. atically cuts media after each label is printed or after a specified number of labels have been printed when a software cut command has been issued It cuts continuous roll paper labels or tag stock NOTE The Cut option is not allowed if the cutter is not installed The error message OPTION NOT INSTALLED displays Continuous Printer prints on the media and sends it out the front See Continuous Mode on page 135 for more information The factory default is Tear Off Strip MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Paper Feed Shift This option represents the distance to advance shift or pull back shift the stop position of a label when Tear Off Strip Tear Off Peel Off or Cut media handling option is enabled The allowable range is 1 00 inches to the current Label Length value setting up to a maximum of 12 80 inches in 01 inch increments The factory default is 0 00 inches Label Length This option specifies the user selected Label Length in inches or millimeters In most applications the user selected Label Length will match the physical label length Physical label length is the actual label length of the media installed When setting label length consider the following Label Length can be manually entered via the control panel MEDIA CONTROL menu or sent via host computer using the appropriate software command A Host Forms Length Label Length value sent from the host computer will override and change the
167. ault 2 Mgmt Protocol PNE Port Number PNE Port Timeout Status Port Numb Mgmt Port Number DATE GPIO page 278 CONTROL Time Date Refer to the GPIO User s Guide Notes 1 Appears only if the Real Time Clock option is installed 2 Available only when Battery Monitor is set to Enable in the BATTERY CONTROL menu Functional only when the printer is connected to a power cart via serial interface and the cart has an ICP Intelligent Control Panel option 3 Appears only if a Symbol LA4121 RF card is installed 4 Appears only if a Cisco card is installed 105 Chapter QUICK SETUP QUICK SETUP QUICK SETUP from page 95 Print Print Print Media Paper Feed Label Intensity Speed Mode Handling Shift Length 9 3 6 ips Transfer Tear Off Strip 0 00 inches 2 4 or 6 inches 4 15 to 15 1 ipsto10 ips Direct Tear Off 1 00 to Xinches 3 00 1 to 99 0 inches 5 Peel Off Cut Continuous Label Ver Image Hor Image Orientation Gap Mark Width 9 Shift Shift Sensor 6 4 1 6 6 or 8 5 inches 2 4 0 00 inches 2 0 00 inches 2 Portrait Disable 00 1 to 8 5 inches 4 1 00 to Xinches 1 00 to 1 00 inches Landscape Mark Inv Portrait Gap Inv Landscape Advanced Gap Advanced Notch Auto Calibrate Validator Active IGP XXX Power Up Funct 7 Emul Diagnostic
168. be truncated and lost If a fault occurs while printing a hexdump the printer reverts to the normal fault state When the fault is cleared the printer resumes printing the hexdump either a partial line with a form feed or nothing at all Top of Form remains unaffected The Impact Prin 09 54 68 65 20 49 6D 70 61 63 74 20 50 72 69 GE ter Emulation pr 74 65 72 20 45 6D 75 6C 61 74 69 6F 6E 20 70 72 ints in one up 69 6E 74 73 20 69 6E 20 6F 6E 65 2D 75 70 2C OA two up and fou 09 74 77 6F 2D 75 70 2C 20 61 6E 64 20 66 GF 75 r up page window 72 20 75 70 20 70 61 67 65 20 77 69 6E 64 GF 77 S 214 73 2E OC OD OA Figure 5 Sample Hex Dump To begin a hex dump first place the printer offline and enable the Hex Dump Mode option from the control panel Next place the printer online Finally send data to the printer from the host computer Any data received from the host is dumped to the printout To cancel a hex dump first place the printer offline Then disable the Hex Dump Mode option from the control panel The paper may then be advanced to the next Top of Form The options are Disable the factory default and Enable Horizontal DPI This feature enables the thermal printer to print images as close as possible to the same size as those originally programmed for a line matrix or laser printer by selecting a horizontal resolution that matches that of the printer that the file was originally generated for Although t
169. been completed the printer will print the remaining 2 labels along with a blank 2 label File Contents Print Output Label Label Label a a 1 2 3 Label Blank 3 Label Solution 2 The user sets Auto Label Width to 2 configures the Num Auto Labels to 3 and enables the Auto Label Mapping feature Printer Operation for Solution 2 The printer will print the first 2 label by itself the second 2 label by itself and finally the last 2 label by itself Label Label Label Label Label Label 127 Chapter 128 3 MEDIA CONTROL Example 3 Past Maximum File Width Problem A file has been constructed with three horizontally adjacent 4 labels The user now desires to use this file with a printer that has a 8 physical width The user should have used a solution similar to one of the solutions in the section above but the user erroneously enters an Auto Label Width of 12 and a Num Auto Labels of 3 Printer Operation Maximum Num Auto Labels 20 12 1 67 rounded up to 2 The printer will automatically reduce the Num Auto Labels to 2 Example 4 Blank Label Case Problem A file exists with two horizontally adjacent 4 labels The user now wants to use this file with a printer that has a 4 physical width The user decides to set the Num Label
170. ble 00 0 inches Add Nothing Enable Enable 1 to 255 Var Length 00 0 to 03 0 inches Add 0 Var Dynamic Len Add X Disable Optimized PI Slew CR Edit Skip Cmd Ignore Text Power on Ratio Range Prefix IGP PGL Disable 16 Disable Enable Disable Enable Enable 15 Enable Disable Enable Disable Ext Execute AI 00 Select SO Ignore Mode Select Char Do FF Copy Spaces Char at TOF Disable Disable 14 Disable o Enable Enable Enable 0 to 255 Enable 0 to 255 Disable Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 179 Chapter 3 IGP PGL SETUP IGP PGL SETUP from page 179 o IGP100 Expanded Scalable Forms PGL UPC Compatbl Font Size Handling Normal Descenders Disable Scalable Normal Disable LP Menu Always Enable Block Block Auto Eject PGL Menu Never Alt Block 1 Auto TOF Only With PDF 1 2 5 C39 User Def Lead Trunc Dyn Selection Compatbl Ratio PDF Dist Data Leading Zero Disable Enable 0 10 inches Disable Trailing Space Enable Disable 0 01 to 0 10 inches Enable X2 DPD Modulo 7 CD Vertical Boundary Repeat Form Preparser Adjust Check Opt Port 0 Dots Enable Enable Disable 20 to 20 dots Disable Disable Enable Notes 180 Factory Default Italicized items are ava
171. ble to set HeadClose Action to Auto Cal or Seek TOF A temporary message Disable Ticket Save Mode will display NOTE If there is data pending data in buffer when the head open fault is cleared Auto Cal and Seek TOF are ignored Online Auto Cal NOTE Online Auto Cal will not function when the validator is enabled or when Error Recover under MEDIA CONTROL is enabled see page 132 The options for Online Auto Cal are e Disable e Enable Whenever the printer is brought online it automatically performs an Auto Calibrate see Auto Calibrate on page 139 Once the Auto Calibrate is complete the printer momentarily displays the Sensed Distance determined by the Auto Calibrate and then resumes printing any pending jobs NOTE If using the Online Auto Cal feature you must first enable it prior to printing any data NOTE If Ticket Save Mode is enabled you will not be able to set Online Auto Cal to Enable A temporary message Disable Ticket Save Mode will display The factory default is Disable CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus Gap Windowing This feature compensates for any early falling edges or spurious peaks and troughs that may appear within the gap length in media These edges or peaks and troughs can cause unreliable detection of the leading edge of the next label top of form Use Gap Windowing to resolve the following problems e Loss of one or more complete serialized labels e Start of an image
172. bled then power down and power up and the validator is not connected or not functioning the error message Validator not communicating will display briefly The Validator menu will not display If the validator is installed the default is Enable Active IGP Emulation See page 150 for more details xxx Diagnostics See page 151 for more details Save Config This option allows you to save up to eight unique configurations to meet different print job requirements This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings for each new job The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost if you turn off the printer If the Protect Configs parameter is enabled the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted first The factory default configuration cannot be changed See Saving A Configuration on page 88 for details The factory default is 1 Power Up Config You can specify any one of nine configurations 1 8 saved custom configurations or Factory as the power up configuration The factory default is Factory SMT Status You can enable or disable SMT functionality PAA Select Tool You can set the PAA Select Tool to None the default CST 1 or CST 2 Refer to the PrintNet Enterprise Suite User s Manual CONFIG CONTROL CONFIG CONTROL from page 95 Load Save Print Delete Power Up Protect Config
173. but the cutter itself is open in the down position or the cutter upper enclosure is removed the printer cannot detect the cutter When using the cutter the printer must be powered on with the cutter in the up position and the cutter upper enclosure installed Displayed Message P Explanation Solution NON VOLATILE Yes No The printer assigns a If the message appears at MEMORY FAILED certain amount of power up call your simulated NVRAM for authorized customer storage of saved service representative configurations Large If the message appears emulations reduce the while saving a amount of Space configuration the printer is available Tor saving out of memory and will not configurations which save that or subsequent ae a ar ales configurations Previously f eig saved configurations are configurations can be i f still okay saved If this message appears when saving a Limit the number of saved configuration it means configurations to seven the printer is out of memory Previously saved configurations will still be available but the one that was saved when the message appeared is not in memory If this message appears at power up it means the flash memory is defective OPTION NOT Yes If the printer is Check that the cutter INSTALLED powered on with the option is installed connected in the up position and the upper enclosure installed before powering on the printer Install the cutter option or change to t
174. changed manually The factory default is 0 00 inches Gap Mark Thresh This menu item sets a value that when exceeded by the output of the media sensor is recognized by the printer as a gap or black mark When Auto or Manual Paper Calibrate is performed the value displayed is equal to the gap mark threshold value set by this procedure If running the procedure does not provide a reliable Top Of Form detection e g when using unusual media the Gap Mark Thresh value can be manually set to the desired value The range is from 000 to 255 and the factory default is 171 Paper Out Thresh This menu item selects a value that when exceeded by the output of the media sensor is recognized by the printer as a paper out condition When Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed the value displayed is equal to the paper out threshold value set by this procedure If running the procedure does not provide a reliable paper out detection e g when using non standard media the Paper Out Thresh value can be manually set to the desired value The range is from 000 to 255 and the factory default is 180 CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus Paper Out Sensor Selects which type of media sensing Reflective or Transmissive will be used to detect a paper out condition The printer automatically selects the type of sensing based on the Gap Mark sensing selected see Table 6 on page 138 NOTE Whenever you select Transmissive you must position the upper media
175. cifies the type of printing to be done e Transfer Indicates Thermal Transfer printing ribbon installed e Direct Indicates Direct Thermal printing no ribbon and requires special heat sensitive media The factory default is Transfer Media Handling This option specifies how the printer will handle the media labels or tag stock e Tear Off Strip Printer prints on the media and sends it out the front until the print buffer is empty then positions the last label over the tear bar for removal e Tear Off After each label is printed the printer positions the label over the tear bar and waits for you to tear off the label before printing the next one on demand printing A Remove Label message will display to remind you to remove the label before the next one can be printed e Peel Off Prints and peels die cut labels from the liner without assistance The printer waits for you to take away the label before printing the next one on demand printing When the optional internal rewinder is installed with liner attached a Remove Label message will display to remind you to remove the label before the next one can be printed See Peel Off Mode on page 135 and Peel Present on page 134 for more information NOTE The Tear Off and Peel Off options are not allowed if the cutter is installed The error message INCOMPATIBLE WITH CUTTER displays e Cut When the optional media cutter is installed it autom
176. conjunction as shown in Table 6 on page 138 If you change the Gap Mark Sensor or Paper Out Sensor you must recalibrate the media 2 This menu appears only if an RFID encoder is installed 3 This menu appears only if a Validator is installed 4 This menu will not appear on Direct Thermal only printers 5 This menu appears only if RFID is installed and there is no CST bundle in the Flash File System 6 This menu appears only if RFID is not installed and there is a CST bundle in the Flash File System 7 xxx represents the emulation name selected in the Active IGP Emul menu 95 Label Width Ver Image Shift Hor Image Shift Orientation Auto Map Select Auto Label Width Num Auto Labels Slew Speed Print Direction Label Wait Time Pre Peel Mode Pre Peel Adjust Lbl Missing Fit Clip Page Error Recover Ribbon Width gt Display Ribbon 2 Ribbon Low Rbn Takeup Full 3 Units Set Label Length Peel Present Peel Off Mode Continuous Mode TOF Detect Fault Ticket Save Mode TOF Adjust Mode TOF Adjust Ribbon Calibrate 3 Reverse Speed Label Resolution 96 Paper Out Sensor i Manual Calibrate Pwr Up Action HeadClose Action Online Auto Cal Gap Windowing Gap Length Cal in Peel Mode Min Calib Delta Use Label Length Threshold Range Dynamic Sensing NOTES Chapter 3 Main Menu MEDIA CALIBRATE PRINTER CONTROL CTRL CONTROL page 118 page 138 page 146 Print Intensity Gap Mark
177. d into the pivoting deck until the retainer clips snap it in place Make sure that the cable assemblies do not extend past the printhead cover and into the media or ribbon path Restore The Printer To Operation 308 1 Inspect the light brown area of the printhead for smudges or fingerprints If necessary gently clean the light brown area with a soft lint free cloth or a cotton swab moistened with isopropyl alcohol or use a Cleaning Pen P N 203502 001 2 Install the ribbon and media e g paper label or tag stock material w Close the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise Figure 7 Close the media cover Plug the AC power cord into the printer and the power source Set the printer power switch to On Press to place the printer in Menu mode Press the J and keys at the same time until ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED displays 9 Press until DIAGNOSTICS displays 10 Press J until DIAGNOSTICS Reset Head Data displays 11 Press J to select Reset Head Data The message RESETTING HEAD DATA displays This sets the Head Print Distance and Head On Time values to zero ONO A 12 Test printer operation and check print quality by selecting the Diagnostics Printer Tests menu and printing one of the test patterns Refer to page 238 Solving Other Printer Problems Solving Other Printer Problems Table 16 Printer Problems and Solutions
178. d label must be entered in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu e 3 Labels The printer displays a Gap Not Detected fault and stops printing when media has advanced a distance equal to three or more times the Label Length value set in menu e 9Labels e 1 Label The factory default is 3 Labels Ticket Save Mode This option determines the action of the media for Continuous std Tear Off Tear Off Strip and Cut Media Handling Modes after the printer is first powered up or after the printhead has been opened and then closed When enabled this option eliminates wasting label s or ticket stock when the printer advances media to search for the next TOF position e Enable The printer will assume that media is at the TOF position after cycling power or after the printhead is opened and then closed When a print job is sent it is printed without advancing media to search for the next TOF position NOTE The user must ensure that media is at the correct TOF position cross perforation liner gap notch or mark at the tear bar edge before cycling power or before closing and locking the pivoting deck In addition media must be calibrated and the correct Media Handling Mode Label Length and Gap Mark Sensor selected and saved as the Power Up Config Option applies to 5 inch or longer label lengths only e Disable The printer assumes that the media is not at the correct TOF position after cycling power or after the printhead is opened and t
179. d printhead assembly into the printing position IMPORTANT Ensure the pivoting deck is down and locked before attempting to advance media or print Failure to do so will cause the PRINTHEAD UP fault message to display 14 Verify that Print Mode in the printer configuration menu is set for the media type installed Direct or Transfer The Print Mode submenu is located in the QUICK SETUP menu See Main Menu on page 95 for details 15 Verify the printhead pressure is properly set See Printhead Pressure Adjustment on page 64 16 Verify the pressure blocks are properly positioned See Printhead Pressure Block Adjustments on page 65 17 Verify the Gap Mark Sensor selection matches the type of media installed See Sensing Different Media Types on page 71 44 Loading Roll Media For direct thermal operation no ribbon required e Ifyou have not run an Auto Calibrate do so now See Running Auto Calibrate on page 72 e Ifyou have already run an Auto Calibrate complete the following steps a Close the media cover b Press the FEED key once to verify that the media advances c Press the PAUSE key to place the printer online For thermal transfer operation which uses a ribbon Complete the ribbon loading procedure see Loading Ribbon on page 51 45 46 Chapter 2 Pivoting Deck ticfanfd Loading Media And Ribbon Loading Fanfold Media Fanfold Tension Arm
180. d rate that is greater than 19200 you may need to use RS 422 to prevent data loss You may also need to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 50 feet 15 meters for RS 232 or 4000 feet 1220 meters for RS 422 A copper conductor twisted pair telephone cable with a shunt capacitance of 16 pF foot 52 5 pF meter terminated in a 100 ohm resistive load must be used for the RS 422 RS 232 Table 14 RS 232 Serial Interface Connector 9 Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Receive Data RXD 2 Transmit Status amp Control 3 Chassis Signal Ground 5 Data TXD Clear To Send CTS 8 Request To Send RTS 7 Data Set Ready DSR 6 Data Terminal Ready DTR 4 Data Carrier Detect DCD 1 Received Data RXD Serial data stream to the printer Transmitted Data TXD Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting status and control information to the host Subject to protocol selection Request To Send RTS Control signal from the printer Subject to configuration Clear To Send CTS Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready to receive data status signals from the printer Data Set Ready DSR Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ina ready condition Data Carrier Detect DCD Status signal to the printer The O
181. data Upr Case Select Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it receives from the host computer When enabled all characters are printed in uppercase e Disable the default Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as lowercase prints uppercase characters received from the computer as uppercase e Enable Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as their corresponding uppercase equivalents prints uppercase characters received from the computer as uppercase User Def Ratio This option allows you to ignore the user defined barcode ratio and replace it with the default ratio X1 e Enable the default Allows the user defined barcode ratio e Disable The user defined barcode ratio will be replaced with the default ratio X1 233 Chapter 234 3 User Defined St1 Start Code 1 This option allows you to define your own value in ASCII characters for the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu St1 specifies Start Code 1 See Lead in Chars on page 219 for additional information The range is 40 FF and the factory default is 5F User Defined St2 Start Code 2 This option allows you to define your own value in ASCII characters for the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu St2 specifies Start Code 2 See Lead in Chars on page 219 for additional information The range is 40 FF and the factory default is 5F User De
182. dding a header e PTX_SETUP e Labeling Applications Once a TrueType font is downloaded it will be stored in the Flash File System as a resident font Regardless of printer power cycles the downloaded font will stay in the printer until the user deletes it The user can find the list of all printer resident fonts under PRINTER CONTROL gt View File List after enabling Admin User in the Printer Control menu To delete a downloaded font from the Flash File System the user should select the font under PRINTER CONTROL gt Delete File List and then select Optimize amp Reboot 288 Printronix Windows Driver NOTE A will be added in front of the selected file name to indicate that the file has been deleted The deleted file name will not be removed from the View File List and Delete File List until the user selects Optimize amp Reboot Printronix Windows Driver A TrueType font can be downloaded from a PC through the Printronix Windows Driver 1 Load the Printronix Windows driver provided with your printer on the Manuals and Utilities CD on Windows 2000 NT XP Server 2003 Vista 2 Once the printer driver is installed on the PC right click the printer driver and select Properties 3 Click the TT Font Download tab to access all the available system TrueType fonts 4 Select the TrueType font s from the Available System TrueType Fonts pane you want to download 5 Click the Download button to download fon
183. displays w Press or until the Cut option displays Press to select Cut An asterisk displays next to Cut OO Oe Or oe Relock the key by pressing and at the same time then press PAUSE to put the printer back online 9 If the bar code validator is installed adjust the validator beam See the Online Data Validator User s Manual 10 Make sure any media sticking out of the platen goes in the cutter entrance slot 11 Test the printer cutting operation and print quality by selecting the Diagnostics Printer Tests menu and printing one of the test patterns Refer to DIAGNOSTICS on page 237 12 To save the configuration parameters refer to Saving A Configuration on page 88 Removing The Media Cutter Set the printer power to O OFF Pull the cutter assembly to the down open position Using the appropriate metric hex key remove the two screws securing the cutter bracket to the lower support assembly Unplug the RJ 11 connector from the RJ 11 receptacle Remove the media cutter from the printer Install the front door assembly on the printer lower support assembly 365 Appendix D _ Removing The Media Cutter 366 E Media Cutter Tray Installation Assembling The Media Cutter Tray Slots Cutter Tray NI Bin Flanges 4 Z ye SS we Cutter Tray Base Figure 1 Attaching the Cutter Tray Bin to the Cutter Tray
184. dvanced Gap or Advanced Notch the default is 20 138 CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus Gap Mark Sensor The available options specify the sensor type needed for detecting the Top of Form position on media with label length indicators gaps notches holes or black marks Disable Select when using media with no label length indicators no gaps notches holes or black marks or when you want the printer to ignore all existing label length indicators on the installed media NOTE When you select Disable the length of each label is based on the Label Length value entered in the MEDIA CONTROL menu or the value sent via host software e Mark Select when using media that has horizontal black marks located on the underside of the label liner or tag stock The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the black mark e Gap Select when using media with a liner space between die cut labels or when using tag stock with notches or holes as label length indicators on white background media The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the die cut label trailing edge of the gap notch or hole e Advanced Gap Select when using media that has liner gaps between die cut labels with black background The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the die cut label trailing edge of the gap notch or hole e Advanced Notch Select when using media with notches or holes that interrupt a black vertical line o
185. e This option determines whether scalable characters are sized based on normal scaling or based on the size of block characters If the option Block is set then the scalable character are made to be the same size as block characters in the old IGP X00 printers The options are Normal the factory default and Block SCS Buffer Cntr This option functions like the Early Print Complete feature Early Print Cmpl Coax TN3270 on page 208 but is for SCS only Don t Wait The printer does not wait until the buffer is printed before sending the print complete back to the host Wait Until Done The printer waits until the buffer has printed before sending the print complete back to the host NOTE If set to Wait Until Done printer speed may be reduced The factory default is Don t Wait Select Char Instructs the IGP which decimal character 0 255 to ignore from the host The range is 0 255 and the factory default is 0 Select CPI This item selects the characters per inch CPI value The options are 10 0 12 0 13 3 15 0 17 1 and 20 0 CPI The factory default is 10 0 CPI Emulation Submenus Select LPI This is the number of lines to be printed per inch For example at 6 Ipi there is 1 6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line The options are 6 0 8 0 and 10 3 LPI The factory default is 6 0 LPI Select SFCC PGL You can specify which decimal code 1 255 will be used a
186. e displayed The printer will then advance media the distance needed to accurately detect the label length indicators then stop at the Top of Form position and momentarily display the Sensed Distance The process takes a few seconds to complete The end result will be a change to the Gap Mark Threshold Paper Out Threshold and Sensed Distance values that the printer will use The changes in values take effect immediately within the current configuration menu Auto Calibrate is completed successfully when the Sensed Distance displayed correctly matches that of the installed media When Gap is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge of one gap to the trailing edge of the next gap one label one gap When Mark is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark Auto Calibrate supports label lengths up to 24 inches Validator Funct This menu appears only if a validator is installed e Enable The printer will command the validator to begin scanning and errors will be reported The counters will be incremented while the validator is enabled e Disable The printer will not command the validator to begin scanning and no errors will be reported The counters will not be incremented while the validator is disabled 113 Chapter 114 3 QUICK SETUP NOTE If you save a configuration with the validator ena
187. e parameters to match those of the host 319 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued that the barcode fails checksum or is missing the checksum digit Displayed Message S Explanation Solution BUFFER OVERRUN Yes Receive overrun serial 1 Make a configuration interface printout 2 Verify that the printer matches the host serial interface configuration settings for Data Protocol Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Data Terminal Ready and Request to Send 3 Set the printer serial interface parameter to match those of the host Calibration Yes The validator has Press the PAUSE key to clear warning detected that it needs the message Perform the calibration This is a calibration procedure reminder message and described in the Validator does not halt printing User s Manual CALIBRATION FAIL Yes Calibration values Run Manual Calibrate again See Manual derived from Manual Calibrate were not acceptable CANNOT Yes Run Calibrate was 1 Select another Media CALIBRATE attempted with Peel Handling option in the Disable Peel Off Off Media Handling QUICK SETUP or MEDIA selected CONTROL menu NOTE You cae 2 Enable Cal in Peel Mode in perform Auto Calibrate the CALIBRATE CTRL in Peel Off mode if Cal menu ippee Mode Ena NOTE Admin User must Be prepared to catch Enable labels during Auto Calibrate Checksum Fai
188. e c lt Enter gt cd download lt Enter gt 287 Chapter 4 Using TrueType Fonts 14 Enter the following command filename exe pb lt Enter gt where filename exe is the file name you noted in step 10 This command takes the file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into the flash memory on the printer controller board 15 After the software successfully downloads into flash memory the printer will reset itself 16 If you have an external NIC a Set the printer power switch to O Off b Connect the external NIC to the parallel port c Connect the ethernet cable to the NIC d Starting at step 4 page 284 repeat the Downloading Software Through The NIC Using FTP procedure In other words use the two key method to download software again This ensures that all necessary code downloads into printer memory Using TrueType Fonts TrueType fonts allow you to customize the look of your forms and labels You are able to download TrueType fonts purchased from various sources into your printer The fonts are available for purchase on websites such as www fonts com and www myfonts com The following sections discuss how to e download TrueType fonts see below e select and print TrueType fonts see page 292 Downloading TrueType Fonts You can download TrueType fonts to your printer by using any of the following e Printronix Windows Driver e PGL Emulation Online e Download Mode after a
189. e label liner is wound on the rewinder The printer waits for you to take away the label before printing the next one on demand printing A Remove Label message will display to remind you to remove the label before the next one can be printed For Label Peel off information see page 60 e Cut When the optional media cutter is installed the printer automatically cuts media after each label is printed or can cut the media after a specified number of labels have been printed using a software cut command Once you have decided on the mode configure the printer See Chapter 3 for more information Loading Media And Ribbon CAUTION CAUTION IMPORTANT 38 NOTE This section describes the procedures for loading various types of media and ribbon You can also refer to instructions on the printer itself on a label on the inside of the media cover The term media in this manual refers to all the different kinds of paper label or tag stock material that can be printed on by the printer Your thermal printer can print on continuous paper adhesive backed labels or non adhesive tags packaged in roll or fanfold form DO NOT TOUCH the printhead or the electronic components under the printhead assembly The discharge of electrostatic energy that accumulates on the surface of the human body or other surfaces can damage or destroy the printhead or electronic components used in this device Do not close the pivoting deck wi
190. e 71 5 Perform an Auto Calibrate See Running Auto Calibrate on page 72 68 Positioning The Media Sensors Sensing Media with Dark Background Labels with Gaps Advanced Gap Visible Red Beam Se Lower Sensor Upper Sensor Media Guard Opening NOTE Ribbon is not displayed in this illustration The upper and lower sensors are designed to function with or without ribbon installed The upper sensor and lower sensor are used together to detect liner gaps between die cut labels that have a black or dark background on white or clear liner 1 Position the lower sensor directly under the center of the gap and then place the upper sensor directly over the lower sensor Check the position of the lower sensor by looking through the long narrow opening in the media guard Use the visible red light emitting from the lower sensor as a reference pointer Use the sensor handle to manually position the sensor to the center of the gap in the media Then use the handle on the upper sensor to position it directly above the lower sensor NOTE When using ribbon you may need to slide the ribbon to one side to 4 adjust the upper sensor Select Advanced Gap in the Gap Mark Sensor submenu under the CALIBRATE CTRL menu See Sensing Different Media Types on page 71 Perform an Auto Calibrate See Running Auto Calibrate on page 72 69 Chapter 2 Printing Adjustments Sensing Dark Background M
191. e 860 Greek 8859 7 IBM CP 864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 IBM CP 1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO Arabic Lam One Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO Arabic Lam Two Polish POL1 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Turkish Sets Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Code Page Code Page OCR A OCR B Multi 437 850 Notes ASCII USA EBCDIC national CP 858 EURO Factory Default To access the desired basic character set use the and keys To select the set press the key After you have selected the basic set access the subset selection menu by pressing the 4 key Once in the subset menu access the desired subset by pressing the and keys and select it by pressing the key Character subsets are accessed and selected in the same manner 203 Chapter 204 3 Character Set P Series Serial Matrix Proprinter Epson FX This item allows selection of the character set to be used by the printer Printing UTF 8 Encoded Unicode Text Normally to print multinational characters on a printer the user needs to select a character set that contains the correct characters Character sets are groups of 256 locations the first 128 locations are occupied by the ASCII set and the locations in the upper half are reserved for graphics symbols or multinational characters For example to print Cyrillic the user would select a Cyrillic
192. e ET ERRAITEN ER RETA gt PRP EAL TIMERS EER H FRR ARRAS EEB RT ARR ERAS RECA BBE READE AE RAHE gt SER RR cE AIA SF are ARS Te OR EARE PLE A Rae gt DARD o IMPORTANT WARRANTY INFORMATION PRINTER WARRANTY Printronix warrants to the purchaser that under normal use and service this printer excluding the thermal printhead purchased hereunder shall be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of shipment from Printronix In the United States and Canada this period provides for onsite support service in the first 90 days of ownership with return to factory service provided from the 91st day of ownership until the end of one year costs of shipping to be borne by the purchaser Consumable items such as media and ribbons are not covered under this warranty This warranty does not cover equipment or parts that have been misused altered or used for purposes other than those for which they were manufactured This warranty also does not cover loss shipping damage damage resulting from accident or damages resulting from unauthorized service THERMAL PRINTHEAD Printronix warrants the printhead for a period of one hundred eighty 180 days or 1 000 000 linear inches for direct thermal use or 2 000 000 linear inches for thermal transfer use whichever comes first The warranty does not cover printheads that have been misused damaged due to improper cleaning or da
193. e IEEE 1284 parallel port the printer s Auto Switching is able to handle both jobs in the order they were received without the user having to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs Standard Host Interfaces e Centronics parallel e EEE 1284 parallel bidirectional e Serial Port RS 232 e USB 2 0 Universal Serial Bus Optional Host Interfaces e Coax Twinax e Ethernet 10 100Base T e Wireless NIC e RS 422 293 Chapter 5 Centronics Parallel Interface Centronics Parallel Interface Table 11 Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin DATA LINE 1 2 ACKNOWLEDGE 10 CHASSIS GROUND 17 Return 20 Return 28 DATA LINE 2 3 ONLINE 13 GROUND 30 Return 21 Return 28 DATA LINE 3 4 FAULT 32 Spares 14 Return 22 Return 29 DATA LINE 4 5 PAPER EMPTY 12 No Connection 34 35 Return 23 Return 28 36 DATA LINE 5 6 BUSY 11 5 Volts 18 Return 24 Return 29 DATA LINE 6 7 Return 25 DATA LINE 7 8 Return 26 DATA LINE 8 9 Return 27 DATA STROBE 1 Return 19 PAPER INSTRUCTION 15 Return 29 PRIME 31 Return 30 NOTE The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer 294 must not exceed 15 feet 5 meters Centronics Parallel Interface Signals Centronics Parallel Interface Signals Table 12 Centronix Parallel Interface Signals Signals Purpose Data Lines 1 through 8 Provide eight standard or inv
194. e Print Intensity in the MEDIA SETUP menu or via the host software Check that the Label Width parameter value does not exceed the width of the media installed Set the Label Width in the MEDIA SETUP menu Run the Checkerboard test print pattern from the DIAGNOSTICS menu Note Any imbalance of the print on the page The printhead pressure may need adjustment Remove the printhead completely and re install it ensuring the cables are correctly seated 309 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 16 Printer Problems and Solutions continued Symptom Solution Explanation LCD message display is illuminated and the printer appears to be working but nothing prints and Invalid Data displays This message informs the user that the printer has received data but no valid commands were found This typically occurs when an incorrect emulation or SFCC was selected This message will continue to display until new data is received or when the printer is put offline 1 If the emulation and SFCC are correct additional diagnostic information can be obtained by selecting the desired option under the xxx Diagnostics menu found under the Emulations menu 2 Afer selecting the desired option rerun the job to obtain the additional diagnostic information ONLINE status indicator is flashing 1 Check the LCD for a specific fault message Press the PAUSE key and if a fault message displays refer
195. e Wait Until Done Control Code Intervention CR At NL At Position __ Last Char FF _ Null Req MPP 1 MPP 1 Aft FF Suppression Send To Host On On Off On Off Do Not Send Off Off On Off On FF Validity Auto Skip FF After Job CR EM amp NL Translate Host AtEnd m Tabe Override gt off Off Off On Default Disable On On On Off Downloaded Enable Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed 2 This menu appears only if Port Type under C T PORT is set to Coax 3 This menu appears only if the CTHI emulation under PRINTER CONTROL is set to Standard 4 When in SPC Mode the default is Enable 164 COAX SETUP from page 164 Right to Left Notes Factory Default Format Cancel Lead in User User User Defined lt _ Control IGP DCU Chars Defined Sti Defined S12 Stp Disable Enable User Defined 5F 5F 5B Enable Disable Set 1 lt gt 40 to FF 40 to FF 40 to FF Set 2 Set 3_ _ Change Set Text Max Print Case Orientn Width Dual Case Control By Host 13 2 inches Mono Case Left to Right Printer Width Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in
196. e applications using synthetic facestocks media such as polypropylene polyethylene and polyester All ribbons are available in widths of 2 36 60mm 3 15 80mm 4 33 110mm 5 12 130mm 6 00 152 4mm 6 70 171mm and 8 67 220mm Genuine Printronix Media Genuine Printronix Media Printronix provides a wide variety of sizes colors and shapes of labels and tags readily available to meet all of your labelling needs The Printronix Expanded Die Library details hundreds of label sizes and configurations which are quickly obtainable through the Printronix custom order system without the typical added costs and delays associated with the creation and tooling of a special die to match your requirements Genuine Printronix ThermaLine Media ThermaLine TE ee Media Type Description Typical Applications Media 110 Premium coated thermal transfer paper Compliance shipping general warehouse address Permanent acrylic adhesive AIAG LOGMARS product ID hardware parts supply Media 120R Premium coated thermal transfer paper Temporary product ID pricing point of sale shelf Removable adhesive marking labels which can be cleanly removed Media 180T 7 0 mil coated thermal transfer paper Retail hangtag warehouse bin and pouch inserts tagstock inventory control work in process general purpose tag Media 210 Economy direct thermal paper Short life deli grocery shipping work in proce
197. e as a factory option or field installable kit that also includes a mating connector for field interface installation instructions and operation manual Internal Label Rewinder In label peel off mode peels off labels one at a time before printing the next label and rewinds the liner into a discardable roll In batch rewind mode rewinds printed labels into a removable roll IPDS Available for coax twinax a NIC or a combination of both The printer may be ordered with this option installed and the required hardware to support it or it can be field installed by an authorized service representative at a later date The printer must have a coax twinax interface or NIC and 300 dpi printhead installed to support this field installed option NOTE RFID is not supported in IPDS applications Media Cutter Automatically cuts printed media when the media exits the printer Available for 4 6 and 8 inch printers Media Cutter Tray Used with the media cutter option to catch and collect the cut media in a bin Memory Expansion 16MB Flash SIMM replaces standard 8MB Flash SIMM to provide additional memory for fonts forms and logos Network Interface Card NIC The 10 100BaseT NIC connectivity option provides wired networks in either an internal or external option that allows you to attach the printer to a LAN Local Area Network instead of directly to a host computer The PrintNet Enterprise Suite PNE remote management software is stand
198. e block further to the left Right Pressure Block The right pressure block should be positioned with its pointer handle on 4 inch printer models near the right edge of the media or ribbon in use Turn the lead screw knob clockwise to move the block right or counterclockwise to move it left Check the pressure block positioning by printing the Grey test pattern 1 Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE appears on the LCD 2 Press the TEST PRINT key until Printer Tests Grey displays 65 Chapter 2 Printing Adjustments 3 Press the key to start the Grey test pattern The pattern will start and continue to print Press again to stop printing Check the test pattern If necessary reposition the pressure blocks to obtain a uniform print density across the media width In most cases only the right pressure block may need to be adjusted 6 Whenever you reposition a pressure block run the Grey test pattern to verify the print pattern is acceptable Positioning The Media Sensors Your printer is equipped with upper and lower media sensors that detect the top of form position on media with label length indicators gaps notches holes or black marks These sensors also detect when a Paper Out condition exists The media sensors should not be placed in the path of media features that could cause false gap detection or paper out faults Such features are dark pre printing rounded die cut label corners vertical gap
199. e command to support this feature is EXECUTE NAME Pages The PPI ZGL Execute command is APQ Pages NOTE If the correct execute command is absent from the print file O Pages will continually display on the control panel LCD e Disable The Pages remaining to be printed will not display Instead the Active emulation and interface will display on the second line of the control panel LCD The factory default is Disable Admin User e Disable When disabled this function does not permit access to submenus which would not normally be changed by a typical user e Enable When enabled this function permits access to submenus which would not normally be changed by a typical user The factory default is Disable 159 IMPORTANT 160 Chapter 3 EMULATIONS EMULATIONS Overview This section covers the following emulations Coax page 164 Twinax page 167 SPC Coax page 169 SPC Twinax page 170 IPDS page 171 TN3270 page 175 TN5250 page 177 IGP PGL page 179 IGP VGL page 181 PPI ZGL Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter PPI ZGL Programmer s Reference Manual PPI TGL Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter PPI TGL Programmer s Reference Manual PPI IGL Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter PPI IGL Programmer s Reference Manual PPI STGL Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter PPI STGL Programmer s Reference Manual PPI DGL Refer to the Printer Protocol Inte
200. e examples below assume that the logical form length is set to the label length Example 1 Simple Case Problem A file has been constructed with two horizontally adjacent 4 labels for a printer with a physical width of 8 The user now wants to use this file with a printer that has a 4 physical width Solution The user sets Auto Label Width to 4 the width of the label configures the Num Auto Labels to 2 and enables the Auto Label Mapping feature Printer Operation The printer will print the first leftmost 4 label first Once the first label has been completed the printer will print the second 4 label These labels will appear vertically adjacent on the form Thermal Printer Output Line Matrix Printer Output Label 1 Label 1 Label 2 Label 2 lt Wide Web Width gt Narrow Web al Width MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Example 2 Uneven Number Case Problem A file has been constructed with three horizontally adjacent 2 labels The user now desires to use this file with a printer that has a 4 physical width Solution 1 The user sets Auto Label Width to 4 the width of two labels configures the Num Auto Labels to 2 and enables the Auto Label Mapping feature Printer Operation for Solution 1 The printer will print the first two labels at the same time These first two labels will be horizontally adjacent Once these labels have
201. e media installed Select Direct for heat sensitive media no ribbon required or Transfer for thermal transfer media ribbon required If you try to do a Manual Calibrate when Peel Off Media Handling is enabled the LCD will display CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel Off Before you can do a Manual Calibrate you must select another media handling mode 1 Press to place the printer in Menu mode 2 Press the J and J keys together until ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED displays 3 Press until PRINTER CONTROL displays 4 Press T until Admin User displays then press until Enable displays 5 Press J to select Enable An asterisk appears next to Enable 6 Press until CALIBRATE CTRL displays 7 Press J until Manual Calibrate Run Calibrate displays then press the 8 Follow the instructions displayed on the LCD Example REMOVE RBN amp MEDIA Press Enter indicates that you must open the pivoting deck and remove the ribbon and media from under the printhead close and lock the pivoting deck and press the J key 9 During the last step of Manual Calibrate the printer will advance the media and attempt to detect the label length indicators and stop at the Top of Form position The Sensed Distance value will then display for one second The calibrate is successful when the Sensed Distance value correctly matches that of the installed media If CALIBRATION FAIL See M
202. e options are 1 4 1 2 1 2 4 8 and 16 seconds and Off The factory default is 1 4 second Timeout This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and check the other selected port types for data to print When the printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time it needs to time out in order to service the other ports The range is 1 60 seconds and the factory default is 10 seconds Report Status e Disable factory default When a fault occurs on the printer only the active port reports the fault to the host e Enable The port will report any fault even when it is not the current active port Switch Out On e Data Timeout factory default Allows Autoswitching when no data has been received for the selected Time Out period e Session Close Allows Autoswitching only when the Network Socket is closed If the Ethernet Adapter is not installed the Network Socket is always reported as closed and this menu option is ignored 243 Chapter 244 3 PARALLEL PORT Prime Signal e Disable factory default The parallel port will not perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the Prime Signal e Enable The parallel port will perform a warm start reboot if the host asserts the Prime Signal Data Polarity The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your host computer e Standard factory default Does not expect the host computer to i
203. e printer the operational ability to connect to any PC or network system supporting parallel or serial interfaces and to three different IBM host systems e System 3x e AS 400 e 327X Control Units The SPC will support the following third party models for Twinax MODE 219 MODE IBM and MODE P5000 The printer emulations supported by the SPC are Twinax 5225 and Coax 3287 The SPC also provides a range of interfaces available in your thermal printer Centronics Serial Coax and Twinax Also supported are Epson Proprinter XL P Series Serial Matrix VGL and PGL emulations The SPC has the ability to handle multiple print jobs concurrently through coax twinax and parallel and serial interfaces This is accomplished through the Auto Switching feature Because of hardware restrictions coax and twinax cannot be selected together 161 Chapter 162 3 EMULATIONS IGP PGL The PGL emulation is the software based Printronix Graphics Language PGL for the Printronix thermal printer family It is based upon and compatible with the IGP 100 200 400 board It includes the following features On Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels with a preprinted look for each application PGL programs control all graphic functions dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing time Graphic capabilities include boxes vertical and horizontal lines with user selectable thickness logos a
204. e state e Offline The printer powers up in the offline state This selection must be saved as a power up configuration to be used The factory default is Online Ptx Setup SFCC Allows you to choose the hex value of the ASCII character you wish to use as the SFCC for the PTX SETUP command Valid hex values are 01 FF The factory default value is hex 21 which corresponds to the character PRINTER CONTROL Submenus Cancel Key e Disable e Enable When enabled the y key may be used in offline mode to clear all data in the print buffer and deleted data will not be printed The factory default is Disable When the Coax Twinax interface is installed the factory default is Enable Ret Status Port This option selects the port for the Return Status Commands i e STATUS PGL and HS PPI ZGL to send the status data back to the Host The options are Automatic factory default Serial E NET Stat Port USB IEEE 1284 Disable and E NET Data Port Compatibility This parameter allows you to make T5000 series thermal printers compatible with other printers When trying to preserve compatibility with respect to barcodes you may not always be able to make them equal in size This is due to the various dot per inch differences between printer types When an exact match cannot be made the barcode is reduced in size so that the form bounds will not be compromised and the barcode will be readable e Default Use fo
205. ed in the emulation software application program 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E07 ILLEGAL INS Yes An illegal or 1 Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears load the latest attempted in the emulation software application program 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E08 FLOATINGPNT Yes An illegal or 1 Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears load the latest attempted in the emulation software application program 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E NET INIT Yes Ethernet is initializing No action required E NET READY Yes Ethernet has finished No action required initializing E NET RESET Yes Ethernet interface is No action required being reset EC SOFTWARE FAIL Yes No Engine control Power off the printer for 15 seconds then power back on If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative 326 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message eee Explanation Solution ENT
206. edia Types Sensing Different Media Types The printer s media sensors can detect the different types of label length indicators on a large variety of media types This is accomplished by selecting the correct sensor option Gap Mark Advanced Gap Advanced Notch or Disable under Gap Mark Sensor in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu Figure 9 on page 347 illustrates the different media types and label length indicators used on them 1 Press to place the printer in Menu mode 2 Press J and J together until ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED displays 3 Press until CALIBRATE CTRL displays 4 Press J until Gap Mark Sensor Disable the currently enabled option displays 5 Press or until the option that matches the type of label length indicators on the installed media displays e Mark Select when using media that has horizontal black marks located on the underside of the label liner or tag stock e Gap Select when using media with a liner space between die cut labels or when using tag stock with notches or holes as label length indicators on white background media e Advanced Gap Select when using media that has liner gaps between die cut labels with black background e Advanced Notch Select when using media with notches or holes that interrupt a black vertical line on the underside of the media Disable Select when using media with no label length indicators no gaps notches holes or black marks or when you
207. edia with Notches or Holes Advanced Notch Upper Sensor Upper Sensor Handle Black line on underside of media Media Guard Opening NOTE Ribbon is not displayed in this illustration The upper and lower sensors are designed to function with or without ribbon installed The upper sensor and lower sensor are used together to detect notches or holes in media with a black or dark underside This combination can be found on tag stock that has a black vertical line along one edge on the underside of the label interrupted by a notch or hole used as the label length indicator 1 Position the lower sensor directly under the center of the notch or hole and then place the upper sensor directly over the lower sensor 2 Check the position of the lower sensor by looking through the long narrow opening in the media guard Use the visible red light emitting from the lower sensor as a reference pointer 3 Use the sensor handle to manually position the sensor to the center of the notch or hole in the media Then use the handle on the upper sensor to position it directly above the lower sensor NOTE When using ribbon you may need to slide the ribbon to one side to adjust the upper sensor 4 Select Advanced Notch in the Gap Mark Sensor submenu under the CALIBRATE CTRL menu See Sensing Different Media Types on page 71 5 Perform an Auto Calibrate See Running Auto Calibrate on page 72 70 Sensing Different M
208. efault is Enable NOTE Changing the form length via the EXECUTE command changes the LP Emulation logical dimensions The difference between Var Length and Var Dynamic Len is as follows With CREATE NAME 0 and the following parameters e 10 dynamic fields defined in CREATE mode AFO AF1 AF9 with different positions e three dynamic fields are used in EXECUTE mode provided with data when Var Length is selected the label length is based on the longest printed element among the 10 dynamic fields defined in CREATE mode When Var Dynamic Len is selected the label length is based on the longest printed element among the three dynamic fields defined in EXECUTE mode If there is static data in the form the static data position is taken into consideration when determining the longest printed element Host Form Length IPDS Enables or disables changing the form length by the host e Disable The host is unable to change the form length e Enable The host may change the form length The factory default is Disable 215 Chapter 216 3 Host Form Length VGL Sets the printer page size e Enable Sets the printer label size equal to Label Length from the host form length command For more information refer to the IGP VGL Programmer s Reference Manual e Disable Sets the printer label size equal to the Label Length set in the front panel under the PRINTER CONTROL menu The factory default is Enable
209. efault value is 0 00 inches 110 QUICK SETUP Submenus Orientation This menu item selects the image orientation to be used when printing the label Portrait Portrait refers to vertical page orientation where the height of a page is greater than its width The top edge of the image is parallel to the leading edge of the media The following illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Portrait orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Inverse Portrait using PPI ZGL lt q 4 inches A FEED elpeW aul 6 inches jo bp Buipes QU O Je ered s oBew y jo bp do y1 T Leading Edge e Landscape Landscape refers to horizontal orientation where the width of a page is greater than its height The top edge of the image is the left edge of the media The following illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Landscape orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Inverse Landscape using PPI ZGL lt q 4inches _y FEED A 2S 5 28 oO Boek 6 inches Boos ogogo D pg cose FSaoO y Leading Edge inv Portrait Inverse Portrait refers to vertical page orientation where the height of a page is greater than its width The top edge of the image is parallel to the trailing edge of the media The following illustration is an exa
210. el Length value entered in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu or the value sent via host software e Mark Select when using media that has horizontal black marks located on the underside of the label liner or tag stock The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the black mark 112 QUICK SETUP Submenus e Gap Select when using media with a liner space between die cut labels or when using tag stock with notches or holes as label length indicators on white background media The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the die cut label trailing edge of the gap notch or hole e Advanced Gap Select when using media that has liner gaps between die cut labels with a dark or black background The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the die cut label trailing edge of the gap notch or hole e Advanced Notch Select when using media with notches or holes that interrupt a black vertical line on the underside of the media The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the die cut label trailing edge of the gap notch or hole The factory default is Disable Auto Calibrate This feature is used to improve the sensitivity and reliability of the Media Sensor in detecting gaps notches holes or black marks on the installed media as well as a paper out condition Auto Calibrate can also be initiated from the TEST PRINT key the CALIBRATE CTRL menu or the DIAGNOSTIC menu Press the key with Auto Calibrat
211. elected is automatically used when Pre Peel Mode is enabled The range is from 0 00 to 2 00 inches in 01 inch increments The factory default is 1 00 inch LbI Missing Fit Allows the Label Taken Sensor to first detect the presence of a label at the tear bar for Peel and Tear Off Media Handling Mode only e Enable The printer generates a fault condition if a missing label is encountered Disable The printer does not generate a fault condition if a missing label is encountered The default is Enable Clip Page This option determines how the printer handles images that are too large for one physical page length when using gap or black mark media e Enable When the user selected page length is greater than the physical page length the printer clips the excess data to fit the physical page The excess data is lost The media sensor constantly looks for the gap notch hole or black mark and when detected uses it as the Top of Form position for the next label and clips any remaining data from the label being printed e Disable When the user selected page length logical length is greater than the physical page length dictated by the gap notch hole or black mark on media the printer continues to print the remaining excess data onto the next physical page 131 Chapter 132 3 MEDIA CONTROL The media sensor looks for the gap notch hole or black mark only after the media has advanced the distance specified b
212. electing this item by pressing the key causes the printer to print the currently selected character set Printer Pl e Disable the default The LP Emulation is configured with the PI line disabled e Enable The LP Emulation is configured with the PI line enabled Printer Select e Disable the default Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes e Enable Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received Prop Line Length e Enable the default The position of the next graphic element will be determined by the physical length of a text string when using a proportional spaced font e Disable The position of the next graphic element will be determined as if the font was monospaced all characters had the same specified width Prop Spacing Each printed character is contained inside a character cell The width of the character cell includes the character and the space around the character e Enable the default The width of each character cell varies with the width of the character For example i takes less space to print than m Using proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed documents giving text a typeset appearance e Disable Each character cell is printed with the same width Each column in the printed text will line up PSeries Dbl High This menu option allows printing compatibility between the current and olde
213. enerated terminator is detected and ignored e Disable System terminators following a graphics command are sent to the printer and result in paper motion The factory default is Absorb Motion Active Char Set Selects which group of character sets Primary or Secondary will be active The factory default is Secondary Set Al 00 Spaces This option is designated for EAN UCC 128 barcodes whose application identifier Al is 00 e Disable The printable data field is printed with the Al enclosed in parentheses This is the standard EAN UCC 128 format e Enable The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated by spaces This option is IGP X00 compatible The factory default is Disable Alt Char Set e Set 1 Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code e Set 2 Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F The factory default is Set 1 Alt Set 80 9F P Series Serial Matrix Epson FX e Control Code Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code e Printable Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F The factory default is Control Code However when the CTHI option is installed the factory default is Printable Emulation Submenus Alt Set 80 9F Coax Twinax TN3270 TN5250 e Printable Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F e Control Code Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code
214. ength of a die cut or removable label When using Mark sensing the Label Length value is the physical distance from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark The factory default for Clip Page is Enable Error Recover This option determines how the printer handles data that was printing when an error occurred e Disable The printer will not reprint the label that was printing when the error condition occurred e Enable The printer reprints the label that was printing when the error condition occurred The factory default is Disable MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Ribbon Width When Same As Paper is selected the printer automatically adjusts the ribbon operating parameters to match the installed media width In those cases where the media width is less than the installed ribbon width the Set In Menu option should be selected After selection the ribbon width is set to the proper value by pressing the J key and choosing the actual ribbon width using the and keys The chosen width is then selected by pressing the key The factory default is Same As Paper Display Ribbon When enabled and the printer online 1 to 4 asterisks will display on the LCD indicating the approximate amount of ribbon remaining on the supply spindle Online Roin 470 to 625m 314 to 469m a 157 tp 313m 1to 156m The options are Enable the factory default and Disable Ribbon Low When enabled and
215. ength value entered in the QUICK SETUP menu matches the physical length of the installed media Entering the correct length forces the printer to advance media far enough during calibrate for long labels so actual gaps notches and marks can be detected and reduce the amount of media advanced for short labels If you try to do an Auto Calibrate when Peel Off Media Handling is enabled the LCD will display CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel Off Before you can do an Auto Calibrate you must select another media handling mode Running Auto Calibrate Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE appears on the LCD Press J and 1 together until ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED displays Press the TEST PRINT key until Printer Tests Auto Calibrate displays Press Media advances until it can accurately detect the label length indicators and then stops at the Top of Form position The Sensed Distance value will then display for one second PON 5 Auto Calibrate is successful when the Sensed Distance value correctly matches that of the installed media e Gap Mark Sensor Gap Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch The Sensed Distance value is the physical length of one label plus the length of one gap notch or hole e Gap Mark Sensor Mark The Sensed Distance value is the physical distance from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next e Gap Mark Sensor Disable Not applicable If Gap Mark Sensor is set to D
216. equires only periodic cleaning Keep your fingers away from the cutter blades They are sharp Perform the following procedure whenever too much dust or debris is visible 1 afr oO DN Set the printer power switch to O Off Rotate the deck lock lever fully clockwise until the deck swings upward Remove the cutter top cover by loosening the two captive thumbscrews Place the cutter in the down open position Use a vacuum or can of compressed air with a nozzle around the area of the cutter blade to remove any dust or debris Use a cloth with a light amount of WD 40 oil to clean adhesive from the cutter blade and upper or lower stainless steel cutter guides Adhesive oil must be cleaned from the blade and guides with a dry cloth to prevent dust attraction Do not use isopropyl alcohol to clean the cutter blade it dissolves oils required for lubrication 7 8 9 10 11 12 Place the cutter in the up closed position Install the cutter top cover and tighten the two captive thumbscrews Properly route the media through the printer and cutter Close the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise Set the printer power switch to On Test the printer cutting operation by pressing the TEST PRINT key and selecting one of the test patterns to print 83 Chapter 2 Cleaning 84 3 Overview Configuring The Printer This chapter provides information about e Setting sav
217. er printhead pressure adjustment will affect print quality To adjust pressure rotate the printhead pressure adjustment dial see Figure 6 For more information refer to Printhead Pressure Adjustment on page 64 Also the printhead should be cleaned frequently to ensure that foreign material does not accumulate on the printhead and interfere with heat transfer If smears voids or white lines appear in the printed form the printhead should be cleaned with a printhead cleaning pen see Figure 6 The cleaning should be done as a matter of routine whenever you install a new ribbon thermal transfer mode or when you install new media direct thermal mode Pivoting Deck Printhead Pressure Adjustment Dial Printhead Elements Deck Lock Lever Figure 6 Cleaning the Printhead 304 Determining Printhead Wear Determining Printhead Wear The most common signs of a worn printhead are fixed vertical streaks that are always the same size and in the same place on the printout To determine if vertical streaks are caused by a worn printhead follow these methods 1 Clean the printhead thoroughly with the printhead cleaning pen Test again for vertical streaks 2 Remove the printhead see page 306 and examine it for contamination or damage such as scratches dents or other marks on the light brown area containing the heating elements Clean and install it then test again for vertical streaks 3 Load an alternate
218. er will resume receiving data XON The data does not have any End of Text codes XON XOFF is a non block protocol ETX ACK End of Text Acknowledge The host controls the flow of communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the block with an End of Text ETX signal When the printer receives the ETX signal it will acknowledge the ETX thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data ACK NAK ACK means acknowledge the device acknowledges it has accepted a transmission NAK means negative acknowledge the device did not receive the transmission Series1 1 Char The printer controls the flow of communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off using response characters sent to the host If the number of valid bytes in the buffer reaches 75 percent of the buffer size the online or offline and buffer full response character is sent If the buffer is completely full an online or offline buffer full response is sent every time a character is sent from the host Whenever the printer state changes to online or offline the appropriate response character is sent If the idle response option is enabled the printer will send a response character every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer size If a poll character is received configurable from the Poll Character Xx Hex option on the front panel from hex 0 through FF the printer will
219. erfaces installed in the printer ao fF oO DN 6 Using Windows Explorer create a directory named download at the root level of your C hard drive C download Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer s CD drive Open the readme txt file on the CD There are two emulation sets with corresponding part number files from which to choose CT IPDS IGP ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL TN IGP ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL Both emulation sets include the LP emulation They are offered in two file formats exe and prg Use exe files to download through the NIC 9 Identify which emulation set you want to download into the printer and note the filename that corresponds to that emulation The filename is a six digit number plus exe For example 123456 exe This is the file you will download into the printer 10 Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 6 11 Start a command prompt session The Start Menu icon is usually labeled MS DOS Prompt or Command Prompt 12 At the command prompt type c lt Enter gt ed download lt Enter gt 13 Enter the following command filename exe n xxXxX xxx xxx xxx lt Enter gt where filename exe is the file name you noted in step 9 and XXX XXX XXX XXX S the IP address of the printer This command takes the file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into the flash memory on the printer controller board NOTE If the software does not down
220. erforming a forward or reverse move The options include e Standard Normal forward and reverse ribbon calibration e Forward Only Forward only ribbon calibration The factory default is Standard NOTE When GPIO Print amp Apply is set to Enable Ribbon Calibrate is set to Forward Only This automatic setting of the Ribbon Calibrate menu occurs only once per power cycle and only if the menu is changed with the control panel Reverse Speed This option sets the speed at which the media moves in reverse direction The range is 1 to 6 ips in increments of 1 ips The factory default is 2 ips NOTE Speeds above 2 ips may cause ribbon smudging depending on ribbon and media Label Resolution Selects the resolution for setting Label Length and Label Width submenus The options include e Coarse Uses 0 10 inch or 1 0 mm increments for setting the Label Length and Label Width based on the Units menu selection e Fine Uses 0 01 inch or 0 1 mm increments for setting the Label Length and Label Width based on the Units menu selection The factory default is Coarse NOTE The factory default is Fine when the Small Label Printer option in installed 137 Chapter 3 CALIBRATE CTRL CALIBRATE CTRL CALIBRATE CTRL from page 96 Gap Mark Auto Sensor Calibrate Disable Run Calibrate Mark Gap Advanced Gap Advanced Notch Media Profile Print Profile Sensed Distance
221. erted levels from the host that specify character data plot data or a control code Data Line 8 allows access to the extended ASCII character set You may enable or disable this line via the Data Bit 8 parameter on the Centronics Parallel submenu Data Strobe Carries a low true 100 ns minimum pulse from the host that clocks data into the printer Acknowledge Online A low true pulse from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data transfer A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is ready for data transfer and the PAUSE key on the control panel has been activated When the printer is in online mode it may accept data from the host Paper Empty PE A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is in a paper empty or paper jam fault Busy Prime A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer cannot receive data A high true level from the host to indicate the printer should perform a warm start printer is reset to the power up configuration values Paper Instruction PI Carries a VFU signal from the host with the same timing and polarity as the data line Fault A low true level from the printer indicates a printer fault IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface The IEEE 1284 supports three operating modes which are determined by negotiation between the printer and
222. es the job is done e Off There is no synchronization between the NIC and the printer NOTE For detailed information about using the NIC refer to the Network Interface Card User s Manual Offline Process e Disable the default When set to disable the printer does not process parallel network data while offline e Enable When set to enable the printer continues to process but not print the current network parallel job while the printer is offline until the printer s buffer is full 260 WLAN ADDRESS WLAN ADDRESS from page 103 IP Address IP Address IP Address IP Address Subnet Mask Subnet Mask SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG4 SEG1 SEG2 000 000 000 000 000 000 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 Subnet Mask Subnet Mask Gateway Gateway Gateway Gateway SEG3 SEG4 Address SEG1 Address SEG2 Address SEG3 Address SEG4 000 000 000 000 000 000 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 0 255 MAC Address DHCP XXXXXXXXXXXX Disable Enable Notes Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if a Wireless Option is installed 2 You cannot change this value it is a display only item 261 Chapter 262 3 WLAN ADDRESS WLAN ADDRESS Submenus IP Address This item allows you to set the IP Address for the TCP IP protocol
223. essage 337 POR option 253 Port Type option C T Port 253 Port Type option Parallel Port 242 Port Type option Serial 246 Position Aft FF option 223 Positioning the media sensor 66 Power Cart 25 Power consumption 350 Power Mgmt option 266 Power on IGP PGL option 223 Power On Reset option 253 POWER SAVER MODE fault message 337 Power Saver Time option 152 Power source and grounding 350 Power switch 33 Powering on the printer 37 Power on 37 Power up F option 223 Power up PY option 223 Power up X option 223 Power Up Config option 114 116 Power up configuration specifying 90 Power up State option 152 PPI TGL 23 PPI ZGL 23 Preamble option 266 Pre Peel Adjust option 131 Pre Peel Mode option 131 Primary Subset option 223 Prime Signal option Parallel Port 244 Print Char Set option 224 Print Config option 116 Print Direction option 129 Print Error Log option 239 Print File List option 155 PRINT HEAD COLD See Manual fault message 338 PRINT HEAD HOT fault message 338 PRINT HEAD UP Close Print Head fault message 338 Print Intensity option 107 119 Print Mode option 108 120 Print quality 304 Print Speed option 107 120 Printer alarms 316 changing settings 87 configuration parameters 85 dynamic print control 26 installation 29 interfaces 293 model specifications 22 387 options 353 printer tests 238 printhead replacement 306 problems and solutions 309 self t
224. essages 317 power failures 310 print quality 311 printer operation 314 printer problems and solutions 309 ribbon 315 True Vert 1 10 option 232 TrueType Fonts 288 TrueType Fonts Downloaded 292 Trunc Dyn Data option 232 Truncate Alpha option 232 TWINAX SETUP menu 167 Twinax Type option 232 Twinax coax host interface 24 Typeface option 232 U Unicode 204 Uniform Fonts option 233 Units option 133 Unpacking the printer 27 Unscannable xx Missing Codes fault message 342 UPC Descenders option PGL 233 UPC Descenders option VGL 233 Upr Case Select option 233 USB 300 USB PORT 254 USB Port downloading software 286 Use Label Length option 144 User Def Ratio option 233 User Defined St1 Start Code 1 option 234 User Defined St2 Start Code 2 option 234 User Defined Stp Stop Code option 234 Using Downloaded TrueType Fonts 292 Using the internal rewinder 54 UTF 8 204 V Validator Funct option 113 Validator not communicating fault message 342 Var Form Adjust option 234 Var Form Type option 234 Ver Image Shift option 110 122 Vertical Adjust option 234 Vertical Density option 235 Vertical DPI option 235 View File List option 154 Voltage option 275 VPA Check option 235 391 W WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD fault message 342 Warranty information 9 WEP Key BYTE1 through BYTE13 option 267 WEP Key Format option 267 WEP Key Width option 267 Width Limit option
225. est 301 set up 27 the printing process 25 warranty 9 PRINTER CONTROL menu 146 submenus 148 PRINTER HOT fault message 338 PRINTER MGMT 277 submenus 277 Printer PI option 224 Printer Select option 224 Printer Status option 251 Printer tests auto calibrate 238 barcode demo 238 checkerboard 238 combo test 238 current config 238 Ethernet test page 238 grey 238 grid 238 left test 238 right test 238 validator report 238 Printer Tests option 238 PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL fault message 338 Printhead cleaning 80 determining wear 305 pressure adjustment 64 pressure block adjustments 65 replacement 306 Printhead pressure adjustment 64 Printhead pressure block adjustments 65 388 Printing a configuration 93 adjustments 64 specifications 345 test labels 301 PrintNet Enterprise Suite 24 Printronix media 357 Printronix Windows Driver 289 Processing time improving 302 Prop Line Length option 224 Prop Spacing option 224 Protect Configs option 116 PSeries Dbl High option 224 Ptr Media Dist option 239 Ptr On Time option 239 Ptx Setup Parse option 156 Ptx Setup SFCC option 152 PTX_SETUP 292 Pwr Save Control option 152 PWR SUPPLY HOT fault message 339 Pwr Up Action option 141 Q QUICK SETUP menu 106 submenus 107 R Rbn Takeup Full option 133 RBN TAKEUP FULL Remove Used Rbn fault message 339 REACTIVATING HOST SERIAL fault message 339 Real time clock 354 Received
226. estore The Printer To Operation cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 308 Solving Other Printer ProbleS ccccceeeeeeteeeeteeteeteeteneees 309 Printer Alarms enea a e E nsgewne Geti a ea 316 Fault Messages ssessssessrrrrsesrrnrsstrrnsestnrntnstnnnnatnnnnnntnnnnnntnnnnnnea 316 Spe cificatioh S aene i vendors 345 Print Methods arpei E e E heeds A hectteasheeetias tient 345 MEAR ea eA E EE T e a a A a a 346 LEEA I PITE A IE TEE A NE TAES 348 Indicators And Switches c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteneeeeeeeeeeneeeesaes 348 MG IMONY erenn aiae ae eaa E EA AER 348 Media Cutter Option sesssesseeeseesireeittsittsiintrintstrntttrnsrrnnsrnsrrennt 349 Host Interfaces niran da eede ean ae EE EL enensieee bene 349 POWGM tea a a tit See Siete othe Ny 350 EMVIFOMMON tal ssnin nn EE E E E 350 a a A E A E EE E AE T 351 Acoustic Specifications eeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeerreeerreerrrerrreererere rens 351 Maximum Page Length ccccceeeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeaas 351 Printer Options asi nveiinceddtneciiatotenicdieldedar yi athiy 353 Hardware Options cccccccsecesesececeneeeeeneeeceeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeeeseaees 353 Interface Options ceeececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeteeeeees 354 Supplies And Accessories c ccccceeeeeceneeeeeneeeseeeeeeneeeteeeeesieeeseaes 355 Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons 0ceee 356 Genuine Printronix MeCia
227. et option is available only if E Net Adapter is installed When E Net Adapter is installed the IEEE 1284 and Centronics options do not display Data Bit 8 e Enable the default The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer all 8 bits are used for data bits and characters in the hex 80 FF range can be accessed Disable When the host PI line is enabled data bit 8 internally indicates PI line status To use the PI line disable data bit 8 and enable the Host PI configuration option under the PI Ignored option NOTE Data bit 8 is interpreted as either data bit 8 or PI signal but never both When enabled as data bit 8 data bit 8 has priority over the PI signal and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data and not to interpret PI line data Conversely when data bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used data bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function and you cannot access characters in the hex 80 FF range Therefore to access characters in the hex 80 FF range data bit 8 must be enabled PI Ignored The PI Paper Instruction signal is used to control vertical paper motion e Enable the default Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control codes e Disable Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU commands when the PI signal is true Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Ethernet buffer The ran
228. eters are loaded when the reset command is executed e Power up config The power up configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed e Current config The currently selected configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed e Factory config The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed Resident Fonts This option selects either a bit mapped font Compatible or a scalable font Scalable as the default font Compatible the default Selects a bit mapped font as default e Scalable Selects a scalable font as default Ret Status Port This option selects the port for the Return Status Commands i e STATUS PGL and HS PPI ZGL to send the status data back to the Host The options are Serial factory default E NET Stat Port USB IEEE 1284 Disable and E NET Data Port 225 Chapter 226 3 Right Margin Set in characters Character zero is defined as the far right edge of the page and column numbering increments from right to left The range is 0 369 characters and the factory default is 0 characters Rot Char Size e Adjusted Rotated clockwise counterclockwise expanded characters have a different size than an unrotated character with the same size parameters e Not Adjusted Rotated expanded characters will be the same size as unrotated characters with the same size parameters The factory default is Adjusted Scalable Siz
229. expansion for non IPDS printers only 24 network interface card 24 NIC 24 online barcode validator 25 353 power cart 25 PPI TGL 23 PPI ZGL 23 printer 353 TN5250 TN3270 25 twinax coax host interface 24 Orientation option 111 123 OVERALL GRADE FAIL fault message 335 Overstrike option 221 Overwrite Files option 154 P PA1 option 222 PA2 option 222 PAA option 148 PAA Select Tool option 114 Page Rotation option 222 Paper Empty PE signal Centronics parallel interface 295 Paper Feed Shift option 108 121 Paper Instruction PI signal Centronics interface 295 PAPER OUT Load Paper fault message 336 Paper Out Sensor option 141 Paper Out Thresh option 140 PAPER OUT TIMEOUT fault message 337 Parallel interfaces Centronics 294 PARALLEL PORT menu 241 submenus 242 Parallel Port downloading software 281 PARITY ERROR fault message 337 Parity option 246 PDF Size Comp option 222 Peel Present option 134 Peel Off option 135 Peel Off media handling 38 Percent Charge option 275 PGL Normal option 222 Physical dimensions 351 PI Ignored option 242 PI Slew Range option 222 Pin assignments Centronics parallel interface 294 Platen Roller cleaning 81 PNE 24 PNE Port Number option 277 PNE Port option 277 PNE Port Timeout option 277 Poll Character option 250 Poll Response option 250 POOR SCANNING Check Head amp Heat fault message 337 POOR SCANNING Inspect head fault m
230. face s current character set This operation is valid only when the coax interface is selected Translation Tbl SPC Twinax Prints a table of the twinax interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the twinax interface is selected 231 Chapter 232 3 Translation Tbl TN5250 Twinax Prints a table of the twinax interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the twinax interface is the current interface True Vert 1 10 e Disable the default When disabled and in High Resolution a vertical line s length in one inch and 1 10 inch increments is interpreted as 70 72 inch and 7 72 inch respectively e Enable When enabled a vertical line s length is interpreted exactly which is 72 72 inch in one inch increments Trunc Dyn Data This submenu allows the user to truncate the dynamic data up to the maximum data length specified in Create Mode e Disable the default If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length an error will report e Enable If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length the data truncates Truncate Alpha e Enable the default Prevents the printing of Error 48 Element Off Page Error if alphanumeric data including spaces extends beyond the right side of the form e Disable Twinax Type This parameter defines the printer emulation as follows e IPDS 256 Bytes the default e IPDS 1024 Bytes e 5225 e 4234 After the em
231. faults follow the suggested corrective action under the solution section of the table After correcting the displayed fault press the PAUSE key to clear the error message and status indicator and resume printing If the fault message reappears power off the printer and wait 15 seconds before powering on the printer again If the error condition persists contact your authorized service representative Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention If a fault is not correctable by the operator the fault message is followed by an asterisk This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is needed You should try two steps to clear the fault before calling your authorized service representative 1 Set the printer power switch to O off wait 15 seconds then turn the printer on again Run your print job again If the message does not appear it was a false indication and no further attention is required 2 If the message reappears press the PAUSE key If the message goes away it was a false indication and no further attention is required If the message reappears call your authorized service representative 316 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution 06 HOST REQUEST Yes Status message in CT Nota printer problem emulation the host computer or printer controller requires attention 08 HOLD PRINT Yes Sta
232. fined User User Alt Graphic Graphic Set Text Defined St2 2 Defined Stp 2 Set 80 9F Chek Err Chek Cod Orientn 5F 5B Printable Enable 60 Left to Right 40 to FF 40 to FF Control Code Disable 40 to FE Right to Left Host Format Max Print Override Control Width Disable Disable 13 2 inches Enable Enable Printer Width Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 This menu appears only if the TN5250 TN3270 option and the correct security key is installed 2 This menu appears only if you select the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu 177 Chapter 3 TN5250 SETUP 178 T N5250 Setup Primary and Secondary Sets 5250 SETUP from page 177 Primary Sets 0037 English US 0037 Eng Nether 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK 0892 OCRA 0893 OCR B 0424 Hebrew 0803 Hebrew Old 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril Old 0423 Greek Old 875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0256 Intern 1 1112 Balt Mult 0924 Euro Lat 9 1122 Estonian 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1143 Euro Finn 1144 Euro Ital 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro
233. fined Stp Stop Code This option allows you to define your own value in ASCII characters for the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu Stp specifies Stop Code See Lead in Chars on page 219 for additional information The range is 40 FF and the factory default is 5B Var Form Adjust This specifies an amount in tenths of inches to add to the length of variable length forms Variable length forms use a semicolon at the end of the CREATE command CREATE lt FORMNAME gt 0 Typically variable length forms are determined by the elements within the form The longest form element becomes the overall form length This option allows an additional space to be added to the form length The range is 00 0 to 03 0 inches and the factory default is 00 0 inches Var Form Type e Add Nothing the default When selected no action is taken Add 0 When selected the form length ends at the longest printed element Same as CREATE filename 0 e Add X When selected the form length is the same as the physical page length the Label Length menu under MEDIA CONTROL Same as CREATE filename X Vertical Adjust This option is to adjust printer dpi to expand or shrink the vertical position of graphic elements and the height of the vertical line The default is O dots The adjustment range is from 20 dots to 20 dots with respect to the current printer dpi Emulation Submenus Vertical Density This option
234. from 00 to 23 hours Minute This option allows you to set the minutes The factory default is 00 and the range is from 00 to 59 minutes Year This option allows you to set the year The factory default is 2099 and the range is from the year 2000 to 2099 Month This option allows you to set the month The factory default is Jan and the range is from Jan to Dec Day This option allows you to set the day The factory default is 01 and the range is from 01 to 31 days 4 Downloading Software Loading Flash Memory IMPORTANT Flash memory is contained in a SIMM single in line memory module located on the controller PCBA Printer control languages the emulations and printer operating system software are loaded into flash memory at the factory but there are occasions when you may have to download this software e You have replaced the controller PCBA e You have replaced flash memory e The customer needs to upgrade printer software e The customer needs different emulation software e The customer buys the PGL or VGL graphics language the CT option the IPDS option or the ethernet NIC network interface card option after the printer is installed Emulation and operating system software are included as files on a CD that comes with the printer You will copy the appropriate file from the CD to a computer s hard disk then download the file from the computer into printer memory When downloading emulation and o
235. from the Remove Ribbon reminder message when you change the Print Mode setting from Transfer to Direct in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu ribbon supply and ribbon take up spindles in the printer 2 If ribbon is required for printing change the Print Mode back to Transfer 321 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued instruction was attempted in the application program Displayed Message laa Explanation Solution DO NOT POWER No This is a standard Do not power off the printer OFF warning message that until downloading is complete displays while the printer is downloading software DOWNLOADING TO Yes Normal message when No action required VALIDATOR the printer is NOTE The validator software downloading emulation update can be verified in the software with a F W Revision menu option of validator option the VALIDATOR menu Shown installed as Example X326 NOTE Many software builds contain updates to the Validator option E00 EXE ADDRO Yes An illegal or 1 Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears load the latest attempted in the emulation software application program 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E01A TYPE 0x40 Yes An i
236. ft sets Katak Hebrew Old Hebrew and Farsi SCS Systems Network Architecture Character String Mode is controlled by the host computer The options are Dual Case the factory default and Mono Case Character Group Epson FX Emulation Submenus Character Group and Character Sets Epson FX From page 191 This menu item selects the character set used by the printer The available character sets are shown below ASCII USA French German English Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese Norwegian Danish II Latin Am II French Canadian Latin Am Multinational Standard Arabic Sets Cyrillic Sets European Greek Sets Hebrew Sets Sets Sets ASMO 449 Cyrillic 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek Hebrew Old ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Code Page 852 ELOT 928 Greek Hebrew New ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 Hebrew DEC ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek Latin 1 Hebrew MSDOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek Win CP 1255 MSDOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek Sakr CP714 Cyrillic 7 bit Slavic 1250 Greek 851 Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 IBM CP864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 IBM CP1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO Arabic Lam One Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO Arabic Lam Two Polish POL1 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 W
237. g Edge 123 Chapter 3 MEDIA CONTROL e Landscape Landscape refers to horizontal orientation where the width of a page is greater than its height The top edge of the image is the left edge of the media The following illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Landscape orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Inverse Landscape using PPI ZGL lt q 4inches _ FEED A 6 inches parallel to the left edge of the media The top edge of the image is Leading Edge inv Portrait Inverse Portrait refers to vertical page orientation where the height of a page is greater than its width The top edge of the image is parallel to the trailing edge of the media The following illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Inverse Portrait orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Portrait using PPI ZGL Trailing Edge a 4inches_ FEED The top edge of A the image is 4 parallel to the trailing edge of the media 6 inches Y Leading Edge 124 MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Inv Landscape Inverse Landscape refers to horizontal orientation where the width of a page is greater than its height The top edge of the image is the right edge of the media the left edge of the image is the trailing edge of the media The factory default is Portrait The follow
238. g gp 134uud p jqeu s Ae JGONVD 24 U UM x JUUND y SIo10S y u gep je s1229 UoN Ao TADNVO spol nusiN SPO SUIIHO Spo euljuO uondioseq uong ul uoljoun4 ul uoljoun4 ul uoljoun4 ae 36 Powering On The Printer Powering On The Printer When you power on the printer it executes a self test During the self test the LCD momentarily displays the DPI resolution 203 or 300 DPI of the installed printhead The default power on state is online Once the printer has successfully initialized the ONLINE status indicator light illuminates and the LCD indicates the communication interface selected and the type of emulation installed If there is a fault during the self test the ONLINE status indicator flashes and a fault message appears on the display The alarm may also sound if configured to do so Operating Modes The current operating mode can be selected through the control panel keys or can result from routine operations such as powering on the printer Online In online mode the printer can receive and print data sent from the host Pressing the PAUSE key toggles the printer between the online and offline modes The ONLINE status indicator is lit in online mode Offline In offline mode you can perform operator functions such as loading media or changing ribbon Pressing the PAUSE key toggles the printer from offline to online mode The ONLINE status indicator is not illuminated in offline mode
239. g the key Emulation Submenus Character Group and Character Sets IGP VGL From page 182 This menu item selects the character set used by the printer The available character sets are shown below Character Group IGP VGL Standard Arabic Sets Cyrillic Sets European Greek Sets Sets Sets 0 ASCII ASMO 449 Code Page 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek 1 German ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Code Page 852 ELOT 928 Greek 2 Swedish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 3 Danish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek 4 Norwegian MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek 5 Finnish MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek 6 English Sakr CP714 Cyrillic 7 bit Slavic 1250 Greek 851 7 Dutch Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 8 French CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 9 Spanish IBM CP864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 10 Italian IBM CP1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 Euro 11 Turkish Arabic Lam One Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 Euro 12 CP 437 Arabic Lam Two Polish POL1 13 CP 850 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 i Hebrew Sets Turkish Sets Hebrew Old Data Gen Turk Hebrew New DEC Turkish Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Latin 1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish Win CP 125
240. ge Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message renee Explanation Solution BAR CODE QUIET Yes Data validation error Fix application Zone too small Quiet Zone error Disable Quiet Zone Error reports BATT HIGH VOLT Yes This is the High Volt Raise the value in the High Alert that can be set by Volt Alert option in the the user factory BATTERY CONTROL default 16 0 Volts menu This fault detection is If High Volt Alert 16 0 only supported when Volts and the fault the ICP intelligent message remains call Control Panel option is your authorized service connected to the center printer serial port and Battery Monitor Enable in the BATTERY CONTROL menu BATT LOW VOLT Yes This is the Low Volt Plug the power cart cable Alert that can be set by into an AC receptacle to the user factory recharge the battery default 8 5 Volts This fault detection is a E eae only supported when replace the battery or the ICP Intelligent batteries Control Panel option is connected to the printer serial port and Battery Monitor Enable in the BATTERY CONTROL menu BUFFER Yes Host sent data after the Make a configuration OVERFLOW printer buffer was full printout serial interface Verify that the printer matches the host serial interface configuration settings for Data Protocol Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Data Terminal Ready and Request to Send 7 Set printer serial interfac
241. ge is 1 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments The factory default is 16 Kbytes PARALLEL PORT Submenus Auto Trickle This feature is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the parallel interface is busy for too long e Enable factory default When the printer s buffers are almost full the printer begins to trickle data in from the host at the rate set in the Trickle Time menu until the buffers start to empty out e Disable The Auto Trickle feature is not used Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second print job is received by the printer from a different host Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed In order to support this feature the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use For example if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then receives a second print job from the parallel port the data from the parallel port will trickle bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast This function is not applicable for C T hotport Th
242. ghi 30123456789 Courier oof4 ABCDEFGHI Jabcaefgh ii 0123456789 Courier oofc ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghij0123456789 Courier Super Subscr OOfe ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghij0123456789 Arabic Kateb 0109 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij012345678 9 Gothic Text 0119 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdefghi j0123456789 Gothic Text 0122 ABCDEFGHI Jabcdef ghi 50123456789 Letter Gothic Bold 0194 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghi j0123456789 Courier Bold 01a4 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0123456789 Sonoran Serif 1137 ABCDEFGH IJabcdefghij01 23456789 Sonoran Serif 1137 ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij0 123456789 Sonoran Serif 1137 ABCDEFGH IJabcdefghij0 123456789 Sonoran Serif Bold 114b ABCDEFGH Jabcdefghij0 123456789 Sonoran Serif Bold 114b ABCDEFGHIJ abcdefghij0123456789 Sonoran Serif Bold 114b ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghij 0123456789 Sonoran Serif Italic 11b7 10 ABCDEFGH I Jabcdefghij0 23456789 39 Resident Bitmap Fonts Typographic 2 Scalable Fonts PS Proportionally Spaced SC Scalable NOTE The Scalable fonts are currently rendered at 12 points They are scalable to any integer point size Figure 4 IPDS Fonts 3816 Emulation Sample Printout 174 TN3270 SETUP 3270 SETUP 1 from page 98 Req NL At MPP 1 On Position Aft FF Off Char FF Primary Sets Translation Active Secondary Early Print Alt Tbl Char Set Sets Cmpl Set 80 9F See page 176 Secondary Set Seepage 176 D
243. git in the binary number system represented by a0 ora 1 A bit is the smallest unit of storage in a digital computer The start up procedure which causes a computer operating system to be loaded into main memory An area of storage into which data is read or written temporarily during data transfers Coaxial cable A type of cable with a single wire surrounded by insulation and a braided shield Refers to the operating properties that define how the printer responds to signals and commands received from the host computer at the printer interface These properties are called configuration parameters and are set to match the operating characteristics of the host computer system Media comprised of one continuous length without a gap notch hole or black mark to establish a predetermined label or tag length With this media type the Host Form Length or user selected Label Length sets the desired length of each label A media handling mode that advances media in the forward direction only An independent functional logic unit in a data processing system that controls data paths between one or more units of peripheral equipment 371 Appendix F 372 Data Bits Default Diagnostic Direct Thermal Media Direct Thermal Printing DRAM EPROM Fanfold Media Flash Memory Font Binary information sent to the printer a character set grouping containing letters digits and punctuation marks to be printed A
244. gle symbol prints on the eft side This pattern helps identify ribbon wrinkle problems Right Test Prints a pattern containing a series of ladder type bar code symbols starting with four and decrementing by one symbol on each print until a single symbol prints on the right side This pattern helps identify ribbon wrinkle problems Combo Test Prints a combined left test and right test Ethernet Test This item appears only if the Network Interface Card NIC adapter is installed Prints the NIC statistics stored on the NIC adapter Barcode Demo Prints text and barcodes with the barcodes positioned at the left and right margins of the standard label media supplied with the printer The test automatically produces output for 4 6 and 8 inch printers at 203 dpi and 300 dpi ODV RFID Report This item appears only if the validator and or RFID encoder is installed Prints a report of the validation and or RFID statistics since the printer was turned on or since the last data reset Once you have selected the desired test pattern press to start printing If the Test Count option below is set to Continuous the default press again to stop printing Test Count This item selects the number of times the selected test pattern will be printed The options are Continuous factory default 1 Page 2 Pages 5 Pages and 10 Pages DIAGNOSTICS Submenus Software Build This is the reference number which includes the program file
245. h Config to overwrite e Pause Changes will be implemented but saved only temporarily until deliberately saved as a new configuration or until you power off the printer All changes will be lost when you power off the printer 89 Chapter 90 3 Overview Specifying A Power Up Configuration You can specify any one of the nine configurations 1 8 or Factory as the power up configuration 1 Press the key until the following message displays MENU MODE CONFIG CONTROL 2 Press the J key until the following message displays Power Up Config 1 3 Press the or key to cycle through the options 1 8 and Factory When the desired number displays press the key to select it The following message displays Power Up Config x NOTE If the configuration number has not been saved previously the following error message displays CONFIG DOES NOT EXIST Save First If this error message displays see Saving A Configuration on page 88 Once you have saved a configuration repeat the steps in this procedure Modifying A Saved Configuration Modifying A Saved Configuration You can change a saved configuration by rewriting over it For example you can modify Config 1 shown below Suppose you want to keep all the settings but you want to select the parallel Centronics interface instead of the IEEE 1284 interface 1 Load the configuration to be changed for exam
246. h TOF 1 Enable Control Code Even dot plot Normal Enable 0 to 7F Disable Printable 1 Double high P3 4 6 9 Compat Disable Text Host Reset Cmd Form Form Position Command CFG Ld Length 2 3 Length 2 3 Bottom of Line Enable Disable 4 or 6 inches 4 101 6 or 152 4 mm 4 Top of Line Ignore All Power up config 00 0 to 24 0 inches 00 0 to 609 6 mm Ignore CPI Current config Ignore LPI Factory config Form Form Form Form Length 2 Width 3 5 Width 35 Width 104 1 168 0 or 215 9 mm 4 41 66 or 85 characters 4 00 0 345 4 mm 0 to 272 characters 04 1 06 6 or 08 5 inches 4 00 0 13 6 inches 24 or 36 lines 4 0 to 144 lines Notes Factory Default 1 When the CTHI option is installed the factory default is Printable 2 All three Form Length submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 3 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 4The factory default value depends on the width of the printer model 5 All Form Width submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 184 P SER XQ SETUP P SER XQ SETUP 1 3 from page 100
247. hanges take effect immediately within the current configuration menu Auto or Manual Calibrate is completed successfully when the displayed Sensed Distance value correctly matches that of the installed media When Gap is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge of one gap to the trailing edge of the next gap or one label one gap When Mark is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark When you have completed Auto or Manual Calibrate you can verify the new values are correct by pressing the FEED key several times Each time you press FEED media advances one label and stops at the correct Top of Form position of the next label Once you confirm the correct values save them to the desired configuration menu before powering off the printer See Saving A Configuration on page 88 Running Auto Calibrate You can initiate Auto Calibrate via the TEST PRINT key described in detail below or via the CALIBRATE CTRL or DIAGNOSTIC menus in Menu mode NOTE Verify that the Gap Mark Sensor option Gap Mark Advanced Gap Advanced Notch or Disable matches the installed media See Sensing Different Media Types on page 71 Check that the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit sensing of the label length indicators See Positioning The Media Sensors on page 66 Make sure the Label L
248. hdr arial This creates the file arial dwn 5 Put the printer in download mode as described in Downloading A Font In Download Mode on page 290 and send the downloadable font file e g arial dwn to the printer through the appropriate I O port of the printer Downloading A Font In Download Mode 1 Set the printer power switch to O Off 2 Connect a parallel data cable to the LPT1 port or a serial cable to the COM1 port of a computer running the Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Server 2003 or Vista operating system NOTE You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port on the computer if the LPT1 port is already in use The download commands are different if you use this port as described in the notes after step 10 3 Verify that the data cable is connected to the appropriate I O port on the printer and to the host computer Power on the computer and allow it to boot up On the printer control panel press and hold down the and J keys Without releasing the keys power the printer on Continue holding down the and keys When you see B01 STATUS on the LCD release the and J keys Wait until you see PROGRAM DOWNLOAD on the LCD before proceeding This can take about a minute to appear depending on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer 8 Start a command prompt session The Start Menu icon is usually labeled MS DOS Prompt or Command Prompt 9 Make note of the file name with the
249. he Execute command This setting is IGP 100 compatible e Enable Dynamic data overlay data etc are allowed within a form where the Form Count parameter is specified in the Execute command In this case the same form is printed for whatever the Form Count is Incremental data is not incremented since the printing page is the same The overlay data is only printed with the first form and not on subsequent forms and each form is printed on a separate page The factory default is Disable Extended Subset This item allows selection of the desired extended character subset used by the printer The options are Code Page 437 the factory default and Code Page 850 FF After Job Determines the print position after an operator initiated local copy print screen function e Off Performs an automatic new line command after completing a print buffer unless a new line form feed or carriage return command was the last one executed The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the next line e On Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was the last one executed The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the first line on the next form The factory default is Off Emulation Submenus FF valid at TOF The FF valid at TOF option determines whether the printer will perform a Form Feed when the host sends a Form Feed command if the printer is at the top of form e Enable Performs a form feed whe
250. he correct Media Handling option in the QUICK SETUP menu If the error persists contact your authorized customer service representative 334 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued F Can User F Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution OVERALL GRADE Yes Overall data validation Press Pause to clear the FAIL failure decodeability message percent decode defects modulation EC Min Rmin and or symbol contrast Adjust the parameter that is causing the failure Run a Scan Report to see which parameter failed Lower the Overall Grade to a point where the worst parameter grade will be above the Overall Grade threshold 335 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution PAPER OUT Yes The printer does not Install media If a break Load Paper sense media occurred reinstall the e Media was not installed or has run out e A break in media has occurred e Media was not routed or installed correctly e The media sensor is not positioned correctly e Media is installed correctly but the sensor is not detecting it e Gap Mark Threshold value may be set too high and or Paper Out Threshold may be set too low e The printer detected a false PAPER OUT when changing from Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch to Ga
251. he current configuration name The second line of the display is initially the same as the top line You can modify the second line of the display without affecting the top line until the key is pressed which sets the modified name as the current selection Press T or J to cycle through the values available for that character at the cursor location Press to move to the next character to be modified Press to go back to a character you have already modified Continue until you have entered the name you want to give to this configuration then press to save The name you entered will now represent this configuration on the printer s front panel To exit this menu without saving press any key other than J The configuration name will revert to the last saved value The factory default is 1 Reset Cfg Names You can reset specific configuration names back to the default value of the configuration number The options are 1 to 8 and All The factory default is 1 Auto Save e Enable factory default When a change has been made to a Config menu this option automatically prompts the user to save or not save the change to a Config If you are currently in the Factory Config menus and make a change pressing Enter saves to Config 1 or the next available Config and becomes the Power Up Config If the Current Config is Config 1 anda menu change is made pressing Enter will save the change to Config 1 e Disable The printer will no
252. he default in one submenu the default value in the other two submenus change automatically 7 All three Form Width submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default value in the other two submenus change automatically 102 ETHERNET C T PORT 2 USB PORT ETHERNET PORT 2 page 253 page 254 page 255 Port Type Buffer Size in K Timeout Device Address Timeout Switch Out On Timeout Report Status NOTES 1 Appears only if a Network Interface Card NIC is installed a Appears only if the Ethernet Option is installed 3 Appears only if CTHI option is installed page 256 IP Address SEG1 IP Address SEG2 IP Address SEG3 IP Address SEG4 Subnet Mask SEG1 Subnet Mask SEG2 Subnet Mask SEG3 Subnet Mask SEG4 ADDRESS Gateway Address SEG1 Gateway Address SEG2 Gateway Address SEG3 Gateway Address SEG4 MAC Address DHCP 103 Ethernet Speed Subnet Mask SEG1 Job Conirol Offline Process Subnet Mask SEG2 Subnet Mask SEG3 Subnet Mask SEG4 Gateway Address SEG1 Gateway Address SEG2 Gateway Address SEG3 Gateway Address SEG4 MAC Address DHCP NOTES Appears only if a Wireless Option is installed 2 Appears only if WEP Key 1 Width is set to 128 Bits Appears only if WEP Key 2 Width is set to 128 Bits 4 Appears only if WEP Key 3 Width is set to 128 Bits 2 Appears
253. he difference between the label length indicators and the label The profile printout see Figure 1 on page 75 helps you set the thresholds for difficult media This includes pre printed labels labels with poor gap media dynamic range and smart labels that have embedded RFID tags Once Media Profile is initiated the printer will continue to advance media and print the profile in landscape orientation until you press to stop printing NOTE Verify the CALIBRATE CTRL menu Gap Mark Sensor option Gap Mark Advanced Gap Advanced Notch or Disable matches the installed media See Sensing Different Media Types on page 71 You will need a minimum installed label width of two inches to support the Profile printout Ensure the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit sensing of the label length indicators See Positioning The Media Sensors on page 66 Ensure the Print Mode option selected in the QUICK SETUP menu matches the media installed Select Direct for heat sensitive media no ribbon required or Transfer for thermal transfer media ribbon required Press to place the printer in Menu mode Press J and together until ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED displays Press until CALIBRATE CTRL displays Press J until Media Profile Profile Print displays and then press W The printer will continue to print the profile until you press Py ONS ee The printer will advance media
254. he program file NOT FOUND not downloaded again successfully 2 If the message reappears contact your authorized customer service representative FRAMING ERROR Yes Serial framing error Match the serial interface over a serial interface settings of the printer to those of the host computer GAP NOT Yes The printer is set for 1 Check that the setting of DETECTED Gap or Mark sensing the Gap Mark Sensor in See Manual but a gap notch or the CALIBRATE CTRL black mark is not being menu matches the detected installed media The di 2 Check the position of the SONG Ha la lower and upper media dates oe tl sensors See Positioning positioned correctly The Media Sensors on 66 When Advanced Gap page SG or Advanced Notch is 3 Clean the sensor assembly selected the upper and paper path media sensor is not 4 Run Auto Calibrate to positioned above the improve the sensor s ability lower media sensor to detect the media in use Gap Mark Threshold is 5 Run the Media Profile set too high or Paper printout in the CALIBRATE Out Threshold is set CTRL menu too low 6 Run Manual Calibrate See Running Manual Calibrate on page 79 7 Manually change the Gap Mark Threshold and or Paper Out Threshold values GRF CHK ERROR Yes In the CT emulation Press the PAUSE key twice 330 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message eae Explanation Solution HOO PCI SL
255. he range allows a selection of up to 400 dpi the T5000 is capable of printing up to 203 dpi T5204 T5206 T5208 and 300 dpi T5304 T5306 T5308 horizontal resolution The range is 60 400 dpi and the factory default is 120 dpi Host Command This item allows you to select certain host commands to be ignored by the printer The options are Enable Ignore All Ignore CPI and Ignore LPI The factory default is Enable all host commands accepted by the printer Emulation Submenus Host Form Length PGL Determines how the physical label length see Label Length under the MEDIA CONTROL menu is affected upon receiving an EXECUTE command e Enable The physical label length will change to match the form length specified in CREATE command The physical label size remains at the new setting until another EXECUTE command is received or the PRINTER CONTROL menu settings are changed e Var Length The physical label length is the longest print element defined in CREATE mode plus the setting of Var Form Adjust Works with CREATE NAME 0 e Var Dynamic Len The physical label length will change to the longest print element defined in EXECUTE mode plus the setting of Var Form Adjust Works with CREATE NAME 0 e Disable Forms printed in EXECUTE mode do not change the physical label size Therefore the size of the form defined in CREATE mode must fit within the current label dimensions or errors may occur The factory d
256. he same number e g Config 1 when saving the modified configuration The new configuration writes over the existing one Print a copy of this newest configuration and store it in a safe place Refer to Printing A Configuration on page 93 Printing A Configuration Printing A Configuration We recommend that you print and store your configurations for future reference The printout provides a list of the parameters that were set when you configured the printer To print a configuration 1 Press the key until the following message displays MENU MODE CONFIG CONTROL 2 Press the J key until the following message displays Print Config Current 3 Press the or key to cycle through the following printout options Current Factory Power Up All 1 8 customized configurations 4 When the desired option displays press the key The printer prints the specified configuration NOTE If the configuration you want to print has not been saved the following message displays momentarily CONFIG DOES NOT EXIST Save First This message indicates that no configuration menu has been saved under the configuration value you have selected and therefore cannot be printed You must either select another configuration to print or load and then save a configuration to that configuration value first Loading A Saved Configuration To use a different configuration 1 Press the PAUSE
257. hen closed and advances media until the next gap notch or mark is detected by the Media Sensor s When print data is sent printing begins only after the next TOF is detected resulting in one or more blank labels being advanced The factory default is Disable NOTE When set to Enable Online Auto Cal and Head Auto Cal will automatically be set to Disable The printer will not reset any settings to Enable when Ticket Save Mode is later disabled MEDIA CONTROL Submenus TOF Adjust Mode e Enable This option enables the TOF Adjust distance set using the TOF Adjust menu see TOF Adjust below e Disable his option disables the TOF Adjust distance set using the TOF Adjust menu see TOF Adjust below The factory default is Disable TOF Adjust This opton sets the distance from the Top Of Form TOF that is left blank unprinted after a label has been removed in Tear Off strip or Tear Off mode Normally printing is done starting at TOF but when this mode is enabled the start position for printing can be adjusted from 0 00 to 0 40 inches from TOF in increments of 0 01 inch This adjustment can be helpful if a die cut label sticks to the platen by means of jagged edges created during a poor die cut label removal using the tear bar By controlling how much blank space there is from TOF you can control how much the media is called back after it is torn off Ribbon Calibrate Determines the amount of ribbon remaining by p
258. horized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Any change or modification to this product voids the user s authority to operate it per FCC Part 15 Subpart A Section 15 21 regulations This product contains an intentional radiator with the following parameters Operating Frequency 869 525 AWID 869 or 902 to 928 MHz AWID 915 Typical RF Power 25 to 100 milliwatts SL5x04 MP or 25 to 205 milliwatts SL5x04 C1 Maximum RF Power 1 Watt under abnormal conditions Printronix SL5000 and T5000 Tested To Comply C With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Canada This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 and RSS 210 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada ZA Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device has been designed to operate with the antennas listed below and having a maximum gain of 18 dBi Antennas not included in this list or having a gain greater
259. horized service representative 353 Appendix B _ Hardware Options 354 Real Time Clock RTC The RTC is a clock chip with internal battery The clock keeps track of the year month day hour minute and second values It will continue to operate when the printer is off NOTE To preserve the battery the clock will not run when it leaves the factory it will start running when it is set for the first time Graphic languages can use the RTC values to program fields in labels to indicate the date and or time This is useful for printing production and expiration dates Interface Options Coax Twinax Host Interface The coax twinax host interface option mounts inside the printer and functions as a protocol converter to allow the direct connection of the printer to a host computer that uses either a coax or a twinax data interface The printer may be ordered with the coax twinax option installed or it can be field installed by an authorized service representative Network Interface Card NIC This option permits placing the printer on a LAN rather than attaching it directly to a host system It is mounted inside the printer The printer may be ordered with a NIC installed or it can be field installed by an authorized service representative Wireless NIC 802 11b wireless The Wireless NIC provides 802 11b connectivity The card provides wireless connectivity without expensive cabling and reconfigurations required from a w
260. ic print features Variable Bar Codes allow the bar code for your application to print with standard or user defined ratios in vertical or horizontal orientations Available bar codes are Codabar Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 with Subsets A B and C and Code EAN UCC 128 EAN 8 EAN 18 Interleaved 2 of 5 MSI UPC A UPC E POSTNET PostBar USPS Intelligent Mail Royal Mail and UPC Shipping POSTNET is available only in the horizontal direction A dark print mode is included for darker high contrast bar codes The IBARC bar code command prints bar codes in four orientations horizontal rotated 90 rotated 180 or rotated 270 degrees Expanded and Compressed Print draws attention where needed Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a tremendous range of character sizes up to 9 9 inches wide and tall Several compressed print sizes are available 12 13 33 15 17 65 and 20 cpi characters per inch permitting up to 170 columns in an 8 5 inch printed area 20 cpi Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design Normal expanded and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise counterclockwise or printed upside down Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and a variety of print and shading features providing a customized appearance for forms reports and labels The registered trademark copyright TUV GS Mark UL and CSA symbols are provided as standard designs
261. ics to printer memory Resident Fonts Letter Gothic Bold 93779 Courier Bold 93952 CG Triumvirate Bold Condensed 92250 OCR A 90993 OCR B 91409 CG Triumverate 92244 CG Triumverate Bold 92248 and CG Times 92500 High Resolution Printhead For sharp graphics and text Label Taken Sensor Detects removal of labels in Tear Off mode and in Peel Off mode when optional rewinder is installed Tear Off Mode Positions the label at the tear off position and detects its removal before printing the next label Tear Off Strip Mode Prints a specified number of labels and positions the last label at the tear off position 32MB DRAM memory fixed 8MB Flash memory SIMM 23 Chapter 24 1 The SL5000r T5000r Series RFID Label Printer Auto Label Mapping For compatibility with programs written for Printronix line matrix printers Ventless System For operation in environments with airborne particulate matter without compromising performance Optional Features Ask your authorized representative about the following enhancement options Coax Twinax Host Interface Provides connection to a host computer system using a coaxial or twinaxial interface Fonts A selection of purchasable fonts can be loaded from the host computer into printer memory GPIO General Purpose Input Output Enables a T5000r printer to interface with an external device such as a label applicator system GPIO is availabl
262. igh signal if the buffer is full the printer will send a low signal DTR tells the host if it is safe to send more data If the host sends data during an unsafe condition data will be lost DTR is not available when RS 422 is selected Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port buffer The range is 1 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments NOTE If you select a baud rate that is 19200 or greater you may need to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter from the default to 16 Kbytes to improve performance The factory default is 16 248 SERIAL PORT Submenus Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed In order to support this feature the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use For example if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then receives a second print job from the parallel port the data from the parallel port will trickle bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value but not too much shorter
263. ight Max Width Height Max Width Param Allowed Param Allowed 00 99 21 51 01 99 22 53 02 3 23 56 03 6 24 58 04 8 25 61 05 11 26 63 06 13 27 66 235 Chapter 236 3 Table 7 Width Limit Table continued 07 16 28 68 08 18 29 71 09 21 30 73 10 23 31 76 11 26 32 78 12 28 33 81 13 31 34 83 14 33 35 86 15 36 36 88 16 38 37 91 17 41 38 93 18 43 39 96 19 46 40 98 20 48 XOH SMO Support This option allows the user to disable reporting of XOH SMO support in the STM reply This feature has been added because some hosts will not send an IPDS XOH SMS to a printer that reports it is a Continuous Forms printer and also supports XOH SMO e Enable The printer reports that it has support for XOH SMO e Disable The printer does not report that it has support for XOH SMO The factory default is Enable DIAGNOSTICS DIAGNOSTICS from page 101 Printer Tests Auto Calibrate Checkerboard Grey Grid Current Config Left Test Right Test Combo Test Ethernet Test Barcode Demo ODV RFID Report 2 Test Count Software Feature Hex Dump Build File 4 Mode Continuous XXXXXX Ver XXX XXXXXX XXX3 Disable 1 Page Enable 2 Pages 5 Pages 10 Pages Print Error Clear Error FLASH DRA
264. iguration menu moving within 85 moving within ill 86 overview 94 Configurations loading saved 93 modifying saved 91 printing 93 saving 88 specifying power up 90 Configuring the printer 85 Continuous Mode option 135 Continuous media handling 37 CONTRAST TOO LOW Check media fault message 321 Control Code 06 option 205 Control Code 08 option 205 Control panel 33 Control panel keys 35 Controlling print quality 304 Controls 33 Copy Count option 205 CR at MPP 1 option 205 CR Edit option 205 CR EM amp NL option 206 Create And Send Download File Download Mode 290 Online PGL Only 289 CSC 19 CTHI 354 CTHI Emulation option 149 Current Draw option 275 Customer Support Center 19 Cut media handling 38 Cutter 349 CUTTER FAULT Check Cutter fault message 321 Cutter Option cleaning 83 D Dark background labels with gaps 69 Dark background media with notches or holes 70 Data Bit 8 option 206 242 Data Carrier Detect DCD signal RS 232 serial interface 299 Data exchange 302 Data lines 1 through 8 signal Centronics parallel interface 295 Data Polarity option 244 Data Protocol option 247 Data Set Ready DSR signal RS 232 serial interface 299 Data strobe signal Centronics parallel interface 295 Data Term Ready option 249 Date submenu 278 DATE menu 278 Day option 278 DEACTIVATING HOST SERIAL fault message 321 Default Code Pag option 206 Default Font o
265. ilable only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu IGP VGL SETUP IGP VGL SETUP from page 99 Select SFCC _ Power up X _ Power up F Power up PY LPI Btm Margin Ctl 94 Disable Disable Disable 6 LP Menu 17 to 255 Enable Enable Enable 6to 10 VGL Text Length Text Length Autoeject Copy Count Host Form Slash 0 Repeat Legnth Form 66 Disable 1 Enable Disable Disable 1 to 255 Enable 1 to 999 Disable Enable Enable Ignore Dots Append Truncate True Absorb UPC Rotated Alpha Vert 1 10 After PY Descenders Disable Disable Enable Disable Absorb Motion Enable Enable Enable Disable Enable Absorb All Disable Disable Select SO Rot Char Ignore Ignore Lxx Midline PY Width Char Size Spaces Cmd Limit 14 Adjusted Disable Disable Disable Disable 0 to 255 Not Adjusted Enable Enable Enable Enable Absorb After Expanded Auto FF Vertical PDF Size C128 Mode APN Font at APN Density Comp Comp Disable Scalable Disable 203 dpi Disable Disable Enable Block Enable 195 210 dpi Enable Enable Notes Factory Default 1 Appears only on 203 dpi printers 181 Chapter 3 IGP VGL SETUP IGP VGL
266. in CP 1252 Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Turkish Sets Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 Code Page 850 UTF 8 Data Gen Turk DEC Turkish IBM Turkish Siemens Turkish PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 CP 858 EURO _ BM PC ASCII USA EBCDIC Notes Factory Default To access the desired basic character set use the and keys To select the set press the key After you have selected the basic set access the subset selection menu by pressing the J key Once in the subset menu access the desired subset by pressing the and keys and select it by pressing the key The Epson subset is accessed and selected in the same manner 199 Chapter 3 Character Group and Character Sets IGP PGL From page 179 This menu item selects the character set used by the printer The available character sets are shown below Character Group IGP PGL 200 Standard Arabic Sets Cyrillic Sets European Greek Sets Sets Sets 0 ASCII ASMO 449 Code Page 866 Latin 2 8859 2 DEC 256 Greek 1 German ASMO 449 Cyrillic CP 437 Code Page 852 ELOT 928 Greek 2 Swedish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 113 Mazovia Greek 3 3 Da
267. inch models no ribbon transfer support 22 Standard Features Standard Features Emulations e Printronix LinePrinter Plus LP Provides direct compatibility with Printronix P Series printers Epson FX 1050 Proprinter IIIXL and Serial Matrix Printers e Printronix IGP PGL Provides printer system commands for text barcodes graphics lines and boxes e Printronix IGP VGL Emulates the QMS Code V Version II programming language to produce on line forms bar codes and alphanumeric text generation in both normal and high resolution e ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL and IEGL Interpreters PPI ZGL Zebra PPI TGL TEC PPI IGL Intermec PPI STGL SATO PPI DGL Datamax PPI MGL Monarch and PPI IEGL IER interpreters are powerful integration tools that allow the SL5000r T5000r to function in virtually all legacy ZPL TEC IPL SATO DPL MPCL II and IER application environments without requiring modification to host data stream Thermal Transfer and Direct Thermal Printing On all printers except DT models which print only in thermal mode Standard Interfaces e Serial RS 232 e USB 2 0 Universal Serial Bus e Parallel Centronics compatible parallel IEEE 1284 compliant parallel NOTE The interface cable needed to connect the printer to the host device is supplied by the user Bar Codes Supports over 20 types of bar codes Download Fonts forms and graph
268. ing illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Inverse Landscape orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Landscape using PPI ZGL lt q 4inches FEED 2g FallA qx 69 of 75 4 QERS O Sooo 7 amp 6inches 3 0 D aa Q DZ Leading Edge Auto Map Select This option specifies the maximum print width to be used by the application The IGP Auto Label Mapping feature allows backward compatibility of programs written for P5000 line matrix printers using the Printronix PGL graphics language It allows the printer to print two up or other multi up labels Instead of printing multiple labels across the printer it prints the leftmost label and the rightmost label so the printout will be twice as long but half as wide When enabled the printer will automatically reposition the horizontally adjacent labels to a vertically adjacent position or a combination of horizontal and vertical positions based on the values selected under the Auto Label Width and Num Auto Labels menu items When disabled excess data in any program sent to the printer with horizontally adjacent labels that exceed the physical page width of the printer will be clipped or wrapped depending upon the setting of the Autowrap menu option The options are Disable the factory default and Enable 125 Chapter 126 3 MEDIA CONTROL Examples All of th
269. ing modifying and printing configurations e Configuration menus Downloading emulation and operating system software Setting Printer Configuration Parameters Configuration parameters are set from the control panel or are retrieved from the printer s memory The parameters define how the printer will respond to command and interface signals from the host computer The configuration menu structure consists of main menus and the options applicable to each menu NOTE Some configurations refer to printer options that may not be present in your printer If you select an option or feature that is not present no action will be performed by the printer or an OPTION NOT INSTALLED message will display on the LCD Moving Within The Configuration Menu You can move through the configuration menus using the appropriate navigation keys as shown in Figure 2 See Controls And Indicators on page 33 for more details on the function of the operator panel keys You can select different options and save them as the power on default however you can only save them to configuration menus 1 8 The factory configuration menu can be altered but not saved When the printer is online the first line of the LCD displays ONLINE and the second line lists the active interface port and type of emulation To configure the printer 1 Press the key to enter the printer configuration menu system MENU MODE QUICK SETUP displa
270. ing and contrasting by printing white characters on a dark background Automatic Increment Decrement Capability allows batch form processing You can identify individual numeric and bar code data fields which includes automatic increment or decrement functions Scaling Capability permits graphic elements such as corners or boxes to retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi Multinational Character Sets provide 32 international character sets each 96 characters in length This feature also allows you to create your own character sets using characters defined and stored in memory Extended Character Sets provide 33 extended character sets also containing 96 characters in length These are also stored in memory IGP VGL The VGL Graphics language is a software emulation designed for the thermal printer The VGL emulation of the QMS Code V Version II programming language produces on line forms bar codes and alphanumeric text generation It includes the following features On Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels with the preprinted look for each application VGL programs control all graphics functions dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing time Graphics capabilities include boxes vertical and horizontal solid and dashed lines with a variety of thickness logos and special alphanumer
271. inter interface connectors Connect a parallel data printer cable to the LPT1 port of a computer running the Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Server 2003 or Vista operating system Connect the data cable to the Centronics port of the printer On the printer control panel press and hold down the J and keys Without releasing the keys power the printer on When you see B20 STATUS 00 DOWNLOAD MODE on the LCD release the keys Using Windows Explorer create a directory named download at the root level of your C hard drive C download Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer s CD drive Open the readme txt file on the CD There are two emulation sets with corresponding part number files from which to choose CT IPDS IGP ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL TN IGP ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL Both emulation sets include the LP emulation They are offered in two file formats exe and prg Use exe files to download through the parallel port Identify which emulation set you want to download into the printer and note the filename that corresponds to that emulation The filename is a six digit number plus exe For example 123456 exe This is the file you will download into the printer Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 7 12 Start a command prompt session The Start Menu icon is usually labeled MS DOS Prompt or Command Prompt At the command prompt typ
272. ion is used to print a listing of various stored printer configurations We recommend you store printouts of your configurations in a safe place for quick referral The options are Current the factory default Factory Power Up All and 1to8 Delete Config You can delete one or all of your eight customized configurations The factory default configuration cannot be deleted The factory default is All Power Up Config You can specify any one of nine configurations 1 8 saved custom configurations or Factory as the power up configuration The factory default is Factory Protect Configs You can specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an existing configuration when you activate the Save Configs parameter When disabled default the new configuration will overwrite the existing configuration When enabled the new configuration will not overwrite the existing configuration and the message CONFIG EXISTS Delete First displays The options are Disable the factory default and Enable CONFIG CONTROL Submenus Name Config 1 8 You may specify a 15 character name which can be used to refer toa configuration The name you enter for a configuration will be used in the Load Config Save Config Print Config Delete Config and Power Up Config menus The names can only be cleared by using the Reset Cfg Names menu When you move into the Name Configs menu the top line of the display shows t
273. ired network PNE standard with the wireless NIC is a printer management tool IPDS for Use with Twinax Host Interface This option supports the Intelligent Printer Data Stream IPDS language to allow direct connection of the printer to an IBM host computer that uses the twinax data interface The printer may be ordered with this option installed and the required hardware to support it or it can be field installed by an authorized service representative at a later date The printer must have a Coax Twinax interface and a 300 DPI Printhead installed to support this field installed option IPDS for Use with a NIC This option supports the IPDS language to allow a LAN connection The printer may be ordered with this option and the required hardware to support it or it can be field installed by an authorized service representative The printer must have a NIC and a 300 DPI Printhead installed to support this field installed option Interface Options IPDS for Use with a NIC and Twinax Host Interface This option supports the IPDS language to allow a LAN connection as well as a direct connection of the printer to an IBM host computer that uses the twinax data interface This option is applicable to non SL printers The printer may be ordered with this option installed and the required hardware to support it or it can be field installed by an authorized service representative The printer must have a NIC Coax Twinax interface and a 300 DPI p
274. irst reached 314 Solving Other Printer Problems Table 16 Printer Problems and Solutions continued Symptom Solution Explanation RIBBON Printer advances media but the ribbon does not advance 1 Make sure the ribbon is installed correctly 2 A poor ribbon media combination can cause insufficient friction between the media and ribbon Verify that the correct ribbon and media are being used 3 The printhead pressure may not be set high enough Set the pressure higher 4 There may be adhesive on the printhead Clean the printhead 5 Verify that Print Mode in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu is set for Transfer and not Direct Thermal Printer cuts melts through the transfer ribbon 1 Verify that Print Intensity is set to the proper level in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu 2 Verify that Print Mode in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu is set for Transfer and not Direct Thermal Printing stops and the ONLINE status indicator flashes 1 Check that the media sensor is clean and undamaged 2 Check that the gap between the bottom of a label and the top of the next label is at least 0 100 inch Use only labels and tag stock approved for this printer Inspect for a jammed label Remove the jammed label Check that the transfer ribbon and label stock are routed correctly Narrow width ribbon breaks frequently The Ribbon Width value in the MEDIA CONTROL
275. isable Printable Primary Set Enable Control Code Intervention Last Null Suppression Send To Host On On Off Do Not Send Off Off On Off On FF Validity Auto Skip At FF After Job CR EM Host Format End amp NL Override Control Off Off Off On Disable Disable On On On Off Enable Enable Lead in User User User Change Set Text Chars Defined Sti Defined S12 Defined Stp Case Orientn Set 1 lt gt 5F 5F 5B Dual Case Left to Right Set 2 A 40 to FF 40 to FF 40 to FF Mono Case Right to Left Set 3_ _ User Defined Max Print Width 13 2 inches Notes Printer Width Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 This menu appears only if the TN5250 TN3270 option and the correct security key is installed 175 Chapter 3 TN3270 SETUP 176 TN3270 Setup Primary and Secondary Sets 3270 SETUP from page 175 Primary Sets 0037 English US 0037 Eng Nether 0285 English UK 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0287 Danish Alt 0278 Finnish 0288 Finn Alt 0297 French 0500 Internat 5 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0289 Span Alt 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0803 Hebrew Old 04
276. isable the Sensed Distance value will not be updated If GAP NOT DETECTED displays run Auto Calibrate again If Auto Calibrate continues to end with an incorrect Sensed Distance value displayed or a fault message displayed run Manual Calibrate as described on page 79 or see Table 17 on page 317 NOTE The amount of media sampled during Auto Calibrate is based on the length of a label and transitions detected without error between a label and its label length indicators 6 Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE displays 7 Press the FEED key several times Each time you press FEED the media advances one label length and stops NOTE After a form feed the position of the leading edge of the next label depends on the type of Media Handling mode selected under the QUICK SETUP menu Tear Off and Tear Off Strip Media Handling will position the label edge at the tear bar while Continuous will position the label edge under the printhead Press the PAUSE key until ONLINE displays Once the Sensed Distance value is confirmed you will need to save it to the desired configuration menu before powering off the printer See Saving A Configuration on page 88 73 Chapter 74 2 Printing Adjustments Running Media Profile The Media Profile printout shows the relationship of the Paper Out Threshold and the Gap Mark Threshold values illustrates if and when each label length indicator is detected and shows t
277. ists Figure 5 shows a partial example of a hex dump After the printer enters hexdump mode all characters it prints including any in the printer s input buffer are printed in two forms as a two symbol hexadecimal code and as the character s printable symbol if it has one A non printable code is printed as a period symbol Up to 16 characters can be printed per line of hexdump printout While the printer is in hexdump mode it does not act upon any control codes other than to print their hexadecimal equivalents The 16 characters printed per line on the hexdump are formatted so that the 16 printable symbols are printed in columns 1 through 16 The 17th column is blank Column 18 contains either a p PI line active or a blank PI not active Columns 19 and 20 contain the hexadecimal code for the first character followed by a blank The PI line condition and hexadecimal code for the second character are printed in columns 22 23 and 24 followed by a blank The third through 16th characters are printed in a similar manner The hexadecimal code for the 16th character is printed in columns 78 79 and 80 NOTE Values will vary based on printhead width 213 Chapter 3 IMPORTANT Subsequent printing observes the current setting for skip over perforation form length and top of form position parameters You must have a minimum of 4 1 inches of media installed and have Label Width set to 4 1 inches If not the hexdump data will
278. k label should exist between print jobs A no print zone 80 inches long exists from the leading edge of each printed label This option supports label lengths 2 50 inches or longer Tear Strip Full Same as Standard but the cross perforation following the last printed label is automatically aligned at the tear bar once the print buffer is empty for a period of Tear Strip Time Media does not get aligned at tear bar until Tear Strip Time expires When printable data is again detected a blank label is automatically fed resulting in one blank label between each print job This option supports label lengths 2 50 inches or longer Shorter label lengths cause two or more blank labels to be automatically fed at the beginning of each print job Cut Strip When Media Handling is set to Continuous and a cutter is installed Cut Strip will use the respective host interface Timout menu setting to determine the End Of Job EOJ and cycle the cutter That is the cutter will be cycled when there is no more data being received from the host The cut will not be done for printing that is not initiated by the host such as form feeds and test printing or if the host interface is not set to Auto Switching The factory default is Standard 135 Chapter 136 3 MEDIA CONTROL TOF Detect Fault Allows selection of three different TOF Top of Form detection faults NOTE The correct Label Length value equal to the physical length of the installe
279. key 3 Press the combination of keys that you want to be the new lock key Make sure you press all keys selected at the same time 4 Ifthe selection is valid the display will read Enter the new lock key again Press the same combination of keys a second time If the selection is invalid the display will read Invalid key selection Return to step 2 and start over 5 If the new lock key combination is entered again correctly the display will read Lock key has been changed If it was entered incorrectly the display will read Validation failed Start over at step 1 6 After entering the new lock combination successfully press the PAUSE key to put the printer back online NOTE The new lock combination will remain even if the printer is powered off and back on 155 Chapter 156 3 PRINTER CONTROL Ptx Setup Parse e Enable Will parse and execute the PTX SETUP commands e Ignore Will parse the PTX SETUP commands but not act on them e Disable Will not parse the PTX SETUP commands so they will print out as text The factory default is Enable PJL Control e Enable Will parse and execute the PUL commands e Disable Will not parse the PUL commands they will not print out as text The factory default is Enable Glob Mem Adjust This menu allows you to adjust the ratio of global memory allocated to label size versus PGL forms fonts and logos For example when using short labels
280. l data into the printer buffers The time required varies depending on the complexity of the label format and on the size of the area being printed Once the data has been mapped into memory the printer will start printing as many labels as requested by the quantity command In most cases there is no delay between labels however when using Automatic Label Peel Off or Tear Off media handling the printer stops between each label and waits for the label to be removed Data Exchange Many things can cause data loss or communications problems This section suggests some ways to isolate these problems and determine their cause Handshaking Handshaking is the exchange of signals between two computers or a computer and a peripheral input or output device to indicate the status of the data being transferred In the serial mode the printer uses both hardware and software handshaking and transmits both forms simultaneously when the input buffer is full The printer can be used with either serial or parallel host interfaces Parallel interfaces are usually straightforward with no special settings required Serial interfaces however have a variety of possible communication parameter settings The two methods of handshaking that can be used hardware and software are explained below Hardware Handshaking This electrical signal is controlled by the logic state on pin 20 of the serial interface connector J2 at the back of the printer
281. lic brush Use a vacuum cleaner to remove the residue General Cleaning Periodically clean all rollers guides and assemblies Use low pressure air to remove dust in the printer Use isopropyl alcohol and a cotton swab to clean any areas where media dust adhesives etc have accumulated Cleaning The Printhead Platen Roller And Media Sensors NOTE You do not need to turn off the printer before cleaning the printhead platen roller or media sensors Printhead Cleaning As you use your printer the printhead may become dirty which can result in poor print quality Clean the printhead each time you install new ribbon thermal transfer print mode or install new media direct thermal print mode Clean the printhead with the cleaning pen supplied with the printer By keeping your printhead clean you will help maintain its life CAUTION Cleaning The Printhead Platen Roller And Media Sensors Platen Roller Cleaning Media dust and adhesive residue on the platen roller can degrade print quality and cause voids in your label image Clean the platen roller at the same time as the printhead Use a small amount of isopropyl alcohol on the cloth or the cleaning pen supplied with your printer to clean the platen roller With the pivoting deck up the platen roller can be rotated forward by hand to access and clean its entire surface area Media Sensor Cleaning Do not use isopropyl alcohol solvents or abrasive agents to clean
282. llegal or 1 Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears load the latest attempted in the emulation software application program 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E01B TYPE 0x60 Yes An illegal or 1 Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message appears load the latest emulation software 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility 322 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message SARA Explanation Solution E02 MACHINE CHK Yes An illegal or Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears load the latest attempted in the emulation software application program Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E03A DSI HASH L Yes An illegal or Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears load the latest attempted in the emulation software application program Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it t
283. load use the Firmware Download Utility page 280 Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller PCBA incompletely loaded and the printer may not boot up 283 Chapter 4 Downloading Software Through The NIC Using FTP 14 15 16 17 18 While the file is copied into memory the printer LCD informs you of the download process and status When the new software has successfully downloaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself set the printer power switch to O Off Remove the CD from the host computer and store it with the printer If required reconnect the data input cable s to the printer Set the printer power switch to On Using the configuration printout s you made in step 1 on page 283 restore the printer configurations Downloading Software Through The NIC Using FTP IMPORTANT 284 To download software through the NIC you need the IP Address of the printer and the flash memory must contain basic printer code If the flash memory was replaced or if a download was interrupted e g by a power outage you must download software through the parallel port See Downloading Software If Flash Contains Only Boot Or Corrupt Code on page 287 FG Ne 10 11 Make a configuration printout of all saved configurations See page 93 Set the printer power switch to O Off Connect the ethernet cable
284. ls for more information ADnn Dot Slew e Low Resolution Sets the dot slew command dot values to be interpreted as 60 dpi P Series dots e High Resolution Sets the dot slew command dot values to be interpreted as print engine dots The factory default is Low Resolution 20 CPI Condensed Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount of information on a page e Enable Prints about 60 of the width of normal characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer e Disable Does not compress print widths even if condensed print is chosen by the host The factory default is Enable 5225 World Trade The 5225 emulation has a standard multinational character set that serves as a base and 14 extended world trade character set assortments The options are Standard Char the factory default and Extended Char Absorb After PN e Disable The paper motion line terminators that immediately follow the APN command are sent to the printer and processed e Enable The paper motion line terminators that immediately follow the APN command are ignored The factory default is Disable 193 Chapter 194 3 Absorb After PY e Absorb Motion The paper motion line terminator immediately following the graphics PY command will be ignored e Absorb All The system ignores all the data following PY until a host g
285. lt message 329 FILE SYS WRITE Check Flash fault message 329 FILE SYSTEM FULL Add Flash fault message 329 FILE SYSTEM FULL Delete Files fault message 329 FILE SYSTEM FULL Optimize amp Reboot fault message 329 Firmware Download Utility downloading software 280 Flash Avail option 154 Flash Contains Boot Code downloading software 287 FLASH Installed option 239 Flash Memory load 279 Fonts 24 Downloading TrueType 288 TrueType 288 Form Length lines option 211 Form Width char option 211 Form Width in option 212 Form Width mm option 212 Format Control option 212 Forms Handling option 212 Forms Length in option 211 Forms Length mm option 211 FPGA FILE NOT FOUND fault message 330 FRAMING ERROR fault message 330 Framing Errors option 252 G Gap 71 Gap Length option 143 GAP NOT DETECTED See Manual fault message 330 Gap Windowing option 143 Gap Mark Sensor option 112 139 Gap Mark Thresh option 140 Gaps 68 Gateway Addess option 257 262 General Purpose Input Ouput GPIO option 355 Glob Mem Adjust option 156 Gothic Typeface option 212 Graphic Chek Cod option 213 Graphic Chek Err option 213 GRF CHK ERROR PRESS PAUSE fault message 330 H HOO PCI SLOT message 331 H01 PCI J24 message 331 H02 PCI J25 message 331 Half Speed Mode fault message 331 Handshaking 302 hardware 302 software 302 Hardware options 353 Head On Time option 240 HEAD POWER F
286. lure Yes The validator detected Verify that the checksum digit exists in the barcode and that it is the correct value 320 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution CLEARING Yes Emulation software No action required PROGRAM successfully loaded FROM FLASH into printer RAM and the checksum matched The old program is now being deleted from flash memory CONTRAST TOO Yes Data validation error 1 Adjust heat or change LOW symbol contrast media Check media 2 Disable symbol contrast error reports CUTTER FAULT Yes 1 Cutter assembly is 1 Place the cutter assembly Jam or Cut Fail not in the closed in the closed up position position 2 Clear obstruction from the 2 Cutter option was cutter assembly not a iG failiode 3 Insure media thickness is a S Uen within specification Ret nee ec Wait a few minutes for the 3 Cutter PCBA cutter circuit breaker to detected current automatically reset overload and Press PAUSE to clear the opened circuit fault message and resume breaker on cutter printing PCBA DEACTIVATING Yes Normal message that No action required HOST SERIAL displays when you set Battery Monitor Enable in the BATTERY CONTROL menu DIAGNOSTICS Yes The printer passed its No action required PASSED memory and hardware initialization tests DIRECT THERMAL Yes This is the normal 1 Remove ribbon
287. m page 146 Save Char Del Char Ld Char at Del Set Ld Set Save Set to Fls frm RAM PwrUp frm Fish from Fish to Flsh Disable Enable Del Set Ld Set Overwrite View File Delete Flash from RAM at PwrUp Files List Files Avail Disable Enable XXXXX XX 1 Enable Disable Optimize amp Print Auto Locking Set Lock Key PTX Setup PJL Reboot File List Parse Control 2 Disable Enable Disable Enable Ignore Enable Disable Glob Mem Max Font Max Cache Max Cached Standard Bold Adjust Buffer Memory Char Chars Chars 9120 KBytes 100 KBytes 900 KBytes 01 KBytes 340 448 0 to 12160 Kbytes 100 to 1800 Kbytes 50 to 2000 KBytes 01 to20 KBytes Oto 512 0 to 512 Extra Bold Tall Batch Char Characters Counter 504 384 304 Disable Disable Disable 0 to 512 0 to 512 0 to 512 Enable Enable Enable Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 You cannot change this value it is a display only item 2 Does not appear if CT or IPDS is installed 3 Not available on P7000 H Series printers 147 Chapter 3 PRINTER CONTROL 148 LP Emulation from page 146 P Series P Series XQ Serial Matrix Proprinter XL Epson FX See page 183 See page 185 See page
288. m width of the printer The default value depends on model width and size of DRAM installed Ver Image Shift This option specifies the amount to shift an image vertically up or down for precise positioning on the label The actual height of the image is not affected by this parameter The allowable range is 1 00 inches to the current Label Length value setting up to a maximum of 12 80 inches in 01 inch increments The factory default value is 0 00 inches MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Hor Image Shift This option specifies the amount to shift an image horizontally left or right for precise positioning on the label The actual width of the image is not affected by this parameter The allowable range is 1 00 through 1 00 inches in 01 inch increments The factory default value is 0 00 inches Orientation This menu item selects the image orientation to be used when printing the label Portrait Portrait refers to vertical page orientation where the height of a page is greater than its width The top edge of the image is parallel to the leading edge of the media The following illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Portrait orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Inverse Portrait using PPI ZGL lt q 4 inches FEED A eIpSlW Ou 6 inches jo bp Bulpes QU O Je ered s oBew y jo bp do au Leadin
289. maged due to use of improper ribbons or media SUPPLIES For the nearest Printronix full service distributor that carries Printronix genuine supplies please call 1 800 733 1900 or fax 714 368 2354 Supplies design specification and selection are integral to the development of any computer imaging system Printronix s extensive manufacturing and research capabilities along with years of experience in the design of printers and their applications assures that you will receive the exact materials that you require to maximize the performance of your Printronix printer For more information call the Printronix Customer Solutions Center at 714 368 2686 or access the Printronix website at http Awww printronix com ON SITE MAINTENANCE SERVICE Printronix offers on site support services in the United States and Canada Please contact the Printronix Maintenance Contracts Group at 800 854 6463 option 1 for detailed service agreement information RFID Intended use non specific short range device operating in the band 869 4 to 869 95 MHz for Home and Office environment in E E A and Switzerland Wireless Ethernet Intended use Low Power 802 11b g radio LAN product operating indoor in 2 4 GHz bands for Home and Office environment in E E A and Switzerland WARNING Lithium Battery The controller board contains a lithium battery sealed inside the real time clock chip Do not disassemble the chip to replace the battery Do not dispose of
290. manually entered Label Length value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu e Physical Label Length is the actual measurable length of the label The following list of different media types explains how the physical label lengths are determined e Die cut labels measurable length of the removable label leading edge to trailing edge This does not include the liner material or gap e Tag Stock with notches or holes measurable length from the trailing edge of one notch or hole to the leading edge of the next notch or hole e Tag Stock with black marks on underside measurable length from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark e Continuous media no label length indicators measurable length should be within 1 2 the Label Length value entered in the MEDIA CONTROL menu or the value sent via host software command e Logical Label Length Host Forms Length is the length that a user or programmer bases his printable image on In most cases this length should be slightly less than the Physical Label Length This allows the entire image to be printed within the boundaries of the label length indicators gaps notches holes or black marks When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length and Clip Page Enable in the MEDIA CONTROL menu the printer will clip the bottom portion of the image that exceeds the Physical Label length In this case the printable data that was not
291. menu is set too large which causes too great a ribbon take up and ribbon supply spindle torque Reduce the Ribbon Width value to decrease the torque on the ribbon spindles The Ribbon Width value should be very close to the Label Width value To reduce the torque further set Ribbon Length in the MEDIA CONTROL menu from Save As Paper to Set In Menu Then set a value less than the installed ribbon width Wide width ribbon does not take up properly The ribbon moves past the platen assembly The Ribbon Width value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu is set too narrow for the ribbon installed Set the Ribbon Width value to match the width of the ribbon installed This will increase the torque on the ribbon take up spindle 315 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Printer Alarms The printer has built in alarms that monitor printer status and media stock conditions Alarm messages display indicating the present status of the printer and media stock levels The alarms also indicate if the printer electronics detect an error condition Fault Messages If a fault condition occurs in the printer the status indicator on the control panel flashes on and off and the message display indicates the specific fault Fault messages are summarized in Table 17 Displayed faults fall into one of two categories e Operator correctable e Field service required Operator Correctable Fault Messages For the operator correctable
292. mple with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Inverse Portrait orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Portrait using PPI ZGL 111 Chapter 3 QUICK SETUP Trailing Edge lt q 4inches _p FEED The top edge of A the image is 4 parallel to the trailing edge of the media 6 inches Y Leading Edge e Inv Landscape Inverse Landscape refers to horizontal orientation where the width of a page is greater than its height The top edge of the image is the right edge of the media the left edge of the image is the trailing edge of the media The factory default is Portrait The following illustration is an example with the operator viewing the front of the printer NOTE Inverse Landscape orientation applies to PGL and VGL emulations This is regarded as Landscape using PPI ZGL lt q 4inches gt FEED EER e850 ate Z Q T 5 2 oa 6 inches Ba g DZ y Leading Edge Gap Mark Sensor The available options specify the sensor type needed for detecting the Top of Form position on media with label length indicators gaps notches holes or black marks e Disable Select when using media with no label length indicators no gaps notches holes or black marks or when you want the printer to ignore all existing label length indicators on the installed media NOTE When you select Disable the length of each label is based on the Lab
293. n 2 ROECE Yugoslavian Notes Factory Default Although these options are listed vertically here use your plus and minus keys to cycle through the options when you are operating your printer TWINAX SETUP TWINAX SETUP 12 3 from page 97 Primary Sets Translation Buffer Twinax Type Active Secondary Tol 4 Print Char Set Sets See page 168 Disable IPDS 256 Bytes Secondary Set See page 168 Enable IPDS 1024 Bytes Primary Set 5225 4234 5225 Cancel Lead in User User User World Trade IGP DCU Chars Defined Stl Defined S12 Defined Stp Standard Char Enable User Defined 5F 5F 5B Extended Char Disable Set 1 lt gt 40 to FF 40 to FF 40 to FF Set 2 Set 3_ _ Alt Graphic Chek Graphic Chek LAC Option LAC Approx Set Text Set 80 9F Err Cod Orientn Printable Enable 60 Enable On Control By Host Control Code Disable 40 to FE Disable Off Left to Right Right to Left Host Override Format Max Print Control Width Disable Disable 13 2 inches Enable Enable Printer Width Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed 2 This menu appears only if Por
294. n Solution 33 HEAD OPEN Yes Status message inthe Close and latch the printhead TIMEOUT CT emulation The Press PAUSE to put the printer printer was offline more online than 10 minutes and the Intervention Required parameter is set to Send to Host 40V POWER FAIL Yes 40 VDC an internal Power off the printer for 15 power failure seconds then power back on If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative 203 DPI Head Yes Normal power up No action required Installed message The printer is running its initialization routine and indicating DPI resolution of the installed printhead 300 DPI Head Yes Normal power up No action required Installed message The printer is running its initialization routine and indicating DPI resolution of the installed printhead Ambient light Yes Ambient light is 1 Minimize the ambient light Validator failure compromising proper around the validator This scanning may require moving the NOTE The Validator printer to a darker area of scanning laser cannot the room work propeny iita 2 Press the PAUSE key to om wilt S SRNE clear the fault message ambient light including direct sunlight BAD VFU CHANNEL Yes The user tried to use Use defined channels an undefined VFU channel BAR CODE Yes Data validation error Fix application so it sends data IMPROPER improper data format in the correct bar code format 318 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Messa
295. n the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form e Disable Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form The factory default is Enable FF Validity Determines if the position of a Form Feed FF command affects its execution e Off Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print position in a line or at Maximum Print Position 1 An FF command at any other position is recognized as a blank e On Allows the printer to perform an FF command anywhere in the data stream The factory default is Off Form Length in Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a label You can set forms length in inches The factory default is shown in Table 3 on page 122 Form Length lines Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a label You can set forms length as a function of the current LPI lines per inch The factory default is shown in Table 3 on page 122 Form Length mm Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a label You can set forms length in millimeters The factory default is shown in Table 3 on page 122 Form Width char The forms width can be specified as a function of the current CPI characters per inch The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width The factory default is the maximum printing width divided by the selected number of character
296. n the underside of the media The Top of Form position is the leading edge of the die cut label trailing edge of the gap notch or hole The factory default is Disable Auto Calibrate This feature is used to improve the sensitivity and reliability of the Media Sensors in detecting gaps notches holes or black marks on the installed media as well as a paper out condition NOTE Prior to running Auto Calibrate you must enter the physical length of the installed media in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu Selecting the correct Label Length forces Auto Calibrate to increase media advancement for long labels to detect actual gaps notches or marks and decrease advancement for short labels You can initiate Auto Calibrate from the TEST PRINT key the CALIBRATE CTRL menu or the DIAGNOSTIC menu When Auto Calibrate displays on the LCD press the key The printer advances media the distance needed to accurately detect the label length indicators then stops at the Top of Form position and momentarily displays the Sensed Distance This process takes a few seconds to complete and results in changes to the values the printer uses for Gap Mark Threshold Paper Out Threshold and Sensed Distance These value changes take effect immediately within the current configuration menu 139 Chapter 140 3 CALIBRATE CTRL Auto Calibrate is completed successfully when the Sensed Distance displayed correctly matches that of the in
297. nd special alphanumeric print features Forms and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned fixed information entered when the form is created be overlayed onto the form positioned in a specific location after the form is created or may be dynamically merged with the form Selectable Bar Codes provide you with the appropriate bar code for your application using standard wide to narrow ratios A wide selection of bar codes are available Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 UPC A UPC E MSI A through D Code 128 Subset A B and C EAN UCC 128 EAN 8 EAN 13 POSTNET PostBar USPS Intelligent Mail Royal Mail and PDF417 UPC and EAN bar codes can specify add on data Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where needed Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size up to 11 3 inches wide and tall Compressed print sizes of 12 13 15 and 17 characters per inch cpi are available Logos are created using alphanumeric commands and add many print and shading features for a customized appearance to forms reports and labels Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design Normal expanded and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise or they can be printed upside down Reversed Print permits highlight
298. net only if the NIC is installed Mgmt Protocol Since PXML and UCP management protocols share the same Ethernet Port only one can be active at a time This menu selects the active Management Protocol Interface either PXML or UCP The factory default is UCP PNE Port Number This menu selects the port number the printer expects PNE to connect through The factory default is 3001 and the range is from 1023 to 65535 PNE Port Timeout If PNE has not communicated to the printer within a timeout period the PNE session closes The factory default is 100 seconds The range is from 1 to 255 seconds Status Port Numb This menu selects the port number the printer sends the emulation status The factory default is 3006 and the range is from 1023 to 65535 Mgmt Port Number This menu selects the port number the printer expects the PXML or UCP to connect through The factory default is 3007 and the range is from 1023 to 65535 277 Chapter 3 DATE DATE 278 from page 105 DATE 1 2 Hour Minute Year Month Day 00 00 2099 Jan 01 00 23 00 59 2000 2099 Jan Dec 01 31 Notes Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if the real time clock option is installed 2 Updates the set parameters only if the real time clock NOVRAM option is installed Date Submenus Hour This option allows you to set the hour The factory default is 00 and the range is
299. ng a download will leave the flash memory on the controller PCBA incompletely loaded and the printer may not boot up 16 17 18 19 20 While the file is copied into memory the printer LCD informs you of the download process and status When the new software has successfully downloaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself set the printer power switch to O Off Remove the CD from the host computer and store it with the printer If required reconnect the data input cable s to the printer Set the printer power switch to On Using the configuration printout s you made in step 1 on page 281 restore the printer configurations Downloading Software Through The NIC IMPORTANT IMPORTANT To download software through the NIC you need the IP Address of the printer and the flash memory must contain basic printer code If the flash memory was replaced or if a download was interrupted e g by a power outage you must download software through the parallel port See Downloading Software If Flash Contains Only Boot Or Corrupt Code on page 287 1 Make a configuration printout of all saved configurations See page 93 Set the printer power switch to O Off Connect the ethernet cable to the printer interface Set the printer power switch to On Wait until you see ONLINE on the LCD before doing the next step This can take about a minute to appear depending on the emulations and int
300. ning fault message 320 Cancel IGP DCU option 198 Cancel Key option 153 CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel Off fault message 320 Centronics acknowledge signal 295 busy signal 295 data lines 1 through 8 signals 295 data strobe signal 295 interface signals 295 online signal 295 Paper Empty signal 295 Paper Instruction PI signal 295 parallel interface 294 pin assignments 294 Change Case option 198 Changing printer settings 87 Channel option 266 Character Group option Epson FX 199 Character Group option PGL 200 Character Group option Proprinter XL 203 Character Group option P Series Serial Matrix 202 Character Set option 204 Checksum Failure fault message 320 Cleaning cutter option 83 exterior 80 general 80 interior 80 media sensor 81 platen roller 81 printhead 80 the printer 80 Clear Error Log option 239 Clear To Send CTS signal RS 232 serial interface 299 CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH fault message 321 Clip Page option 131 Clock Skew SEC option 270 Clock Skew Units option 270 Cmd Resolution option 204 COAX SETUP menu 164 Coax Type option 204 Coax twinax host interface 354 Code Page Subset option 204 Communication Centronics parallel 294 Dataproducts Long Lines 294 IEEE 1284 parallel bidirectional 295 Compatibility mode IEEE 1284 interface 295 Compatibility option 153 Compressed Print option 205 CONFIG CONTROL menu 115 submenus 116 Conf
301. nish ASMO 708 Cyrillic 8859 5 Kamenicky ABY Greek 4 Norwegian MS DOS CP710 ISO 915 Roman 8 ABG Greek 5 Finnish MS DOS CP720 Code Page 855 PC 437 Slavic ELOT 927 Greek 6 English Sakr CP714 Cyrillic 7 Bit Slavic 1250 Greek 851 7 Dutch Aptec CP715 Ukrainian Code Page 865 Greek 437 8 French CP 786 Bulgarian Code Page 860 Greek 8859 7 9 Spanish IBM CP864 Win CP 1251 Latin 1 8859 1 Win CP 1253 10 Italian IBM CP1046 Latvian 866 Latin 5 8859 9 Greek 813 EURO 11 Turkish Arabic Lam One CP 1048 Latin 9 8859 15 Greek 869 EURO 12 CP 437 Arabic Lam Two Polish POL1 13 CP 850 Win CP 1256 Win CP 1250 14 15 Reserved Farsi 1 Win CP 1252 16 23 Dwn Overlay Farsi 2 Win CP 1257 24 31 User Def 1098 Farsi 1285 CP 858 EURO Lith CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859 4 Hebrew Sets Turkish Sets UTF 8 Hebrew Old Data Gen Turk Hebrew New DEC Turkish Hebrew DEC IBM Turkish Latin 1 Hebrew Siemens Turkish Win CP 1255 PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS 1 Turkish Notes Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win CP 1254 Code Page 857 Azeri Factory Default To access the desired basic character set use the and keys To select the set press the J key After you have selected the basic set access the subset selection menu by pressing the J key Once in the subset menu access the desired subset by pressing the and keys and select it by pressin
302. ns DRAM of the printer ERROR PROGRAM Yes No The printer requires Power off the printer for 15 NEEDS MORE more flash memory in seconds then power back on FLASH order to run the If the problem persists contact downloaded program your authorized customer service representative 327 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued FLUSHING QUEUES printer discards host data it cannot use because a fault condition exists While this message displays the asterisk rotates Displayed Message a Explanation Solution ERROR PROGRAM Yes The printer is not Power off the printer for 15 NOT COMPATIBLE compatible with the seconds then power back on downloaded program If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ERROR PROGRAM Yes The printer does not Power off the printer for 15 NOT VALID see a program in flash seconds then power back on memory If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ERROR SECURITY Yes No The security key is not Power off the printer for 15 KEY NOT present or has failed seconds then power back on DETECTED If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ERROR SHORT AT Yes No Hardware failure in Power off the printer for 15 ADDRESS XXXX DRAM or Main PCBA seconds then power back on cont
303. nt represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof If any provision of this Agreement is held to be unenforceable This Agreement shall be governed by California law provisions except to the extent applicable law if any provides otherwise excluding its conflict of law provisions 8 Red Hat Statement With Regards to eCos Software Part of the software embedded in this product is eCos Embedded Configurable Operating System a trademark of Red Hat Portions created by Red Hat are Copyright C 1998 1999 2000 Red Hat Inc http www redhat com All Rights Reserved THE SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN PART PROVIDED BY RED HAT AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OR SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBLITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Limited Software Product Warranty Printronix Inc warrants that for ninety 90 days after delivery the Software will perform in accordance with
304. nted normally e Forward Slant Text is printed with a forward slant e Backward Slant Text is printed with a backward slant The factory default is Disable LAC Approx This item controls whether or not the LAC Approximation is used See the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual When set to On then Approximation is used When set to Off Approximation is not used and incoming data will print as is The factory default is On Emulation Submenus LAC Option Allows the host system to load alternate character images into the printer This may be used for designing graphics bar codes and charts or for printing in foreign languages e Enable Prints the LAC character as defined e Disable Ignores the LAC definition from the host and prints from the currently selected character set The factory default is Enable Last Char FF Determines the print line position when a Form Feed FF command is the last code encountered in the print buffer e On Moves to the first print position on the second line of the next form e Off Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form NOTE This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on If configured as a 3287 and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next form regardless of the setting of this option The factory default is On Lead PDF Dist Adjusts the leading
305. nu is used in the calibrate algorithm This causes the Auto Calibrate process to advance media the minimum distance required to detect the true gap notch hole or black mark used for TOF Top of Form sensing This resolves problems where the sensor s may mistake high noise levels or preprinted images within the label as the gap notch hole or black mark that could result in a sensed distance value much shorter than the actual label length Example A 0 2 inch calibrated Sensed Distance with a 3 0 inch long label installed NOTE Setting the Label Length value less than half the actual length of the label in use will result in erroneous Sensed Distance values when Auto Calibrate is performed e Disable Auto Calibrate relies exclusively in its ability to detect varying transitions between labels and gaps notches holes or black marks while advancing media during the calibrate process to determine Sensed Distance The amount of media advanced is based on the number of transitions detected The factory default is Enable NOTE Although the Use Label Length keeps its value enable disable at all times it will always be disabled when Set Label Length is set to Automatic The correct setting will take effect when Set Label Length is set to manual Based on the setting on the Set Label Length menu in the Media Control menu the Use Label Length menu will be ignored disabled CALIBRATE CTRL Submenus
306. nvert the data Inverted Expects the data received on the data lines from the host computer to be inverted Ones become zeros and vice versa Resp Polarity The Response Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity of your host computer e Standard factory default Does not invert the response signal e Inverted Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer Busy on Strobe e Enable factory default Asserts a busy signal after each character is received e Disable Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full Latch Data On Specifies whether the data is read on the leading or trailing edge of the data strobe signal The options are Leading factory default and Trailing Offline Process Disable factory default When set to disable the printer does not process parallel network data while offline e Enable When set to enable the printer continues to process but not print the current network parallel job while the printer is offline until the printer s buffer is full SERIAL PORT SERIAL PORT from page 102 Port Type Baud Rate Word Stop Parity Data Length Bits Protocol RS 232 9600 BAUD 8 1 None XON XOFF RS 422 19200 BAUD 7 2 Odd ETX ACK Disable 38400 BAUD Even ACK NAK 57600 BAUD Mark Series1 1 Char 115200 BAUD Sense Series1 2 Char 600 BAUD DTR 1200 BAUD 2400 BAUD 4800 BAUD
307. o Head Type Displays the printhead type installed in dots per inch 203 dpi or 300 dpi Head Voltage Displays the applied printhead voltage 240 PARALLEL PORT PARALLEL PORT from page 102 Port Type Data Bit 8 2 PI Ignored 2 Buffer Size Auto Trickle in K Trickle Time IEEE 1284 Enable Enable 16 Disable 1 4 sec Disable Disable Disable 1 16 Enable 1 2 sec Centronics 1 sec E Net Adapter 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec Off Timeout Report Switch Out Prime Data Resp Status On Signal Polarity Polarity 10 sec Disable Data Timeout Disable Standard Standard 1 60 sec Enable Session Close Enable Inverted Inverted Busy on Latch Offline Strobe Data On Process Enable Leading Disable Disable Trailing Enable Notes Factory Default Italicized items are available only when Admin User is enabled in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Available only when E Net Adapter is installed 2 Available only when the Centronics option is enabled in the Port Type submenu of PARALLEL PORT 241 Chapter 242 3 PARALLEL PORT PARALLEL PORT Submenus Port Type This menu item selects the type of printer parallel port interface to be used with the host The options are IEEE 1284 the default Disable Centronics and Ethernet NOTE The Ethern
308. o your next higher support facility E03B DSI HASH S Yes An illegal or Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears load the latest attempted in the emulation software application program Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E03C DSI BAT PL Yes An illegal or Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was attempted in the application program appears load the latest emulation software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility 323 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued 324 Displayed Message S Explanation Solution E03D DSI BAT PS Yes An illegal or 1 Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears load the latest attempted in the emulation software application program 2 Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E03E DSI CXIWX Yes An illegal or 1 Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears lo
309. o Map Select option 125 Auto Save Configuration 89 Auto Save option 117 Auto Skip at End option 196 Auto switching 293 Auto Trickle option 243 Auto Uppercase option 196 Autoeject option VGL 196 Autowrap option 196 BAD VFU CHANNEL fault message 318 BAR CODE IMPROPER Data Format fault message 318 377 BAR CODE QUIET Zone too small fault message 319 Barcode var option 196 Batch Counter option 159 Batch Rewind mode 54 BATT HIGH VOLT fault message 319 BATT LOW VOLT fault message 319 BATTERY CONTROL menu 274 submenus 274 Battery Monitor option 274 Baud Rate option 246 Bold Chars option 158 Bold option 197 Bottom Margin option 197 Boundary Check option 197 Btm Margin Ctl option 197 BUFFER OVERFLOW fault message 319 BUFFER OVERRUN fault message 320 Buffer Print option 197 Buffer Reprint option 197 Buffer Size in K option Parallel Port 242 Buffer Size in K option Serial 248 Buffer Size in K option USB 254 Busy on Strobe option 244 Busy signal Centronics parallel interface 295 Byte mode 296 C C T PORT menu 253 submenus 253 C128 Mode Comp option 198 C39 Compatbl option 198 Cable length Centronics parallel interface 294 IEEE 1284 parallel 297 RS 232 interface 299 RS 422 interface 299 serial 299 Cal in Peel Mode option 143 378 CALIBRATE CTRL menu 138 submenus 139 Calibrating media sensors 72 CALIBRATION Warning fault message 320 Calibration war
310. ol Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code 06 hex ACK You can select an alternate line spacing of 6 0 8 0 or 10 3 LPI The options factory default is 8 0 LPI Control Code 08 Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code 08 hex BS You can define the code to output an Elongated character or a Backspace The factory default is Elongated Copy Count Determines the number of identical copies of each physical page that will be printed The range is 1 999 and the factory default is 1 CR at MPP 1 MPP is Maximum Print Position which is also known as line length This option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at MPP 1 e On Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the next line e Off Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line The factory default is On CR Edit This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed e Disable The printer ignores all carriage returns that are not followed by line feeds e Enable The printer processes all carriage returns even for those that are not followed by line feeds The factory default is Disable 205 Chapter 206 3 CR EM amp NL CR Carriage Return EM Error Message amp NL New Line specify that the printer treat the CR EM and NL control codes either as spaces or as control codes e On Treats the CR EM and NL commands as control codes e Off
311. oller And Media Sensors 80 3 Configuring The Printer seess 85 OVEIVIOW fh 225s festa notated cea creel ok eee a a aaee aeaa 85 Setting Printer Configuration Parameters s es 85 Moving Within The Configuration Menu l 85 Selecting A Menu Option cccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseseeeseeeeeaes 86 Changing Printer Settings ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeetenaeenaes 87 Saving A Configuration c ccccececeseeeeeneeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeetenaeeeeee 88 Auto Save Configuration ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeees 89 Specifying A Power Up Configuration cccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeee 90 Modifying A Saved Configuration ccccceceeeeseseeeeseeeeseeeeetenes 91 Printing A Configuration 0 cccccccceecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeneeeetenees 93 Loading A Saved Configuration c ccccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseneeeeeaes 93 Menu OVECIVICW cccceeeeeee cence eeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeaeesecaeeeeeaeeseaeeeseaeeeeaes 94 Main Ment wi sonaia NEE anaE ES an E deere erecta 95 QUICK SETUP herne e aa a aa a aaa aaee aaeeea iain 106 QUICK SETUP SubmemtS cceccececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeetnaeens 107 CONFIG CONTROL 1 cccceeeccceeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeteeeeneaees 115 CONFIG CONTROL Submemus 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeseneees 116 MEDIA CONTRO Liceis catessss cenaseets ccteszaaecteedanidl aceasta EAE aai 118 MEDIA
312. on Disable Ron Takeup Full in the MEDIA CONTROL menu REACTIVATING Yes Normal message that No action required HOST SERIAL displays when you set Validator Funct Disable in the VALIDATOR menu or Battery Monitor Disable in the BATTERY CONTROL menu RECHARGE Yes This is the Time To Go Plug the power cart cable BATTERY Alert you can set into an AC receptacle to factory default 1 0 Hour This fault detection is only supported when the ICP Intelligent Control Panel option is connected to the printer serial port and Battery Monitor Enable in the BATTERY CONTROL menu recharge the battery If recharging the battery fails to clear the fault replace the battery or batteries 339 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Reload Ribbon loaded on the take up or supply spindle k Can User A Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution Remove Label Yes e A label was 1 Remove the label from the detected at the front of the printer to allow front of the printer the next label to print by the seh ape 2 Verify that a front door Sensor S is the assembly is installed on normal a the printer and that it is O oo properly closed Ensure aan di i sre that no debris is h n a P a obstructing the door mirror AS DLEN SEECEA or the Label Taken Sensor A label was n 3 In the QUICK SETUP or removed ie MEDIA CONTR
313. onal Business Machines Corp MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation IEEE is a registered service mark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Inc ANSI is a registered trademark of American National Standards Institute Inc EIA is a registered service mark of Electronic Industries Association ZPL ZPL Il and Zebra are registered trademarks of Zebra Technologies Corporation TEC is a registered trademark of the Toshiba TEC Corporation Intermec is a registered trademark of the Intermec Technologies Corporation SATO is a registered trademark of SATO America Inc DPL is a trademark and Datamax is a registered trademark of Datamax Technologies Corporation IER is a registered trademark of IER Si ge Copyright 2002 2007 Printronix Inc Table of Contents IMFOCUCHOM sctecabececaitssticettindaadsdeset e E 19 Printronix Customer Support Center cccececeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeteneeeeeaes 19 Printronix Supplies Department ccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeecteeeteneeenaes 19 Corporate Office S eeecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeteaeeeteeeeteaeetenaeeees 20 Training Available On Printronix Products ccccecseeeesteeseeeeeeees 20 Warnings And Special Information cccccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeneeeeeaes 21 Manual Conventions 0 ccccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeaeeees
314. ong interface cable installed If the cable is suspect contact Printronix or your authorized service representative When the printer is first powered up it will reset itself to the communication default parameters The parameters are listed in the following table PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUE Baud 9600 Data Bits 8 Parity NONE Stop Bits 1 The printer interface configuration settings may be entered from the control panel See Chapter 3 Configuring The Printer for complete instructions 303 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Common Situations Controlling Print Quality Three factors have the greatest effect on print quality e The amount of heat applied by the printhead print intensity e The speed at which media is moving under the printhead print speed e The amount of printhead pressure For example low cost direct thermal media often has very high reaction temperatures which means that it takes a great deal of heat to make a clear image Resin ribbons and film media may require higher print intensity for a quality image The printer provides two ways to increase the heat e Running the printer slower by changing the print speed via the host or the MEDIA CONTROL menu e Setting the print intensity to a higher value with the Print Intensity function accessed via the host or through the MEDIA CONTROL menu This causes more heat to be transferred into the media thereby generating a darker image Prop
315. only if WEP Key 4 Width is set to 128 Bits Chapter 3 Main Menu ETHERNET WLAN WLAN PARAMS ADDRESS PARAMS page 258 page 261 page 263 NetBIOS Protocol IP Address SEG1 Signal Strength ASCII Data Port IP Address SEG2 Operation Mode 7 IPDS Data Port IP Address SEG3 SSID Name 01 15 Keep Alive Timer IP Address SEGA SSID Name 16 30 SSID Name 31 32 Reset SSID Name Min Xfer Rate Channel 7 Antenna Ant Diversity 7 Preamble Power Mgmt Transmit Power Internat Mode Auth Method Default WEP Key WEP Key 1 Format WEP Key 1 Width WEP Key 1 BYTE1 WEP Key 1 BYTE2 WEP Key 1 BYTE3 WEP Key 1 BYTE4 WEP Key 1 BYTES WEP Key 1 BYTEE 2 WEP Key 1 BYTE7 2 WEP Key 1 BYTES 2 WEP Key 1 BYTE9 2 WEP Key 1 BYTE10 WEP Key 1 BYTE11 2 WEP Key 1 BYTE12 WEP Key 1 BYTE13 WEP Key 2 Format WEP Key 2 Width continued in next column 8 Appears only if a Symbol LA 5127 802 11 b g RF card is installed 4 Appears only if 802 11b only RF card is installed 8 Appears only if a Wireless Option is installed 9 Appears only if a Network Interface Card NIC is installed 10 Appears only if the IPDS emulation is installed and the correct security key is used 104 WEP Key 2 BYTE1 WEP Key 2 BYTE2 WEP Key 2 BYTE3 WEP Key 2 BYTE4 WEP Key 2 BYTE5 WEP Key 2 BYTE6 WEP Key 2 BYTE7 WEP Key 2 BYTES WEP Key 2 BYTE9 3 3 3 3 WEP Key 2 BYTE10 WEP Key 2 BYTE11 3 WEP
316. onts The factory default is Courier 10 Emulation Submenus Define CR code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code OD hex from the host computer If this feature is enabled each time the printer receives a carriage return it inserts an additional Line Feed code 0A hex into the data stream Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer NOTE For this menu to take effect in PGL PGL Normal needs to be set to PGL Menu e CR CR Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return e CR CR LF Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line The factory default is CR CR Define LF code PGL Serial Matrix Proprinter XL Epson FX This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs This can be used in most installations but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer NOTE For this menu to take effect in PGL PGL Normal needs to be set to PGL Menu e LF LLF Does not perform an automatic carriage return The next print position will be at the current print character position on the next line e LF CR LF Performs an automatic carriage return The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line The factory default is LF LF
317. option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs The range is 0 65536 and the factory default is 5001 Keep Alive Timer This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run Keep in mind that with the Keep Alive Timer on the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has terminated The range is 2 10 minutes and the factory default is 3 minutes Ethernet Speed This menu appears only if a 10 100Base T Network Interface Card NIC is installed The Ethernet Speed menu has five different speed modes to allow compatibility with different systems and networks e Auto Select the default Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to perform an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half Duplex 10 Full Duplex 100 Half Duplex or 100 Full Duplex e 10 Half Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using half duplex e 10 Full Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using full duplex e 100 Half Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using half duplex e 100 Full Duplex Tells the 10 100Base T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using full duplex 259 Chapter 3 ETHERNET PARAMS Job Control e Standard factory default The NIC waits for the entire job to be received before it indicates the job is done e Enhanced The NIC waits for the entire job to be printed before it indicat
318. or Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears load the latest attempted in the emulation software application program Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E04B ISI DIRECT Yes An illegal or Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears load the latest attempted in the emulation software application program Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility E04C ISI PROTEC Yes An illegal or Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was attempted in the application program appears load the latest emulation software Cycle power Run the print job again If the message appears record the display message and send it to your next higher support facility 325 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued See Manual software failure Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution E06 NOT ALIGNED Yes An illegal or 1 Cycle Power Run the print See User Manual unsupported job again If the message instruction was appears load the latest attempt
319. or to automatically peel labels from their backing and dispense them one at a time while rewinding the liner Peel Off Mode Both modes require an internal rewinder which is available as a factory installed or a field unit option Batch Rewind Mode Batch Rewind allows you to automatically rewind printed labels into a roll using the optional internal rewinder Configuring the Printer Menu 1 Set Media Handling to Continuous under the QUICK SETUP menu See Chapter 3 Configuring The Printer for more information 2 Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE displays 54 Batch Rewind Mode Installing The Media Guide The media guide must be installed when using Batch Rewind mode t5cmdgd1 Front Door Groove To install the media guide 1 Open the front door by pulling it upwards then forward 2 The bottom of the plastic media guide is shaped like a hook and the top has a groove a Hook the bottom of the media guide under the bottom edge of the front door b Snap the groove on the media guide to the top edge of the front door 3 Close the front door 55 Chapter 2 Using The Optional Internal Rewinder Loading Media epops Rewinder Release Lever Rewinder 1 To load media refer to Loading Roll Media on page 39 and complete steps 1 through 10 56 Batch Rewind Mode BZPojog Slot Rewinder Release Lever 2 Th
320. ors Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond the right edge of the page Barcode Errors An error message will print when invalid barcode data is encountered For ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL and MGL the options are as follows Disable default Full error checking and report Enable No error checking and report 151 Chapter 152 3 PRINTER CONTROL Power Saver Time The time interval you specify for this parameter sets the amount of idle time before the printer goes into Power Saver mode Pressing any key removes the power saver message from the control panel Sending a print job to the printer also turns off power saver mode The options are 1 5 10 15 30 45 60 and 240 minutes The factory default is 15 minutes Pwr Save Control Pwr Save Control allows you to enable and disable Power Saver mode If enabled the menu for Power Saver Time is in effect The options are Enable the factory default and Disable Display Language This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the LCD English German French Italian Spanish or Portuguese The factory default is English Alarm e On An audible alarm sounds 3 beeps when a fault occurs such as a paper jam e Cont Beep A continuous audible alarm sounds when a fault occurs which can be stopped by pressing CLEAR e Off No audible alarm sounds The factory default is On Power up State e Online The printer powers up in the onlin
321. orted Any element that falls off the current page is reported as an error Debug Mode Puts the printer in debug mode whenever a form is defined in CREATE mode Each line of the CREATE form will be printed along with an error if one has occurred Fault Allows you to halt the printer if a PGL error occurs If you select this option the PGL error prints on the paper the message IGP PGL Error displays on the front panel and the printer goes offline You must clear the error before the printer can resume normal operation Host Full error checking reported Error messages are sent back to the host through the port based on the menu Ret Status Port instead of being printed on paper Off There is no error checking Graphic elements such as alpha line barcodes etc will be clipped if they are beyond the page boundaries For VGL the options are as follows Enable All Full error checking and report Disable default No error checking and report Error Msgs Command syntax is checked and error messages printed when command parameters are incorrect Error Markers Prints the following error markers for those elements that print beyond the page boundaries gt gt for elements that begin off the right side of the page lt lt for elements that begin at the indicated position but end off the page for elements where the starting position of the command contains an error other than an off page error Offpage Err
322. ory default is Standard Sets Text Length Text Length is the printable length on the page below the top margin The range is 1 255 and the factory default is 66 Text Position Specifies where the text will be positioned in the line space e Top of Line Text is positioned at the top of the line space Emulation Submenus Bottom of Line the default Text is positioned as if it were at the bottom of a 6 Ipi line space The following example shows both Top of Line and Bottom of Line text positions Dot Row Top of Line Space 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bottom of 8 LPI Line Space 9 10 S x 11 5 Bottom of 6 LPI Line Space 12 a Text Position Text Position Top of Line Bottom of Line Top Margin Defined in linespaces starting from line zero at the top of the page and incrementing from the top down The range is 0 451 linespaces and the factory default is 0 linespaces Translate Table e Default the default The option is disabled The table is not stored in the real translation table until the option is enabled Downloaded The option is enabled The LU3 Translation Table is loaded from the buffer into the permanent table Translation Tbl Coax TN3270 Prints SCS and DSC DSE tables of the coax interface s current character set This operation is valid only when the coax interface is selected as the current interface Translation Tbl SPC Coax Prints a table of the coax inter
323. ory named download at the root level of your C hard drive C download Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer s CD drive 281 Chapter 4 IMPORTANT 282 Downloading Software Through The Parallel Port 10 11 12 13 14 15 Open the readme txt file on the CD There are two emulation sets with corresponding part number files from which to choose CT IPDS IGP ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL TN IGP ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL Both emulation sets include the LP emulation They are offered in two file formats exe and prg Use exe files to download through the parallel port Identify which emulation set you want to download into the printer and note the filename that corresponds to that emulation The filename is a six digit number plus exe For example 123456 exe This is the file you will download into the printer Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 8 Start a command prompt session The Start Menu icon is usually labeled MS DOS Prompt or Command Prompt At the command prompt type c lt Enter gt cd download lt Enter gt Enter the following command filename exe pb lt Enter gt where filename exe is the file name you noted in step 11 This command takes the file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into the flash memory on the printer controller board Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started Interrupti
324. ount of time in seconds SEC or minutes MIN as specified by the Clock Skew Units that Kerberos authentication will tolerate before assuming that a Kerberos message is invalid e Seconds The range is 60 900 and the default is 300 e Minutes The range is 1 15 and the default is 5 NOTE Whatever submenu is selected in Clock Skew Units will display on the Clock Skew SEC menu For example if you select Minutes the Clock Skew SEC menu name will change to Clock Skew MIN Tckt Life Units Ticket lifetime unit in Seconds Minutes Hours or Days The factory default is Seconds KERBEROS PARAMS Submenus Tckt Life SEC Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in Seconds SEC Minutes MIN Hours HR or Days DAY as specified by the Tckt Life Units that a ticket obtained from the Kerberos server is valid before getting a new one e Seconds The range is 300 259200 and the default is 43200 e Minutes The range is 5 4320 and the default is 720 e Hours The range is 1 72 and the default is 12 e Days The range is 1 3 and the default is 1 NOTE Whatever submenu is selected in Tckt Life Units will display on the Tckt Life SEC menu For example if you select Hours the Tckt Life SEC menu name will change to Tckt Life HR Renew Life Units Renew lifetime unit in Seconds Minutes Hours or Days The factory default is Seconds Renew Life SEC Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in Seconds SEC
325. ower supply Grounding Unit must be connected to a properly grounded receptacle Table 27 Power Consumption 350 4 inch printers 6 inch printers 8 inch printers 203 dpi 300 dpi 203 dpi 300 dpi 203 dpi 300 dpi 10 ips 8 ips 10 ips 8 ips 8 ips 6 ips Energy Star Power Saver Mode 24 Watts 24 Watts 24 Watts 24 Watts 24 Watts 24 Watts Standby 50 Watts 50 Watts 50 Watts 50 Watts 50 Watts 50 Watts 25 Print Density 142 Watts 143 Watts 205 Watts 175 Watts 213 Watts 212 Watts 50 Print Density 234 Watts 235 Watts 360 Watts 300 Watts 375 Watts 373 Watts Environmental Table 28 Environmental Information Operating Temperature 41 F to 104 F 5 C to 40 C Storage Temperature 40 F to 150 F 40 C to 60 C Operating Humidity Storage Humidity 20 to 85 non condensing 5 to 85 non condensing Ventilation Free air movement Dust Non conducting non corrosive Physical Physical Table 29 Physical Dimensions T5X04 T5X06 T5X08 SL5X04 MP2 SL5X06 MP2 Outside Dimensions in 13H x 11 7W x 13H x 13 4W x 13H x 15 4W x 20 5D 20 5D 20 5D Weight Ibs kg 36 6 Ibs 16 6 kg 37 2 Ibs 16 87 kg 40 Ibs 18 14 kg 40 6 Ibs 18 42 kg 43 Ibs 19 5 kg Add 1 75 D with media guide installed Add 7 5 D and 6 H for validator option Add 1 4 D for media cutter option Aco
326. ower receptacle in the back of the printer Verify the required voltage on the printer s model number label on the rear of the printer 4 Attach the AC power cord to a grounded three prong electrical outlet of the proper voltage 29 Chapter 30 1 Setting Up The Printer 5 Attach Interface a Parallel Interface Attach a suitable parallel printer cable from the computer to the Centronics IEEE 1284 interface connector at the back of the printer Snap the bail locks to the Centronics connector to secure the interface cable to the printer Serial Interface Attach a suitable serial printer cable from the computer to the DB 9 RS 232 serial interface connector at the back of the printer For additional information on serial cable wiring refer to Diagnostics And Troubleshooting on page 301 NOTE The printer supports simultaneous connection of the parallel serial Parallel Interface Serial Interface USB Connection Os and USB interfaces using the Auto Switching feature Auto Switching is described on page 293 Standard Interface Panel Status LEDs Debug Interface tScifce1 Installation NOTE The software turns on the amber status LED at power up If a hardware problem is detected at power up the amber LED will blink continuously The hardware turns on the green LED at power up If a problem is detected with the software stored in the printer s flash memo
327. p or Mark sensing or vice versa media Press the PAUSE key to clear the fault message Check the media installation procedures on page 38 Verify the lower media sensor is properly positioned under the media If Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch is selected verify the upper media sensor is positioned above the lower media sensor Run Auto Calibrate to improve the ability of the sensor to detect the installed media Check if the Gap Mark Threshold is too high or the Paper Out Threshold is too low Lower the Gap Mark Threshold or raise the Paper Out Threshold value If using media with no gaps or black marks perform Auto Calibrate to establish a valid Paper Out Threshold If the printer detected a false PAPER OUT when changing from Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch to Gap or Mark sensing or vice versa press the PAUSE key and run Auto Calibrate 336 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Can User Displayed Message Correct Explanation Solution PAPER OUT Yes In the CT emulation Load media and run a print TIMEOUT with a coax interface a test If the message persists time out message is contact your authorized service sent to the host if paper representative is not loaded within 10 minutes after PAUSE was pressed to clear a paper out fault PARITY ERROR Yes Parity error serial Check your serial host interface interface parameter settings
328. part number and revision number of the software installed in the printer e g 358186 V1 07G Feature File Displays the part number only when a feature file has been installed Hex Dump Mode e Disable factory default e Enable The printer prints out data sent from the host in hexadecimal format Also see page 213 Print Error Log Prints the current log of errors Most non routine faults RIBBON FAULT PRINT HEAD HOT are stored in the error log Clear Error Log Clears entries in the error log FLASH Installed Displays the amount of FLASH memory installed in megabytes DRAM Installed Displays the amount of DRAM installed in megabytes Ptr On Time Displays the cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on This value is set to zero at the factory after burn in testing Ptr Media Dist Displays the cumulative number of inches the printer has moved media This value is set to zero at the factory after burn in testing Head Print Dist Displays the length of media actually printed since the last Reset Head Data operation This value is set to zero at the factory after burn in testing 239 Chapter 3 DIAGNOSTICS Head On Time Displays the time that power has been applied to the printhead since the last Reset Head Data operation This value is set to zero at the factory after burn in testing Reset Head Data Resets all printhead statistics values Head Prt Dist and Head On Time to zer
329. partial label roll 40 Loading Roll Media Ribbon Loading Media and Instruction Printhead Gpo Media Damper Rubber Platen Drive Roller and the printhead You can also refer to the arrows on the printer frame or to the label inside the media cover for media loading instructions rubber drive roller 7 Thread the media under the media damper and then between the platen 41 Chapter 2 Loading Media And Ribbon Lower Media Sensor Media Guard Fixed Guide A Media Width Media Sensor Guide Handle Media Damper 8 Verify that the left inside edge of the media is against the fixed guide on the bottom of the media damper 9 Push the blue media width guide in until it is flush with the outer edge of the media 10 Check the horizontal position of the lower media sensor located under the media guard and refer to Positioning The Media Sensors on page 66 42 Loading Roll Media Lower Sensor Media Guard Opening 11 Slide the upper sensor directly over the lower sensor Media left edge Guide Notch t5calign 12 Align the left inside edge of the media with the guide notch located on the front edge of the tear bar 43 Chapter 2 Loading Media And Ribbon Pivoting Deck Deck Lock Lever 13 Close the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise This locks the pivoting deck an
330. perating system software to the printer all other optional fonts customer supplied logos setup files feature files and TIFF files will be erased You will then need to reload those files Before starting a download procedure be sure that you have all the necessary files on hand You can download software through the serial parallel USB or ethernet port of the printer and you can do it four ways e You can download software through any printer port except USB by using the Firmware Download Utility included on the CD that comes with the printer See page 280 e You can use a command prompt session to download software through the parallel port See page 281 e Ifthe printer has the NIC installed you can download software through the ethernet port See page 284 e You can use a command prompt session to download software through the USB port See page 286 279 Chapter 4 Downloading Software With The Firmware Download Utility Downloading Software With The Firmware Download Utility The Firmware Download Utility FDU allows you to download program files into the printer with an easy to use graphical interface The FDU is a utility program included on the CD that comes with the printer It can be used on computers running the Windows or UNIX such as Linux or Solaris operating systems With the FDU you can choose the printer port through which to download software configure the port and initiate the download
331. ple Config 1 a Press the key until the following message displays MENU MODE CONFIG CONTROL b Press the J key until the following message displays Load Config Factory c Press the or key to cycle through the options Factory 1 8 d When the desired number displays press the key to select it The following message displays Loading Saved Configuration Then the following message displays when it is loaded Load Config x 2 Move through the menu and change all the desired values In this example press the key until PARALLEL PORT displays Press the J key until Port Type IEEE 1284 displays Press the key until Centronics displays 3 Press the key to select each new value An asterisk displays 91 Chapter 92 3 Overview Before saving the modified configuration you must delete the original configuration if the Protect Configs option is enabled a Press the or J key until the following message displays Delete Config 1 b Press the or key to cycle through the options 1 8 When the desired number displays press the key to select it The following message displays Deleting Configuration Then the following displays when it is deleted Delete Config x Save the new configuration as described in the Saving A Configuration on page 88 Make sure you select t
332. printed in the middle of a gap especially with fanfold perforated media e Top part of an image lost when printing in head first orientation The options for Gap Windowing are Disable and Enable e Disable When the leading edge of a gap is detected the printer continuously looks for the leading edge of the next label and uses it as the TOF position Perforations or unusual media discrepancies within the gap can cause inaccurate TOF detection e Enable When the leading edge of a gap is detected the printer ignores the first 90 of the gap length value specified in the Gap Length menu option The result is that cross perforations or unusual media discrepancies within the gap are filtered out allowing the printer to reliably detect the actual leading edge of the next label and use it as the TOF position The factory default is Disable Gap Length Gap Length is the actual length height of a label gap measured in 01 inch increments The range is 0 05 to 1 00 inches NOTE You must enter the correct Gap Length If the Gap Length is too long the image will shift down from the leading edge TOF of the label The factory default is 0 12 inches Cal in Peel Mode This option allows you to perform a calibration Auto Calibrate or Pwr Up Auto Cal in Peel Off Media Handling mode e Disable The printer will not permit calibration and a CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel Off message will briefly display Additionally if Pwr Up A
333. printed matches the physical length of the label The factory default is Next TOF End of Image printing is affected by the Clip Page option under MEDIA Control See Clip Page on page 131 for more details MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Peel Off Mode When Peel Off Media Handling mode see page 120 is enabled this feature allows selection of two different media motions for automatic label peel off Fast Reverse and forward media motion distance in Peel Off mode is reduced providing faster throughput Primarily used for label lengths less than 2 inches long Standard Provides standard reverse and forward media motion distance in Peel Off mode to ensure sufficient rewinder tension The factory default is Fast Continuous Mode Allows selection of special media modes when Continuous Media Handling mode see page 120 is selected Standard Labels are printed and sent out the front The cross perforation following the last printed label is not aligned at the tear bar No auto feeding of a blank label should exist between print jobs but you may need to press the FEED key to move approximately 80 inches of the last printed label from under the printhead If performed this feed causes a blank label at the beginning of the next print job Tear Off Same as Standard but the cross perforation following the last printed label is aligned at the tear bar No blank label is needed to remove the last printed label No blan
334. printing 3 Open the pivoting deck and remove wrapped labels from the platen Clean all adhesive from the platen Reinstall labels close the deck press the PAUSE key and continue printing 4 Select the correct Media Handling mode in the QUICK SETUP menu 332 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message ee Explanation Solution LOADING Yes The new emulation No action required PROGRAM program is loading into FROM PORT XX printer RAM XX indicates how much of the program has loaded LOADING Yes A program is getting No action required PROGRAM loaded into flash INTO FLASH MENU MODE Yes Normal message that No action required QUICK SETUP displays when you first press the MENU key to place tje printer in Menu mode when no validator option is installed INCOMPATIBLE Yes Tear Off or Peel Off 1 Select a different Media WITH CUTTER Media Handling Handling Mode selection was attempted with the cutter option still installed These modes require that the front door assembly be installed to use the Label Taken Sensor 2 Power off the printer and remove the cutter option install the front door assembly power on the printer and select Tear Off or Peel Off Mode 333 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued cutter enabled in the Media Handling menu
335. ption 206 Default WEP Key option 267 Define CR code option 207 Define LF code option PGL Serial Matrix Proprinter XL Epson FX 207 379 Define LF code option P Series P Series XQ 207 Del Char frm Fish option 153 Del Char frm RAM option 154 Del Set frm Fish option 154 Del Set from RAM option 154 Delete Config option 116 Delete Files option 154 Device Address option 253 DHCP option 257 262 Diagnostic tests 238 DIAGNOSTICS menu 237 submenus 238 Diagnostics 301 DIAGNOSTICS PASSED fault message 321 Direct thermal printing 25 DIRECT THERMAL Remove Ribbon fault message 321 Display indicators 34 Display Language option 152 Display Ribbon option 133 Do FF at TOF option 208 DO NOT POWER OFF fault message 322 Download File Download Mode 290 Online PGL Only 289 Downloading Software Firmware Download Utility 280 Flash contains Boot Code 287 NIC 283 NIC and FTP 284 Parallel Port 281 Serial Port 280 USB Port 286 DOWNLOADING TO VALIDATOR fault message 322 Downloading TrueType Fonts 288 DRAM Installed option 239 DTR 248 Dual NIC 354 Dynamic print control 26 Dynamic Sensing option 145 380 E E00 EXE ADDRO message 322 E01A TYPE 0x40 message 322 E01B TYPE 0x60 message 322 E02 MACHINE CHK message 323 E03A DSI HASH L message 323 E03B DSI HASH S message 323 E03C DSI BAT PL message 323 E03D DSI BAT message 324 EO3E DSI CXIWX message 324 E03F DSI CKOWX message 324
336. r Rewinder 1 Open the media cover 2 Press the FEED key to advance the last printed label past the printhead and tear the liner from behind the last printed label 3 Manually rewind the remaining printed labels onto the rewinder by turning the rewinder counterclockwise Turn the release lever on the rewinder clockwise Slide the roll of printed labels off the rewinder 59 Chapter 2 Using The Optional Internal Rewinder Label Peel Off You can set up the printer to automatically peel die cut labels off their liner backing and dispense them one at a time while rewinding the liner You can install the media guide to prevent long labels from accidentally adhering to the front door assembly but it is normally not needed when using labels less than two inches long see Installing The Media Guide on page 55 Configuring the Printer Menu 1 Set Media Handling to Peel Off under the QUICK SETUP menu See Chapter 3 Configuring The Printer for more information 2 Press the PAUSE key until OFFLINE displays Loading Media 1 If you want to install the media guide to print long labels do so now by completing the steps listed in Installing The Media Guide on page 55 2 Open the media cover and refer to the Label Peel Off illustration on the Ribbon and Media Loading instruction label on the inside of the cover Pivoting Deck Bottom Roller Deck Lock Media G
337. r IGP PGL Interface IPS Label Liner backing Label Taken Sensor Media Media Sensor Memory The computer that stores processes and sends data to be printed which communicates directly with the printer The term host is used to indicate the controlling computer since modern printers are themselves microprocessor controlled computer systems Intelligent Graphics Printing software for the Printronix Graphics Language designated for Printronix printers IGP PGL provides online forms barcodes and many alphanumeric text generation capabilities and is compatible with earlier versions of Printronix IGP protocol and programming The hardware component used to link two devices by common physical interconnection signal and functional characteristics The speed at which the media is printed based ona rate of Inches Per Second The material labels are attached to during their manufacturing process Attachment is usually accomplished with an adhesive After printing labels can be easily removed from the liner and the liner discarded or recycled A sensor located at the front of the printer to detect the presence of a label extended out the front of the printer The sensor is used only during Peel Off and Tear Off Media Handling to sense a label and then detect its removal prior to printing the next label Material onto which data is printed by the printer The types of media supported by the printer are die
338. r models of Printronix printers e Normal the default This is normal Double High printing for current model printers e P3 4 6 9 Compat Where older printers printed two dot rows higher this option allows for compatibility by raising the print two dot rows to match the current models dot row value two dot rows lower Emulation Submenus Repeat Form When enabled this menu speeds up the label printing for repeated form This only applies to forms where the entire form is enclosed in the AIREPV AIREPE command e Enable the default Speeds up the processing of repeated forms for PGL thereby resulting in increased printer throughput This option provides no speed benefit for forms that are unrelated to one another and should be disabled under those circumstances e Disable Should be selected when subsequent forms are unrelated to one another Repeat Form Opt e Enable the default Speeds up the processing of repeated forms for PGL thereby resulting in increased printer throughput This option provides no speed benefit for forms that are unrelated to one another and should be disabled under those circumstances e Disable Should be selected when subsequent forms are unrelated to one another Reset Cmd CFG Ld When the printer receives a host data stream reset command ESC or ESC k in addition to resetting printer variables the selected configuration is loaded e Disable the default The active emulation param
339. r Data 3 5 Host Printer Data 4 6 Host Printer Data 5 7 Host Printer Data 6 8 Host Printer Data 7 9 Host Printer Data 8 MSB 10 Printer nAck PtrClk PtrClk 11 Printer Busy PtrBusy PtrBusy 296 Signals Table 13 IEEE 1284 Signals continued Type of Mode Pin Source of Data Compatible Nibble Byte 12 Printer PError AckDataReq AckDataReq 13 Printer Select Xflag Xflag 14 Host nAutoFd Host Busy HostAck 15 Not Defined 16 Logic Grid 17 Chassis Grid 18 Printer Peripheral Logic High 19 Signal Ground nStrobe 20 Signal Ground Data 1 21 Signal Ground Data 2 22 Signal Ground Data 3 23 Signal Ground Data 4 24 Signal Ground Data 5 25 Signal Ground Data 6 26 Signal Ground Data 7 27 Signal Ground Data 8 28 Signal Ground PError Select nAck 29 Signal Ground Busy nFault 30 Signal Ground nAutoFd nSelectin ninit 31 Host ninit 32 Printer NFault aDataAvail 33 Not Defined 34 Not Defined 35 Not Defined 36 Host nSelectin 1284 Active 1284 Active NOTE The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer should not exceed 32 feet 10 meters 297 Chapter 5 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface Host Clock nWrite Driven by the host Data is transferred from the host to the printer When the printer sends data two types are available If it is Nibble Mode the signal is set high If it is Byte Mode the signal is se
340. r changing Buffer Print from enable to disable The factory default is Disable Buffer Reprint This option is valid only when the printer is printing in Coax SCS mode When the ENTER key is pressed Buffer Reprint Enabled displays and an Intervention Required status is sent to the host Pressing ENTER again cancels the Buffer Reprint function and displays Buffer Reprint Disabled on the LCD 197 Chapter 198 3 C39 Compatbl This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set compatible with the new e Enable Matches the old method of decoding e Disable Uses the current way of decoding The factory default is Disable C128 Mode Comp The menu is for compatibility of the old build in auto mode switch e Enable Matches the old build on the auto mode switch e Disable Uses auto mode switch The factory default is Disable Cancel IGP DCU e Enable Cancels all buffers when a job is put on hold from the host or when the CANCEL key is pressed e Disable Does not cancel any internal buffer in the printer when a job is put on hold from the host or when the CANCEL key is pressed The factory default is Enable Change Case Specifies the font as Mono or Dual Case This option is available only in Coax non SCS mode The host will be notified of the change when the printer is put online Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the character set is one of the following right to le
341. r optimum performance e Laser Forces the output to correspond with the Printronix laser line of printers e P5000 Forces the output to correspond with the P5000 line of line matrix printers e T3000 Forces the output to correspond with the T3000 line of thermal printers e 11006 Forces the output to correspond with the T1006 line of thermal printers The factory default is Default Del Char frm Fis This option deletes downloaded character s from flash memory Ld Char from FIs This option loads downloaded character s from flash memory Save Char to Fis This option saves downloaded character s to flash memory 153 Chapter 154 3 PRINTER CONTROL Del Char frm RAM This option deletes downloaded character s from RAM Ld Char at PwrUp This option loads downloaded character s from flash memory at Power Up The options are Disable the factory default and Enable Del Set frm Fish This option deletes downloaded overlay set s from flash memory Ld Set from Fish This option loads downloaded overlay set s from flash memory Save Set to Fish This option saves downloaded overlay set s to flash memory Del Set from RAM This option deletes the downloaded overlay set s from RAM Ld Set at PwrUp This option loads the downloaded overlay set from flash memory at Power Up The options are Disable the factory default and Enable Overwrite Files This allows you to prevent files from
342. rammer s Reference Manual For Example CREATE FORM FONT NAME ARIAL TTF ALPHA 10 10 2 2 01234 STOP END EXECUTE FORM 1 The font can also be chosen and printed through LP using the TrueType Font Selection superset command as described in the LinePrinter Plus Emulation Programmer s Reference Manual For example SSCC arial ttf where SSCC is the superset control code for the current LP emulation You can also choose and print the font using the PPI ZGL protocol converter 292 5 Interfaces Overview This chapter describes the host interfaces provided with the printer The printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer plugs into the printer The interface processes all communications signals and data to and from the host computer Plus with the Auto Switching feature you can configure the printer to accept several interfaces at the same time In addition to descriptions for the multi line interfaces this chapter also provides instructions for configuration of terminating resistors for the parallel interfaces Auto Switching This feature gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams sequentially With Auto Switching the printer can service hosts attached to the serial parallel USB coax and twinax ports as if they were the only interface connected For example if the host computer sends one print job to the RS 232 serial port and a separate print job to th
343. read the media over the front of the media guide and through the opening under the front door toward the internal rewinder IMPORTANT Ifyou do not complete the following step it will be extremely difficult to remove the printed labels from the rewinder SF Raised Ridge L Back Flange LR SES Media or Liner Rewinder Release Lever 3 Turn the release lever on the rewinder counterclockwise and lock it in place This forms a raised ridge along the width of the rewinder 4 Insert the leading edge of the media into the closest slot of the rewinder and slide the media against the back flange 5 Hold the media edge in the slot and manually rotate the rewinder one full revolution counterclockwise until the media is taut 57 Chapter 2 IMPORTANT 58 Using The Optional Internal Rewinder Media Cover qepojog Deck Lock Lever 6 Press down on both sides of the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever counterclockwise against its stop to place the printhead assembly into the printing position 7 Press the FEED key to advance the media to the next TOF Top of Form position 8 Press the PAUSE key until ONLINE displays 9 Close the media cover The rewinder supports a maximum diameter of five inches of printed labels Exceeding this diameter can cause printed labels to rub on the bottom pan Batch Rewind Mode Removing Printed Media from the Rewinder qgpolog Release Leve
344. rightfully possess the printer No other rights under this license are granted 2 Source Code A source code version of eCos Software is available under the terms of the Red Hat eCos Public License v1 1 at www printronix com Printronix grants no rights whatsoever in the source code for the Printronix Software 3 No Warranty THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES THAT THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS FREE OF DEFECTS MERCHANTABLE FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGING THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU SHOULD ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT YOU NOT RED HAT PRINTRONIX ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE NO USE OF ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER 4 Conflicting Terms You agree that this Agreement provides you no more rights with regards to warranty support indemnity or liability terms with respect to Red Hat Inc Printronix Inc or any contributor to the Embedded Software than that provided by the Red Hat eCos Public License v 1 1 or any express warranty that may be made by Printronix Inc 5 Limitation of Liability
345. rinthead installed to support this field installed option General Purpose Input Ouput GPIO GPIO is both hardware and software The hardware is the actual IO board to be mounted in the printer and the software is the GPIO Manager which is part of PNE The GPIO hardware is a printed circuit board containing optically isolated inputs and outputs as well as relays The GPIO software is both a printer resident GPIO event parser and a PC based GPIO manager that allows the user to define how the general purpose IO hardware should behave for the given application RS 422 An optional serial interface that enables the printer to operate with bit serial devices that are compatible with an RS232 controller The printer may be ordered with an RS 422 serial interface installed or it can be installed by an authorized service representative at a later date Supplies And Accessories The best printing solution is achieved when the printer ribbon and media are matched to the application requirements The use of Genuine Printronix Thermal Media and Ribbons will ensure optimum image quality consistent bar code performance and extended life of the printhead Please refer to the Printronix Media Selection Guide for details concerning the application suitability for all media and ribbon products To obtain a copy of this guide or for any other questions concerning Genuine Printronix Thermal Supplies please call Americas 800 733 1900 Fax
346. rm Width char Form Length lines j Form Width inches 5 Form Width mm 5 Form Width char NOTES Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 2 The presence of this menu depends on the LP Emulation selection under PRINTER CONTROL 3 These menus do not display when CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 4 All three Form Length submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default value in the other two submenus change automatically 5 All three Form Width submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default value in the other two submenus change automatically 6 The precence of this menu depends on the LP Emulation selection under PRINTER CONTROL 101 Chapter 3 EPSON FX SETUP 45 page 191 Main Menu page 237 DIAGNOSTICS Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Character Group Character Set Epson Set Horizontal DPI Vertical DPI Prop Spacing Italic Print Slashed Zero Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Print Char Set Define CR code Auto LF Define LF code Printer Select 20 CPI Condensed Bold Alt Set 80 9F Text Position Host Command Printer Tests Test Count Software Build Feature File 2 Hex Dump Mode Print Error Log Clear Error Log
347. roll of media Test again for vertical streaks 4 Load an alternate roll of ribbon Test again for vertical streaks If after performing all these tests you still see fixed vertical streaks you must replace the printhead 305 Chapter 6 Replacing The Printhead Replacing The Printhead 1 Set the printer power switch to O Off WARNING Always unplug the printer power cord from the printer or power outlet before doing any installation procedure Failure to remove power could result in injury to you and damage the equipment When applicable you will be instructed to apply power 2 Unplug the printer power cord from the printer or the AC power source 3 Remove the ribbon and media e g paper label or tag stock material Pivoting Deck Printhead Assembly Deck Lock Lever Figure 7 Opening the Pivoting Deck CAUTION Oils from your hands can damage the light brown area heating elements of the printhead Do not touch the light brown area when you handle the printhead assembly 4 Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise The pivoting deck will swing upward exposing the bottom of the printhead assembly 306 Printhead Assembly Printhead Cover Release CAUTION Tab Pivoting Deck Replacing The Printhead Printhead Retainer Clip 2 pyweasog Pull Tab Printhead Controller Cable Assembly Tab Upper Media Sensor Cable Assembly Power Supply
348. roller circuitry If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ERROR WRITING Yes No Hardware or software Power off the printer for 15 TO FLASH fault in flash memory seconds then power back on If the problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative ERROR WRONG Yes No The printer received Power off the printer for 15 CHECKSUM the complete program seconds then power back on but the checksum did If the problem persists contact not match The data your authorized customer may have been service representative corrupted during download ERROR Yes An interim message Wait When the asterisk OCCURRED displays while the stops rotating a different fault message will appear troubleshoot the final message 328 Fault Messages Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Displayed Message renner Explanation Solution FAN WARNING Yes The printer detected 1 Verify that the fan rotates that the power supply when the printer is first fan did not rotate for at powered up and when the least 45 seconds when printer moves media or it is was supposed to prints NOTE This is a 2 Call your authorized SANNI MESSIS ang service representative will not halt printing When too high of internal temperature is detected based on its source the printer will stop printing and display a PWR SUPPLY HOT PRINTER HOT or PRINT HEAD HOT message
349. rpreter PPI DGL Programmer s Reference Manual PPI MGL Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter PPI MGL Programmer s Reference Manual PPI IEGL Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter PPI IEGL Programmer s Reference Manual P Series page 183 P Series XQ page 185 Serial Matrix page 187 Proprinter XL page 189 Epson FX page 191 You can select emulation default parameters directly from the control panel or by control codes as explained in the appropriate Programmer s Reference Manual BEFORE you reconfigure an emulation print a configuration sheet to see all current settings Standard C T Interface With a standard coax interface the printer emulates the following IBM coax printer models e 3287 Models 1 and 2 e 4234 Models 1 With a standard twinax interface the printer emulates the following IBM twinax printer models e 4234 Model 2 e 5225 Models 1 2 3 and 4 NOTE The standard Coax Twinax emulation selection will only be available if coax or twinax is selected from the C T PORT menu For more information refer to the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual Simple Protocol Converter The Simple Protocol Converter SPC option allows those who use third party add on coax or twinax protocol converters to produce the same output on a Printronix thermal printer with the Coax Twinax CTHI capability as done using a non CT printer with the third party converter interfaces The SPC gives th
350. rstrike lt Code Code Code 06 CR CR Enable LF LF 8 0 LPI Disable Enable CR CR LF Disable LF CR LF 10 3 LPI Enable Disable 6 0 LPI Printer Alt ESC d Text Host Reset Cmd Select Set 80 9F Command Position Command CFG Ld Disable Control Code Even dot plot Bottom of Line Enable Disable Enable Printable 1 Double high Top of Line Ignore All Power up config Ignore CPI Current config Ignore LPI Factory config Form Form Form Form Form Length 2 3 Length 2 3 Length 2 Width 3 5 Width 3 5 4 or 6 inches 00 0 to 24 0 inches 0 00 to 609 6 mm 4 101 6 or 152 4 mm 24 or 36 lines 04 1 06 6 or 08 5 inches 3 104 1 168 0 215 9 mm 4 0 to 144 lines 00 0 to 13 6 inches 0 00 to 345 4 mm Form Width 5 41 66 or 85 characters 4 0 to 272 characters 188 Notes Factory Default 1 When the CTHI option is installed the factory default is Printable 2 All three Form Length submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically 3 This menu does not display when the CT TN5250 or TN3270 emulation is selected 4 The factory default value depends on the width of the printer model 5 All three Form Width submenus work in conjunction When you change the default in one submenu the default values in the other two submenus change automatically PROPRINTER XL SETUP PROPRINTER
351. rt We AW ee ccctunuunnine wavveddadiily 293 OVEWIOW svete ie dnt tied tenets landed a aa EA 293 AUto SWItChing 0 ccceeceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeneaaeeneaaeeneseeeseeaeeseaeesenaaeesnaneneaes 293 Centronics Parallel Interface cccceceseceeeeeeeeeteeeteneeeseaeeeseteeeneaees 294 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals cccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 295 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface eececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaaeees 295 Compatibility MOd 0 ccceecceceeeeeeenee eects eeeeeesecaeesecaeetenaeeeteneeee 295 Nibble Mode 1 2 2 eeeceeeeeseecceeeeeeeeceeeeeseneeeeeeneeeeneeeneeeeneseseeaeeeseneees 296 Byte Mode wicca ain ani aril iie ia a Aad 296 Signale ie aae teal te eee ste aa 296 Terminating Resistor Configurations s es 298 RS 232 And Optional RS 422 Serial Interfaces 299 R228 2 a araa aaeeea aeea a aaa aaaeaii 299 RE AAEE E E AT E ASE 300 Table of Contents Diagnostics And Troubleshooting 00 301 PRINTS ToS eea EA ART 301 Troubleshooting Common Situations eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeereerreeereen 301 Improving Processing TiMe cccecseseeeeeseeneeeeeteneeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 302 Data Ex thanga aicen nonae ai a a e aia beens 302 Controlling Print Quality eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeieeirreiresirnerirerrrssrn 304 Determining Printhead Wear s sesssssssserrrssssrinnsrerrnnesrrnnnesernnnens 305 Replacing The Printhead ccccccsecestcsesceensnseesessseeesseeeesneeeasteenes 306 R
352. ry both the amber and green LEDs will alternately blink continuously Under normal conditions both LEDs remain on continuously If your printer is equipped with the optional Coax Twinax optional RS 422 and optional Network Interface Card NIC the rear I O panel will appear as illustrated below NOTE The printer does not support simultaneous connection of the coax and twinax interfaces using the Auto Switching feature Auto Switching is described on page 293 Coax Twinax RS 422 and NIC Interface Panel t5cifce2 N o NIC Connection Coax Connection Twinax Connection 31 Chapter 1 Setting Up The Printer If your printer is equipped with the optional Wireless and Optional GPIO it will appear as illustrated below Wireless And GPIO Interface Panel Wireless Antenna Wireless Interface GPIO Connection L89499 c Coax Connection Attach a suitable coaxial cable from the computer to the coax connector located in the I O plate in the back of the printer d Twinax Connection Attach a suitable twinax cable from the computer to the twinax connector located in the I O plate in the back of the printer e NIC Connection Insert a suitable NIC cable from your hub or switch to the NIC connector located in the I O panel in the rear of your printer 32 2 Operation Controls And Indicators Power Switch The power switch is located on
353. s or marks or when you want to ignore all existing length indicators place the lower sensor in the center of the media so it can detect when a Paper Out condition exists Also set the upper sensor above it 2 Select Disable in the Gap Mark Sensor submenu under CALIBRATE CTRL See Sensing Different Media Types on page 71 3 Perform an Auto Calibrate See Running Auto Calibrate on page 72 67 Chapter 2 Printing Adjustments Sensing Media with Gaps Notches or Holes Gap CN oS X Visible Red Beam 2 ae N from Lower Sensor 7 b Y per Sensor Media Guard Opening Position the lower media sensor for detecting gaps notches or holes in media with a white background Place the upper sensor above the lower sensor to provide a consistent background NOTE The 4 inch SL5000r T5000r media guard is divided into three open sensor areas Make sure the media sensor is placed in an open area 1 Position the lower sensor directly under the center of the gap notch or hole 2 Check the position of the lower sensor by looking through the long narrow opening in the media guard Use the visible red light emitting from the lower sensor as a reference pointer 3 Use the sensor handle to manually position the sensor to the center of the gap notch or hole in the media 4 Select Gap in the Gap Mark Sensor submenu under the CALIBRATE CTRL menu See Sensing Different Media Types on pag
354. s 00 1 to 99 0 inches 2 5 2514 6mm The factory defaults are listed below Table 2 Factory Default Label Length Printer Inches mm Lines T5X04 6 152 4 36 T5X06 4 101 6 24 T5X08 6 152 4 36 Maximum Label Length range is dependent on the Label Width value selected printhead installed 203 or 300 DPI See Appendix A for specifications NOTE See Set Label Length on page 134 Label Width This option specifies the physical width of the image to be printed The value can be specified in inches or millimeters depending on the setting of the Units submenu under the MEDIA CONTROL menu The allowable range in inches is 00 1 to the maximum print width of the printer The allowable range in millimeters is 2 5 to the maximum width of the printer Ver Image Shift This option specifies the amount to shift an image vertically up or down for precise positioning on the label The actual height of the image is not affected by this parameter The allowable range is 1 00 inches to the current Label Length value setting up to a maximum of 12 80 inches in 01 inch increments The factory default value is 0 00 inches Hor Image Shift This option specifies the amount to shift an image horizontally left or right for precise positioning on the label The actual width of the image is not affected by this parameter The allowable range is 1 00 to 1 00 inches in 01 inch increments The factory d
355. s 1 Config Run Calibrate Enable IGP PGL Disable i Disable PPI ZGL Enable 1 8 1 8 PPI TGL PPI IGL PPI STGL PPI DGL PPI MGL PPI IEGL IGP VGL Save Config Notes Factory Default 1 Maximum value depends on the printer model width 4 6 or 8 inches and printhead 203 or 300 dpi 2 You can change the unit value from inches to millimeters under Units in MEDIA CONTROL when Admin User is enabled 3 Based on the current value setting for the Label Length in QUICK SETUP up to a maximum of 12 80 inches 4 Maximum value depends on the width of the printer model see Appendix A Specifications 5 Maximum value depends on model width and size of DRAM installed see Appendix A Specifications 7 Gap Mark Sensor and Paper Out Sensor work in conjunction as shown in Table 6 on page 138 If you change the Gap Mark Sensor or Paper Out Sensor you must recalibrate the media 7 Appears only if a validator is installed 8 This menu will not appear on Direct Thermal only printers 9 Resolution changes based on Label Resolution menu under MEDIA CONTROL if Small Label Printer is installed 10 xxx represents the emulation name selected in the Active IGP Emul menu 106 QUICK SETUP con d from page 106 SMT Status PAA Select Tool 9 Disable None Enable CST 1 CST 2 Notes Factory Default QUICK SETUP Submenus
356. s Enable Expanded Font PGL Expanded font allows you to print characters in different sizes with specified parameters and to select which font face to use e Scalable Uses scalable fonts e Block Uses block fonts Alt Block 1 Uses alternative block fonts with a different character set The factory default is Scalable Expanded Font VGL Expanded font allows you to print characters in different sizes with specified parameters and allows you to select block or non block font face e Scalable Uses Gothic font as default Other font faces can be selected by using the IFONT command e Block Uses Block font The factory default is Scalable 209 Chapter 210 3 Expanded Fonts IPDS This option specifies which algorithm is used for expanding a character string in Write Graphics e Compatible A resizing and smoothing algorithm will be performed on the bitmapped font e Scalable A substitution will be done to a scalable outline font Using Scalable will increase performance and quality however the substitution will only be done for Latin 1 characters of resident bitmapped fonts and the type is limited to Courier and Gothic A scalable font cannot be selected directly and an LF3 format cannot be downloaded The factory default is Scalable Ext Execute Copy e Disable Dynamic data overlay data etc are not allowed if the optional Form Count parameter number of forms to print is specified as part of t
357. s and procedures Customized classes designed to meet your specific needs are available upon request Call Customer Training at 714 368 2595 or visit the Printronix website at www printronix com 20 Warnings And Special Information WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING CAUTION IMPORTANT For your safety and to protect valuable equipment read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings Conditions that could harm you and damage the equipment Achten Sie auf folgendes um keine Personen in Gefahr zu bringen bzw das Ger t zu besch digen Condiciones que pueden causar danos a personas y equipos Conditions a respecter pour viter tout danger corporel et dommage mat riel Condizioni che possono arrecare danni alle persone e alle apparecchiature Conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment Information vital to proper operation of the printer NOTE Information and helpful tips about printer operation Manual Conventions e Operator panel keys are printed in uppercase letters Example Press the PAUSE key and then press ENTER e Operator panel keys are often shown by their symbol or icon located on the control panel directly below the key Example Press the J key for ENTER e Liquid Crystal Display LCD messages are printed in uppercase letters inside quotation marks Example When OFFLINE appears on the LCD you may release the P
358. s associated with side by side labels and extraneous cut outs as shown below ACME PARTS i gt Position the media sensors in either of the grey shaded Bin AN areas Dark Pre printing us ql9g ACME PARTS Extraneous Cut out l Vertical Gap and Rounded Die cut Label Corners 66 Positioning The Media Sensors Sensing Media with Horizontal Black Marks Mark or Media with No Label Length Indicators Disable Visible Red Beam from Lower Sensor Lower Sensor Black Mark underside of media Media Guard Opening Sensing Media with Horizontal Black Marks Position the lower media sensor for detecting horizontal black marks located on the underside of media and position the upper sensor above the lower sensor to provide a consistent background 1 Check the position of the sensor by looking through the long narrow opening in the media guard Use the visible red light emitting from the lower sensor as a reference pointer 2 Use the sensor handle to manually position the sensor to the center of the black mark on the media 3 Select Mark in the Gap Mark Sensor submenu under the CALIBRATE CTRL menu See Sensing Different Media Types on page 71 4 Perform an Auto Calibrate See Running Auto Calibrate on page 72 Sensing Media with No Label Length Indicators 1 When using media without label length indicators no gaps notches hole
359. s odd Parity is used to detect transmission errors Parity represents value in the check digit of the received or transmitted data PCBA Printed Circuit Board Assembly A PCB with components ICs resistors capacitors etc installed PPI Printer Protocol Interpreter Port A data channel used for receiving data from or transmitting data to one or more external devices Protocol The rules and conventions that govern communication between a printer and a host computer A protocol includes codes for printing text and graphics and codes instructing the printer to perform special operations RAM Random Access Memory Also called main memory or working memory It is the active memory of the printer into which programs are loaded RAM is saved to volatile memory because data in RAM is lost when power is turned off or interrupted Reflective Sensing Use of the lower media sensor only to transmit and receive infrared light off the underside of media to detect gaps notches holes or horizontal black marks used for determining the Top of Form position on labels or for indicating a Paper Out condition Resolution A measure expressing the number of component units in a given range used to create an image in printing expressed as the number of dots per inch dpi horizontally and vertically RFID Encoder The RFID Radio Frequency Identification encoder programs smart labels tags with embedded inlays 374 Roll Media
360. s online 12 To verify that the fonts have been downloaded NOTE Admin User must be set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu See page 147 a Perform a configuration printout oOR b Select PRINTER CONTROL gt View File List The new file names will appear with the same part number file name you downloaded but with an ttf extension NOTE The font typefaces cannot be selected via the printer control panel They can only be selected via a software command from the host 13 Press the PAUSE key to place the printer online and return the printer to normal operation 291 Chapter 4 Select And Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts PTX_SETUP PTX_SETUP can be used to download TrueType fonts into the file system Please see the PTX_SETUP chapter in the PGL Programmer s Reference Manual for details Example PTX_SETUP FILE_IO CAPTURE ARIAL TTF PTX_END Arial TrueType font binary data NOTE Do not add any LF FF at the end of the binary data PTX_SETUP FILE_1O CAPTURE PTX_END Labeling Applications A TrueType font can be downloaded through several labeling applications such as Codesoft Loftware and Bartender Please contact the appropriate company for more details Select And Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts After downloading the TrueType font using any of the above methods the user can access the downloaded TrueType font by using the FONT NAME command as described in the PGL Prog
361. s per inch 211 Chapter 212 3 Form Width in In this submenu form width is specified in inches The form width set should not exceed the actual paper width The factory default is the maximum printing width Form Width mm In this submenu form width is specified in millimeters The form width set should not exceed the actual paper width The factory default is the maximum printing width Forms Handling This submenu allows the user to handle the form in the following ways e Disable the default No effect e Auto Eject Automatically ejects a page at the end of the job to spill out the last page e Auto TOF Automatically does a form feed FF at the end of each form to the next top of form Format Control Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed e Disable the default Reflects distance generated by the VGL feature PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed e Enable Does not reflect distance generated by the VGL feature PGL feature and Hex Transparent control code sequence in the new position after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed Gothic Typeface Controls which host command sets high speed printing e Char 02 STX e Char 03 ETX e Char 09 HT The factory default is Char 02 STX Emulation Submenus Graphic Chek
362. s started Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller PCBA incompletely loaded and the printer may not boot up 15 16 17 18 19 When the new software has successfully downloaded into flash memory and the printer has reset itself set the printer power switch to O Off Remove the CD from your computer and store it with the printer If required reconnect the data input cable s to the printer Set the printer power switch to On Using the configuration printout s you made in step 1 page 280 restore the printer configurations Downloading Software Through The Parallel Port Make a configuration printout of all saved configurations See page 93 Set the printer power switch to O Off Disconnect the data signal cable s from the printer interface connectors Connect a parallel data printer cable to the LPT1 port of a computer running the Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Server 2003 or Vista operating system Connect the data cable to the appropriate I O port of the printer On the printer control panel press and hold down the and J keys Without releasing the keys power the printer on When you see BO1 STATUS on the on the LCD release the keys Wait until you see PROGRAM DOWNLOAD on the LCD before proceeding This can take about a minute to appear depending on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer Using Windows Explorer create a direct
363. s that clearly show the problem faxing of these samples may be required Americas 714 368 2686 Europe Middle East and Africa 31 24 6489 311 Asia Pacific 65 6548 4114 http www printronix com support aspx Printronix Supplies Department Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies Americas 800 733 1900 Europe Middle East and Africa 33 1 46 25 1900 Asia Pacific 65 6548 4116 or 65 6548 4182 http www printronix com supplies parts aspx Chapter 1 Training Available On Printronix Products Corporate Offices Printronix Inc 14600 Myford Road P O Box 19559 Irvine CA 92623 9559 Phone 714 368 2300 Fax 714 368 2600 Printronix Inc Nederland BV P O Box 163 Nieuweweg 283 NL 6600 Ad Wijchen The Netherlands Phone 31 24 6489489 Fax 31 24 6489499 Printronix Schweiz GmbH 42 Changi South Street 1 Changi South Industrial Estate Singapore 486763 Phone 65 6542 0110 Fax 65 6546 1588 Visit the Printronix web site at www printronix com Training Available On Printronix Products Printronix offers Product Maintenance Training Classes designed to enhance the knowledge of your service personnel Led by Printronix staff of highly trained experienced instructors these structured classes include e Hands on work with the product e Theory of operation e Diagnosis of equipment failures e Preventive and corrective maintenance requirement
364. s the Special Function Control Code SFCC The SFCC denotes that the following data is a PGL command The range is 1 255 and the factory default is 126 Select SFCC P Series This P Series feature allows you to select an ASCII code which defines the Special Function Control Code SFCC command code value The factory default value is hex 01 but the P Series options allow selection of any value ranging from hex 00 through hex 7F This powerful feature permits the SFCC code to be assigned a value compatible with the application environment where the P Series jobs originate The most commonly used values include the following e SOH 01 hex e ESC 1B hex e ETX 03 hex e Circumflex 5e hex also called caret e Tilde 7F hex NOTE Non Printable ASCII code values range from hex 00 through hex 1F and also include hex 7F Printable ASCII code values range from hex 20 through hex 7E If a printable code value is chosen to define the SFCC code value you must ensure that the printer data stream will not contain the same code value in printable text Otherwise text containing the character for the SFCC control code value may be incorrectly processed as an SFCC command causing print errors The range is 0 7F and the factory default is 1 Select SO Char Allows you to specify a decimal code from 0 through 255 to be used in place of SO Shift Out as the control code which allows access for the alternate set of control func
365. s to 3 and the Label Width to 4 despite the fact that these values are not optimum Printer Operation The maximum Num Auto Labels 20 4 5 The selected value of 3 is legal After the file is sent the printer will begin by printing the first 4 width label Once that label is complete it will print the second 4 width label Finally once both of those labels have been printed the printer will print a blank 4 label File Contents Print Output Label Label a 1 2 Label 2 Blank Label Auto Label Width The width of a single label to be printed or the maximum width of the media that will be used for the print file The value is selectable from 00 1 inch through the maximum print width of the printer NOTE The maximum Auto Label Width value will be limited to the current MEDIA CONTROL Label Width value selected in the configuration menu The default value depends on model width and size of DRAM installed MEDIA CONTROL Submenus Num Auto Labels The desired number of labels to be printed vertically adjacent on the form The value is selectable with a range of 2 through 40 T5X04 2 through 21 T5X06 and 2 through 17 T5X08 The factory default is 2 Slew Speed The speed at which the printer moves media without actually printing on it e Automatic Always the same as the print speed see Print Speed on page 107 e Manual Allows
366. se Never asserts the DTR signal 249 Chapter 250 3 SERIAL PORT Request to Send This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the Request to Send RTS signal is generated This signal indicates whether or not the printer is ready to receive data e On Line and BNF factory default Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full e Off Line or BF Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or the internal serial buffer is full e On Line Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online e False Never asserts the RTS signal e True Continuously asserts the RTS signal Poll Character This option is for the Series1 protocol Whenever the printer receives this character it sends a response to the host indicating the current state of the printer see Series1 protocol The range is 00 FF Hex and the factory default is 00 Hex Poll Response This option is for the Series1 protocol After receiving a poll character the printer will wait the poll response time in milliseconds before sending the response The range is from 0 to 30 ms and the factory default is 0 ms Idle Response This option is for the Series1 protocol e Disable factory default e Enable The printer sends a response character every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer size SERIAL PORT Submenus
367. se Select Slew Relative Text Position Host Command Reset Cmd CFG Ld SER MATRIX PROPRINTER SETUP SETUP 2 gt page 187 page 189 Select CPI Select CPI Select LPI Select LPI Typeface Typeface Character Group Character Group Character Set Character Set Primary Subset Extended Subset Horizontal DPI Vertical DPI Prop Spacing Italic Print Slashed Zero Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Print Char Set Define CR code Auto LF Define LF code Control Code 06 Bold Overstrike Printer Select Alt Set 80 9F ESC d command Text Position Horizontal DPI Vertical DPI Prop Spacing Italic Print Slashed Zero Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Print Char Set Define CR code Auto LF Define LF code 20 CPI Condensed Bold FF valid at TOF Alt Char Set Text Position Host Command Reset Cmd CFG Ld Form Length inches 4 Form Length mm 3 4 Form Length lines SFCC d command PSeries Dbl High FF valid at TOF Text Position Form Length inches Host Command Form Length mm 4 Reset Cmd CFG Ld Form Width inches Form Length lines Form Length inches 34 Form Width mm 5 Form Width inches Form Length mm 4 Form Width char Host Command Form Width mm Form Length lines Reset Cmd CFG Ld Form Width char Form Width inches 5 Form Length inches Form Width mm Form Length mm 4 Fo
368. second and the key will be unlocked e If this function is performed while the key is unlocked the message ENTER SWITCH LOCKED displays for one second and the key will be locked When you press the key with the key unlocked you select the value or option that displays An asterisk displays after the value you selected and the configuration is changed immediately IMPORTANT Changing Printer Settings This change takes effect for all subsequent data and operations for the printer as soon as the key is pressed and the asterisk is displayed The configuration change s stay in effect only while the printer is powered on When the power is turned off all current configurations will be lost unless changes made to it are saved via the CONFIG CONTROL menu To save configuration information permanently or to select it as the power up default see Saving A Configuration on page 88 Changing Printer Settings You can change or configure printer settings such as print speed or emulations through the control panel as follows 1 Press the key until the following message displays MENU MODE QUICK SETUP 2 Press the J key to cycle through these options e Print Intensity e Print Speed e Print Mode e Media Handling e Paper Feed Shift e Label Length e Label Width e Ver Image Shift e Hor Image Shift e Orientation e Gap Mark Sensor e Auto Calibrate e Validator Function if
369. set To print Italian the user would select a different set Unicode allows any character to be selected without switching character sets because it specifies a different number for every character in all languages Thus Unicode has become the standard for multinational printing UTF 8 is a popular encoding of Unicode in which the first 128 characters are still occupied by the ASCII set This makes it backwards compatible with older applications which use only ASCII data It also allows the printing of all Unicode characters UTF 8 encoded Unicode can be enabled on the printer from the front panel or from a host command in the LP PGL or ZGL emulation Cmd Resolution e Low Resolution Sets a low command resolution mode e High Resolution Sets a high command resolution mode The factory default is Low Resolution Coax Type This parameter defines the printer emulation as follows e 4234 e 3287 After the emulation has been changed a POR status is sent to the host The factory default is 4234 Code Page Subset This item allows you to select the desired version of the following code pages 037 273 274 275 277 278 280 281 282 284 285 297 500 and 871 The options are Version 0 the factory default and Version 1 Emulation Submenus Compressed Print Controls which host command sets compressed printing e Char 01 SOH e Char 03 ETX e Char 09 HT The factory default is Char 01 SOH Control Code 06 Contr
370. specifications published by Printronix Inc Printronix Inc does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs errors and omissions Remedy Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix Inc in connection with the Software is replacement of defective software with a copy of the same version and revision level Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies 1 THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED Printronix Inc does not warrant that the functions contained in the Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free Printronix Inc reserves the right to make changes and or improvements in the Software without notice at any time 2 INNO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX INC BE LIABLE FOR LOST PROFITS LOST DATA BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS OR ANY OTHER DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT EVEN IF PRINTRONIX INC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE ABUSE OR MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU 3 Printronix Inc will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay in furnishing
371. splay in the name of the second menu The factory default and values depend on the unit selected in the Clock Skew Units menu See Clock Skew SEC on page 270 for more information 5 The factory default and values depend on the unit selected in the Tckt Life Units menu See Tckt Life SEC on page 271 for more information The factory default and values depend on the unit selected in the Renew Life Units menu See Renew Life SEC on page 271 for more information KERBEROS PARAMS Submenus Kerberos Enable e Disable the default Disables Kerberos authentication in the wireless network interface e Enable Enables Kerberos authentication in the wireless network interface Kerb Pwd 01 15 First 15 characters of the Kerberos password maximum number of characters is 40 269 Chapter 270 3 KERBEROS PARAMS Kerb Pwd 16 30 Characters 31 to 40 of the Kerberos password maximum number of characters is 40 Kerb Pwd 31 40 Characters 31 to 40 of the Kerberos password maximum number of characters is 40 Reset Kerb Pwd Resets Kerberos password to an empty string KDC Port Number KDC Key Distribution Center port number is the 2 byte UDP TCP port used for Kerberos Communication The range is 0 65535 and the factory default is 88 Clock Skew Units The options are Seconds and Minutes and the factory default is Seconds Clock Skew SEC Sets the maximum allowable am
372. ss Permanent acrylic adhesive Media 220 Premium direct thermal paper Compliance shipping general warehouse address Permanent acrylic adhesive AIAG LOGMARS product ID Media 270 Infra Red scannable direct paper Infra red scannability for overnight shipping and Permanent acrylic adhesive grocery environments Media 280T 7 mil direct thermal paper tagstock Economical ticket and tag stock for general retail and industrial use Media 410 3 3 mil direct thermal film Excellent moisture resistance and tear strength for Permanent acrylic adhesive applications such as baggage tags etc Media 510 4 0 mil white thermal transfer polyolefin Durable satin finish for chemical pails and drums and Permanent acrylic adhesive general outdoor and industrial use Media 520 Smudge proof white thermal transfer Outdoor exposures especially chemical drums etc polyolefin provides a markable soundproof topcoat Permanent acrylic adhesive Media 580T 8 5 mil smudge proof thermal transfer Outdoor nursery lumberyard and industrial Poly tagstock environment hangtag and insert tag Media 700 s 2 0 mil polyester labelstock thermal transfer UL CSA compliant nameplate labels harsh White bright amp matte chrome environment and laboratory labels 357 Appendix B _ Supplies And Accessories Besides the standard roll label configuration Genuine Printronix ThermaLine labels are also available in fanfold configurations Thermal Transfer
373. st the media sensor horizontally to detect gaps holes notches or narrow width black marks See Positioning The Media Sensors on page 66 5 If the problem persists run the Media Profile printout to see if the label length indicators are being sensed 6 Run Manual Calibrate See Running Manual Calibrate on page 79 Pivoting deck is difficult to close and lock when heavy tag stock media is installed 1 Set the printhead pressure adjustment dial to the MIN position Close the pivoting deck and lock the deck lock lever Position the printhead pressure adjustment dial to the desired head pressure setting Print is too small or too large Ensure the proper printhead is installed 203 or 300 dpi e Print quality is good but the printer skips every other label e An occasional blank label occurs within a print job but no labels are lost 1 Make sure that the label is not formatted too close to the top edge of the form Leave white space equal to eight dot rows at the top of the label 300 dpi 0264 inches 203 dpi 04 inches 2 Check that Clip Page Enable in the MEDIA CONTROL menu Clip Page Enable causes any printable data to be clipped off and lost once the next TOF position transmissive gap notch hole or reflective mark is detected Clip Page Disable allows the printer to ignore a gap or mark The printer looks for the gap or mark after the specified Label Length is f
374. stalled media When Gap is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge of one gap to the trailing edge of the next gap one label one gap When Mark is selected the Sensed Distance should match the length from the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark Auto Calibrate supports label lengths up to 24 inches Media Profile This feature provides a graphical printout showing the relationship of the Paper Out Threshold and the Gap Mark Threshold The profile printout assists you in setting the thresholds for difficult media This includes pre printed labels and labels with poor gap media dynamic range When selected the printer will advance media and print the media profile along the length of each label The printer will continue to print the profile until you press J The factory default is Print Profile Sensed Distance This value in inches represents the distance that was sensed between the TOF of one label to the TOF of the next label With gapped media installed the distance equals the physical label length plus one gap notch or hole trailing edge of one gap notch or hole to the trailing edge of the next gap notch or hole With black mark media installed the distance equals the leading edge of one black mark to the leading edge of the next This value is automatically determined only after successful completion of Auto or Manual Calibrate and cannot be
375. t Type under C T PORT is set to Twinax 3 This menu appears only if the CTHI emulation under PRINTER CONTROL is set to Standard 4 This menu does not appear if the IPDS emulation is installed 5 This menu appears only if you select the User Defined option in the Lead in Chars menu Chapter 3 TWINAX SETUP 168 Twinax Setup Primary Sets and Secondary Sets TWINAX SETUP from page 167 Primary Sets 0037 English US 0037 Eng Nether 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg New 0273 Austr Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK 0892 OCRA 0893 OCR B 0424 Hebrew 0803 Hebrew Old 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril Old 0423 Greek Old 875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0256 Intern 1 1112 Balt Mult 0924 Euro Lat 9 1122 Estonian 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan 1143 Euro Finn 1144 Euro Ital 1145 Euro Span 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro Fren 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice 0500 Internat 5 Secondary Sets English US Austrian German Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish Norweg Finnish Swedish French Italian Japanese Eng Japanese Katak Portuguese Spanish Spanish Speak English UK Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic
376. t all four WEP keys WEP Key 1 through WEP Key 4 at one time 267 Chapter 268 3 WLAN PARAMS WPA Mode Selects the WPA wireless security mode e Disable the default WPA security is disabled e Personal Selects personal or pre shared key mode for WPA security WPA Cipher Selects the WPA wireless security cipher setting Options include e TKIP the default e AES e TKIP AES WPA P Phs Allows you to set the individual bytes of the WPA passphrase Reset WPA P Phs Allows you to reset all 32 bytes of the WPA passphrase at once KERBEROS PARAMS KERBEROS PARAMS Submenus KERBEROS PARAMS from page 104 Kerberos Enable Disable Enable Kerb Pwd Kerb Pwd Kerb Pwd Reset Kerb KDC Port 01 15 16 30 31 40 Pwd Number 88 0 65535 Clock Skew Units 2 Seconds Minutes Clock Skew SEC 3 Notes Tckt Life Units 2 Seconds Minutes Hours Days Factory Default 1 This menu displays only if a Symbol LA4121 RF card is installed Tckt Life SEC 3 43200 300 259200 Renew Life Units 2 Seconds Minutes Hours Days Renew Life SEC 3 o 6 0 604800 2 3 These two menus work in conjunction Whatever submenu name is selected in the first menu will display on the second menu For example if you select Minutes MIN will di
377. t low Data 1 through Data 8 These pins are host driven in Compatibility Mode and bidirectional in Byte Mode They are not used in Nibble Mode Data 1 is the least significant bit Data 8 is the most significant bit Printer Clock Peripheral Clock Interrupt Driven by the printer A signal from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data transfer Printer Busy Peripheral Acknowledge nWait Driven by the printer Indicates the printer cannot receive data Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble Mode Acknowledge Data Request nAcknowledge Reverse Driven by the printer Indicates the printer is in a fault condition Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble Mode Xflag Driven by the printer A high true level indicating the printer is ready for data transfer and the printer is online Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble Mode Host Busy Host Acknowledge NDStrobe Driven by the host Activates auto line feed mode Peripheral Logic High Driven by the printer When the line is high the printer indicates all of its signals are in a valid state When the line is low the printer indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state nReverse Request Driven by the host Resets the interface and forces a return to Compatibility Mode idle phase nData Available nPeripheral Request Driven by the printer Indicates the printer has encountered an error Data bits 1 and 5 in
378. t prompt you to save any changes made 117 Chapter 3 MEDIA CONTROL MEDIA CONTROL MEDIA CONTROL from page 96 Print Print Print Media Paper Feed Label Intensity Speed Mode Handling Shift Length 7 3 6 ips Transfer Tear Off Strip 0 00 inches 2 4 or 6 inches gt 4 15 to 15 1 to 10 ips Direct Tear Off 1 00 to X inches 8 00 1 to 99 0 inches 5 Peel Off Cut Continuous Label Ver Image Hor Image Orientation Auto Map Width 7 Shift Shift Select 4 1 6 6 or 8 5 inches 4 0 00 inches 2 0 00 inches 2 Portrait Disable 00 1 to 8 5 inches 4 1 00 to Xinches 1 00 to 1 00 inches Landscape Enable Inv Portrait Inv Landscape Auto Label Num Auto Slew Speed Print Direction Label Wait Width Labels Time 4 1 6 6 or 8 5 inches 4 2 labels Automatic Head First 0 1 second 00 1 to 8 5 inches 4 2to 40 labels Manual Foot First 0 1 to 60 0 seconds 6 ips 1 to 10 ips 4 Pre Peel Pre Peel Lbl Missing Clip Page Error Ribbon Mode Adjust Fit Recover Width Disable 1 00 inches Enable Enable Disable Same as Paper Enable 0 00 to 2 00 inches Disable Disable Enable Set in Menu Display Ribbon Rbn Takeup
379. t s to the printer while it is online PGL Emulation Online A TrueType font can be downloaded by creating a file that appends a PGL command to the font and then sending that file to the printer Use the PGL FONTLOAD command FONTLOAD FontName FontSize DISK where FontName TrueType font name e g arial ttf FontSize TrueType font size e g file size for arial ttf DISK Specify the download location to Flash For example FONTLOAD arial ttf 60548 DISK Insert binary data of arial ttf here END After the file is created it can be copied to the appropriate I O port of the printer while the printer is online just like any other print file for example copy b filename ext 1pt1 289 Chapter 4 Downloading TrueType Fonts Download Mode To download a TrueType font to the printer through Download mode first add a header to the font then place the printer in Download mode and download the font Adding A Header A TrueType font can be converted to a downloadable format by appending a header to the font file using the cnvt2fls exe utility 1 Start a Command prompt window 2 Copy cnvi2fls exe and addtthdr bat from your startup CD to your working directory 3 In your working directory include the TrueType font file in ttf format e g arial ttf 4 Convert the TrueType font file ttf to a downloadable format dwn with the following command addtthdr filename without extension Example addtt
380. t the device address from 0 through 6 The host directs data and commands on the twinax line to a specific device based on its unique device address After the address has been changed a Power On Reset POR status is sent to the host The factory default is 1 Timeout This item allows you to set the time that the printer when it has not received data from its host will begin to service all other host ports looking for data to print The range is from 5 to 60 seconds and the factory default is 10 seconds Report Status When a fault condition occurs in the printer normally only the active port reports the fault to the host With this item enabled the port will report any fault even when it is not the current active port The options are Disable the factory default and Enable 253 Chapter 3 uU USB PORT SB PORT 254 USB PORT from page 102 1 Buffer Size Timeout in K Notes 16 10 sec 1 16 1 60 sec Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if the USB option is installed USB Port Submenu Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port buffer The range is from 1 to 16 Kbytes in 1 Kbyte increments The factory default is 16 Timeout This item allows you to set the time that the printer when it has not received data from its host will begin to service all other host ports looking for data to print
381. ted in the middle of the gap e The top part of the image is lost when printing with Head First orientation selected 1 Inthe CALIBRATE CTRL menu set Gap Windowing to Enable 2 Set Gap Length to equal the physical gap length of the media installed The range is 0 05 to 1 00 inches The likely cause of these symptoms is that Clip Page Enable and a cross perforation radical fold or flaw in the liner has caused the media sensor to detect this as the leading edge TOF of the new label or end of label EOF or both Smears or voids in printed image 1 Clean the printhead 2 Make sure the printhead temperature Print Intensity is not too high Change the Print Intensity value in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu See Print Intensity on page 119 3 Verify that the printhead pressure blocks are positioned correctly to match the media width installed See Printhead Pressure Block Adjustments on page 65 4 Make sure the printhead pressure dial is set properly for the media thickness installed 5 Skin oils can adhere to the surface of label stock causing fingerprints which inhibit thermal transfer Wipe label stock with a cloth or remove a few feet of labels to expose a clean area Handle labels by the edges 6 Check that the media has not been mishandled before or during installation in the printer Soiled media or media with fingerprints will prevent proper ribbon transfer 7 Check
382. ters 99 Chapter 3 Main Menu PPI STGL PPI DGL PPI MGL PPIIEGL SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter PPI STGL Programmer s Reference Manual Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter PPI DGL Programmer s Reference Manual Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter PPI MGL Programmer s Reference Manual Refer to the Printer Protocol Interpreter PPI IEGL Programmer s Reference Manual NOTES Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable in the PRINTER CONTROL menu 1 Appears only if Active IGP Emul is set to PPI emulation 100 Vertical DPI Prop Spacing Italic Print Slashed Zero Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Print Char Set Define CR code Auto LF Define LF code Control Code 06 Control Code 08 Bold Overstrike Select SFCC EVFU Select Alt Set 80 9F P SERIES P SERIES XQ SETUP SETUP 1 6 page 183 page 185 Select CPI Select CPI Select LPI Select LPI Typeface Typeface Character Group Horizontal DPI Character Set Vertical DPI Primary Subset Prop Spacing Extended Subset Italic Print Horizontal DPI Slashed Zero Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Print Char Set Define CR code Auto LF Define LF code Control Code 06 Compressed Print Bold Elong Alt Font Gothic Typeface EVFU Select Upr Ca
383. th the printer incompatible with the dual NIC software interface in the printer Verify the approved brand and model number of the radio card with your printer service provider and install the correct version If using the correct radio card does not resolve this problem call your service provider for further support 343 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation 344 Specifications Print Method Table 18 Printing Specifications T5204 T5304 T5206 T5306 T5208 T5308 SL5204 SL5304 Print Resolution dpi 203 300 203 300 203 300 Min Dot Size sq in 005 0033 005 0033 005 0033 127 mm 083 mm 127 mm 083 mm 127 mm 083 mm Bar Code Modulus mils Picket Fence 5 127 3 3 110 5 127 3 3 110 5 127 3 3 110 Ladder 10 127 10 110 10 127 10 110 10 127 10 110 Max Print Speed ips 10 8 10 8 8 6 Max Slew Speed ips 10 8 10 8 8 6 Max Print Width in 4 1 4 1 6 6 6 6 8 5 8 5 104 1 mm 104 1 mm 167 6 mm 167 6 mm 215 9 215 9 mm mm Flash Memory MB Standard 8 8 8 8 8 8 Flash Memory MB Maximum 16 16 16 16 16 16 DRAM MB Standard Max 32 32 32 32 32 32 Max Print Length in at max 99 97 99 62 99 48 width std DRAM 1 2 2515 mm 2464 mm 2515 mm 1575 mm 2515 mm 1219 mm NOTES 1 These figures are approximate and depend upon the active emulation 2 These values may not be supported at maximum throughput
384. that media has not been installed inside out Surfaces on both sides may look identical but can produce big differences in print quality 8 Make sure the correct ribbon and media combination are being used Use the correct ribbon type 9 Check the ribbon for creases or folds across its surface Smooth out the ribbon to remove any creases 10 Reduce the Print Speed value through the QUICK SETUP menu MEDIA CONTROL menu or via host software 11 If using ribbon Transfer Print mode do not use direct thermal media 313 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 16 Printer Problems and Solutions continued Symptom Solution Explanation PRINTER OPERATION Advances several labels when FEED key is pressed 1 Check that labels are loaded correctly See Loading Media And Ribbon on page 38 2 Check that the Label Length in the QUICK SETUP menu MEDIA CONTROL menu or sent by the host computer agrees with the length of the media installed Although gaps holes notches or black marks are used to establish the Top of Form position a larger page length will override the gap and skip a page or more if Clip Page in the MEDIA CONTROL menu is set to Disable Set Page Length to match the media being used 3 Check that the printer is optimized to detect the type of media installed Perform Auto Calibrate for gapped and black mark media See Running Auto Calibrate on page 72 4 Adju
385. the upper or lower media sensor They can damage sensor lens covers The upper and lower media sensors should be cleaned to ensure reliable TOF and Paper Out sensing Clean the media sensors at the same time as the printhead The upper media sensor located in the horizontal slot of the printhead cover can be wiped clean using a soft cloth The lower media sensor easily seen by its visible red light is located in the horizontal slot of the media guard Remove media dust by vacuuming or blowing air across the lens cover 81 Chapter _ 2 Cleaning Pivoting Deck Printhead Heating Elements Peel Tear Door Lower Media ensor visible with red LED Printhead Cover Upper Media Sensor Print Element O O k 7 Upper Sensor 82 WARNING CAUTION Cleaning The Printhead Platen Roller And Media Sensors Rotate the deck lock lever clockwise to open the pivoting deck and remove any media and ribbon if loaded to gain access to the printhead assembly heating element area 2 Gently rub the felt tip of the cleaning pen or a cotton swab with Isopropyl alcohol across the printhead heating elements light brown area 3 Allow the printhead to dry for one minute before reloading the media and ribbon Clean the platen roller Clean the upper media sensor with a soft cloth Clean the lower media sensor by vacuuming or blowing air across the lens cover Cutter Option Cleaning The cutter r
386. the chip by incineration Failure to comply may cause the battery to explode Contact your local waste agency for the correct disposal procedure BE bh ak Bo Printronix makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Printronix shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages whether direct indirect incidental or consequential in connection with the furnishing distribution performance or use of this material The information in this manual is subject to change without notice This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright No part of this document may be reproduced copied translated or incorporated in any other material in any form or by any means whether manual graphic electronic mechanical or otherwise without the prior written consent of Printronix COPYRIGHT 2008 PRINTRONIX INC All rights reserved Trademark Acknowledgements Printronix IGP Auto Label Mapping LinePrinter Plus PGL and PrintNet are registered trademarks of Printronix Inc ThermaLine T5000 and SL5000 is a trademark of Printronix HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Code V is a trademark of QMS Inc QMS is a registered trademark of Quality Micro Systems Inc IBM is registered trademark of Internati
387. the following message displays MENU MODE CONFIG CONTROL 2 Press the J key until the following message displays Save Config 1 3 Press the or key to cycle through the options 1 8 Note that Factory is not listed because no changes made to the factory configuration can be saved under Factory 4 When the desired number displays press the key to select it The following message displays briefly Saving Configuration When processing is completed the display shows Save Config x 88 Auto Save Configuration NOTE If the configuration number has been previously saved and Protect Configs Enabled under CONFIG CONTROL the following error message displays CONFIG EXISTS Delete First If the above occurs see Modifying A Saved Configuration on page 91 step 4 5 Print your configuration and store it in a safe place for future reference Refer to Printing A Configuration on page 93 Auto Save Configuration If you make any changes to the factory default configuration menu items you will be prompted to save the changes to Config when you place the printer online equals the next available unassigned configuration number When prompted press one of the following keys e Enter Saves to Config 1 or the next available Config and becomes the Power Up config NOTE If all eight Configs are assigned you will be prompted to select whic
388. the host Compatibility Mode This mode provides compatibility with Centronics like host I O see Table 11 Data is transferred from the host to the printer in 8 bit bytes over the data lines 295 Chapter 5 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface Compatibility Mode can be combined with Nibble and Byte Modes to provide bidirectional communication Nibble Mode Eight bits equals one byte When a byte of data is sent to the printer the eight bits are sent over eight data lines Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines To bypass this the IEEE 1284 permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status lines Half a byte equals one nibble Two sequential four bit nibbles are sent over the lines Data is transferred from printer to host in four bit nibbles over the status lines and the host controls the transmission Byte Mode The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines one bit per line If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host the host will take control of the data transfer Signals Table 13 lists each of the signals associated with the corresponding pins on the IEEE 1284 interface Descriptions of the signals follow Table 13 IEEE 1284 Signals Type of Mode Pin Source of Data Compatible Nibble Byte 1 Host nStrobe HostClk Host Clk 2 Host Printer Data 1 LSB 3 Host Printer Data 2 4 Host Printe
389. the peel off position and Remove Label displays on the LCD 14 Manually remove the peeled label from the printer 15 Press the PAUSE key until ONLINE displays 16 Close the media cover IMPORTANT The rewinder supports a maximum diameter of 5 inches of liner Exceeding this diameter can cause the liner to rub on the bottom pan The rewinder is designed to support the full amount of liner from a standard 8 inch diameter media roll 62 Removing The Media Guide Removing Label Liner from the Rewinder A O Noss 6 Open the media cover Open the front door Tear the liner at the tear bar Manually rewind the remaining liner onto the rewinder by turning the rewinder counterclockwise Turn the release lever on the rewinder clockwise Slide the roll of label liner off the rewinder and discard Removing The Media Guide Remove the media guide from the front door when using Tear Off or Tear Off Strip media handling because you will need to tear the label downward against the tear bar Tear Bar Front Door t5cmdgd2 Open the front door by pulling it upward then forward Grasp the upper right corner of the media guide and pry it off of the top of the front door After removing the media guide close the front door Open the pivoting deck and load paper and ribbon normally see Loading Media And Ribbon on page 38 63 Chapter 2 Printing Adjustments Printing Adjustments Printhead
390. the validator option is installed Refer to the Online Data Validator User s Manual e Active IGP Emul e Save Config e Power Up Config e SMT Status if RFID is installed Refer to the RFID Labeling Reference manual e PAA Status if RFID is not installed 87 Chapter 3 Overview 3 When the desired submenu displays press the or key to scroll through the values or options 4 Press the key to select a value An asterisk displays next to the selected value or option 5 If there are more submenu values or options you want to change use the T J and keys to access the value and the key to select it At any time you may press the key to return to the Main menu 6 At any time you may press the PAUSE key twice to exit the Configuration menu and place the printer online Once you have finished selecting all your options save your configuration IMPORTANT If you do not save your configuration all your new values will be lost when you power off the printer Saving A Configuration You can save up to eight different configurations to meet eight unique print job requirements These configurations are saved and stored in the printer and are not lost when the printer is turned off NOTE If the Protect Configs option is enabled the new configuration will not be saved until the existing configuration is deleted Follow these steps to save a new configuration 1 Press the key until
391. thout label stock installed between the printhead and the platen because debris on the platen may damage the printhead Adhesive backed labels that DO NOT lay flat on the liner can jam the printer This can cause the label to peel off the liner The exposed edges can stick to the label guides and rollers inside the printer If you run out of labels while printing do not turn off the printer while reloading labels because you can lose data Loading Roll Media Loading Roll Media es Media Cover Media Hanger Media Hanger Pivoting Guide Deck t5cloc2 Media Width Guide Media Damper Deck Lock Lever Open the media cover 2 Slide the blue media hanger guide outward to the end of the media hanger and flip it up horizontally 3 Open the pivoting deck by rotating the blue deck lock lever fully clockwise 4 Slide the blue media width guide close to the outside end of the media damper 39 Chapter 2 Loading Media And Ribbon Media Roll Ss Media Hanger oi Media Hanger Guide t5clod4 5 Slide a roll of media onto and towards the back of the media hanger The media feeds from the top of the roll and towards the front of the printer 6 Place the media hanger guide under the media hanger and against the lower part of the label core at a 45 degree angle as shown This position provides the required tension for a new label roll and the desired drag for a
392. tion characters See the description of the Code 128 barcodes in the PGL Programmer s Reference Manual for details The range is 0 255 and the factory default is 14 227 Chapter 228 3 Set Text Orientn Coax Twinax Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page This allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right e Control By Host the default Allows printers configured as a 4234 to use the Set Text Orientation command from the host Left to Right Right to Left When you select a right to left language the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online Set Text Orientn TN3270 TN5250 Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page This allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right e Left to Right the default e Right to Left When you select a right to left language the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online Select SFCC IGP VGL This option selects the Special Function Control Code The default value is the caret decimal 94 Valid values are 17 through 255 Run a configuration printout to determine the currently selected SFCC The range is 17 255 and the factory default is 94 SFCC Char SPC Coax SPC Twinax Determines what character is printed when an EBCDIC Logical
393. to print at print position 1 of the first print line on the next form Power on IGP PGL You can set the IGP PGL feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the printer is powered on e Enable the default The IGP PGL is enabled when the printer is powered on The IGP PGL feature is initialized in the Normal mode Disable The IGP PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on The IGP PGL feature is initialized to the Quiet mode Power up F e Disable the default e Enable Selects free format mode as the power up default and selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default Free format causes the VGL to ignore carriage returns line feeds and all characters below 20 hex sent from the host Power up PY e Disable the default e Enable Selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default Power up X e Disable the default e Enable Selects the ignore mode as the power up default and selects the graphics mode PY as the power up default All characters are ignored until a A command is received Preparser Port Allows you to send preparser commands to the printer through any port e Disable the default Not using the Preparser command e Enable The preparser command can be accepted from any port Primary Subset This item allows selection of the desired primary character subset used by the printer The factory default is ASCII USA 223 Chapter 224 3 Print Char Set S
394. tronix web page at www printronix com NOTE The term media used in this manual refers to all the different kinds of paper or tag stock that can be used in the printer See Genuine Printronix Media on page 357 for more information Ribbons Printronix offers a wide range of ribbons specifically engineered to enhance printing capabilities and to prevent premature printhead wear Therefore you should use a Genuine Printronix Thermal Ribbon in your printer See Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons on page 356 for more information 26 Unpacking The Printer Setting Up The Printer CAUTION CAUTION Unpacking The Printer The printer is shipped in a carton and protective bag The top lid of the carton has instructions for removing the internal packing material Keep all packing material in case repacking is required Avoid touching the electrical connectors to prevent electrostatic discharge damage while setting up the printer The discharge of accumulated electrostatic energy can damage or destroy the printhead or electronic components used in this device Do not place the printer on its backside during unpacking or handling because you may damage the printer interface connector t5cunpk1 os A eo T Media Cover Tape Strips 2 Foam Pads 2 1 Remove the tape strips from the media cover Lift open the media cover 2 Remove the tape securing the foam pad to the inside of the medi
395. tus message in CT Press PAUSE to put the printer TIMEOUT emulation the printer online was offline more than 10 minutes and the Intervention Required parameter is set to Send to Host 15 COMM CHECK Yes No Communication Check 1 Check your network for a message that proper operation appSars m ine Cr 2 Try a different cable froma emulation ere ine known good device line is not active ona twinax interface 3 Ifthe problem persists contact your authorized customer service representative 22 INVALID ADDR Yes Invalid Address poll Have the system administrator time out on the twinax make sure the printer address interface indicating the is correct unit address is not recognized by printer 27 CU TIMED OUT Yes Controller Unit Timed Check the cable connection Out the printer was not and host system Refer to the enabled for one minute line problem determination or more on a coax procedures as recommended interface by the host system 28 CU NOT ENAB Yes Controller Unit Not Check the cable connection Enabled Poll time out error The printer was not polled for one minute across a coax interface and host system Refer to the line problem determination procedures as recommended by the host system 317 Chapter 6 Restore The Printer To Operation Table 17 LCD Message Troubleshooting continued Data Format Displayed Message ues Explanatio
396. ty issues e Modulo 7 CD The I 2 5 bar code uses a modulo 7 check digit instead of the default modulo 10 check digit The factory default is Leading Zero Emulation Submenus Ignore Ch 1 Specifies character 1 for the character filtering option Valid decimal values are from 0 through 255 The factory default is 0 Ignore Ch 2 Specifies character 2 for the character filtering option Valid decimal values are from 0 through 255 The factory default is 0 Ignore Chars Disable Character filtering is not enabled e Char 1 Character 1 will be filtered Select the option Ignore ch 1 to specify character 1 e Char 2 Character 2 will be filtered Select the option Ignore ch 2 to specify character 2 e Char 1 amp 2 Characters 1 amp 2 will be filtered Select the options Ignore ch 1 and Ignore ch 2 to specify values for these characters The factory default is Disable Ignore Dots e Disable The VGL expects position values to be specified in tenth inches and dot rows e Enable Causes the VGL to expect position values to be specified in only 1 10ths of an inch If the dot position is also given it is treated as text The factory default is Disable Ignore Lxx Cmd e Disable The factory default e Enable The Form Length commands Lxx and Hxx will be ignored and the form length will be determined by the Form Length menu in the LP menu The factory default is Disable
397. ubmenu cccccccceceesessseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 274 PRINTER MGM PD E A A E AE E TN 277 PRINTER MGMT Submenus cccccccccccceececeeeseeeeeeseseeeeaeeeees 277 Table of Contents DATE e tents Gee ohetehialy Matec tosh a tiene bat ata ihe ay Ruta aai 278 Date SUBMENUS sssrin aaao a aan aer en aai 278 4 Downloading Software ccccssssssssseeseeseeeeeees 279 Loading Flash Memo c ccceeesseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaes 279 Downloading Software With The Firmware Download Utility 280 Downloading Software Through The Parallel Port 281 Downloading Software Through The NIC ccceceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeees 283 Downloading Software Through The NIC Using FTP eee 284 Downloading Software Through The USB Pott ssec 286 Downloading Software If Flash Contains Only Boot Or Corrupt E010 AE EE A dete E tale iin tinier in Ws Ga ee neat 287 Using TrueType Fonts sairia R E ERRE 288 Downloading TrueType Fomt cceessceceeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeaas 288 Printronix Windows DIivel c cceeeesceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeteneeeeenenaes 289 PGL Emulation Online cc ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeseeeetaes 289 Download Mode esc eccscscceczeseccs annaa cies sides 290 PT XS ETOP i snaa atata ataa aeara ea aeaaeai 292 Labeling Applications seseeeeeeeeeeieeeeesrreesrirrsseirrsserinnnnerinn reena 292 Select And Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts 292 5 Interfaces che
398. ugh The USB Port Downloading Software Through The USB Port Normally the host communicates with the printer s USB port with a Windows driver The Windows driver cannot be used to transfer a program file to the printer To download software through the USB Port perform the following steps 1 Using Windows Explorer create a directory named download at the root level of your C hard drive C download Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer s CD drive Open the readme txt file on the CD There are two emulation sets with corresponding part number files from which to choose CT IPDS IGP ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL TN IGP ZGL TGL IGL STGL DGL MGL IEGL Both emulation sets include the LP emulation They are offered in two file formats exe and prg Use prg files to download through the USB 4 Identify which emulation set you want to download into the printer and note the filename that corresponds to that emulation The filename is a six digit number plus prg For example 123456 prg This is the file you will download into the printer Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 1 Make the printer sharable on the host PC This is done through the printer s Properties Sharing tab Make note of the printer s shared name 7 Start a command prompt session The Start Menu icon is usually labeled MS DOS Prompt or Command Prompt 8 At the command prompt type NET USE LPT1
399. uide Lever Tear Bar Front Door Open the front door by pulling it upward then forward 4 Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever clockwise until the deck swings upward 5 Thread the media label and liner over the tear bar and around the bottom roller then through the opening at the bottom of the front door and into the printer 60 Back Flange IMPORTANT Label Peel Off Raised Ridge Rewinder Release Slot Lever Liner If you do not complete the following step it will be difficult to remove the liner from the rewinder 6 Turn the release lever on the rewinder counterclockwise and lock it in place This forms a raised ridge along the width of the rewinder 7 Insert the leading edge of the media into the closest slot of the rewinder and slide the media against the back flange 8 Hold the media in the slot and rotate the rewinder one full revolution counterclockwise until the media is taut 9 Remove labels from the liner so that behind the tear bar the liner is void of labels for about 1 5 inches and below the tear bar for about 2 inches 10 Close the front door aqzpojog 11 Complete the media routing as shown above 61 Chapter 2 Using The Optional Internal Rewinder Media Cover ee pojog 12 Press down on both sides of the pivoting deck and rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise 13 Press the FEED key The label advances to
400. ulation has been changed a POR status is sent to the host Typeface e Letter Gothic the default Letter Gothic is a non proportional font where all of the characters take up the same amount of space when printed e Courier Courier is a non proportional monospaced font where all characters take up the same amount of space when printed e OCR A OCR B Optical character recognition fonts printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 144 dpi vertically Both fonts print only at 10 cpi Emulation Submenus Uniform Fonts e Disable the default The typeface selected while in Extended Graphics Mode will be cancelled when the graphics pass is complete e Enable The typeface selected while in Extended Graphics Mode will also be used in Standard Graphics Mode and Normal Mode UPC Descenders PGL This parameter allows you to print bar code descenders when human readable data is not presented in the UPC EAN bar codes e Always the default UPC EAN bar codes are printed with descenders even if there is no human readable data e Never UPC EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if the PDF command is present e Only With PDF UPC EAN bar codes are printed with descenders only when the PDF command is presented UPC Descenders VGL e Enable the default UPC EAN bar codes are printed with descenders even if there is no human readable data e Disable UPC EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if there is no human readable
401. umber and is unique for each NIC It is read only DHCP You can enable disable the DHCP protocol using this option but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting The options are Disable the factory default and Enable NOTE The printer reboots when it is placed online 257 Chapter 3 ETHERNET PARAMS ETHERNET PARAMS ETHERNET PARAMS from page 103 258 NetBIOS ASCII Data IPDS Data Keep Alive Ethernet Job Control Protocol Port Port 3 Timer Speed Enable 9100 5001 3 Minutes Auto Select Standard Disable 0 65535 2 0 65535 2 2 10 Minutes 10 Half Duplex Enhanced 10 Full Duplex Off 100 Half Duplex 100 Full Duplex Offline Process Disable Enable Notes Factory Default This menu appears only if an Network Interface Card NIC is installed 2 Set the port number that works with your host system 3 This menu appears only if the IPDS emulation is installed ETHERNET PARAMS Submenus ETHERNET PARAMS Submenus NetBIOS Protocol e Enable the default The NIC will respond to the NetBIOS protocol Disable The NIC does not recognize the NetBIOS protocol ASCII Data Port This option allows you to set the port number for ASCII print jobs The data port number needs to match your host system setting The range is 0 65535 and the factory default is 9100 IPDS Data Port IPDS emulation only This
402. ures such as Battery Control Select PNE port type and port number Press to select the next main menu Press J or to move within each main menu NOTES 1 This menu appears only if an RFID encoder is installed See the RFID Labeling Reference Manual 2 This menu appears only if a Validator is installed See the Online Data Validator User s Manual Main Menu QUICK RFID VALIDATOR 2 CONFIG SETUP __ CONTROL _ CONTROL yw page 106 page 115 Print Intensity Refer to the RFID Refer to the Online Load Config Print Speed Labeling Reference Data Validator Save Config Print Mode Manual User s Manual Print Config Media Handling Delete Config Paper Feed Shift Power Up Config Label Length Protect Configs Label Width Name Config 1 Ver Image Shift Name Config 2 Hor Image Shift Name Config 3 Orientation Name Config 4 Gap Mark Sensor Name Config 5 Auto Calibrate Name Config 6 Validator Funct 3 Name Config 7 Active IGP Emul Name Config 8 xxx Diagnostics Reset Cfg Names Save Config Auto Save Power Up Config SMT Status PAA Select Tool Press to select the next main menu Press J or T to move within each main menu Press or to cycle through each possible option or value NOTES Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User under PRINTER CONTROL 1 Gap Mark Sensor and Paper Out Sensor work in
403. urrent setting by viewing it on the LCD and use the SERIAL PORT menu to adjust the settings if necessary 3 If the printer parallel interface is being used make sure the parallel interface terminating resistors are correct for the host computer drivers e Start of image is printed an erroneous distance from the top of form e The printer starts to print one label and then another all within the same physical label 1 Make sure the Label Length value matches the actual physical length of the label installed and the run on Auto Calibrate see page 72 These symptoms could be caused by e severely curled labels near the end of a media roll e the media sensor triggering off of a dark preprinted image on the label multiple gaps within the physical label In the MEDIA CONTROL menu set Clip Page to Disable Run a Media Profile see page 74 PF ON If the Media Profile printout shows that preprinted images or an RFID antenna tag has an amplitude approaching the Gap Mark Threshold level position the lower media sensor to avoid the image or increase the Threshold Range percent value in the Calibrate CTRL menu Run Auto Calibrate again and Media Profile to verify there is an improvement 312 Solving Other Printer Problems Table 16 Printer Problems and Solutions continued Symptom Solution Explanation e Loss of one or more serialized labels within a print job e Start of image is prin
404. ustic Specifications Table 30 T5000 Acoustic Noise Levels per ISO 9296 T5X04 T5X06 T5X08 SL5X04 MP2 SL5X06 MP2 Printing 6 IPS 68 dBA 62 dBA 62 dBA Standby 37 dBA 37 dBA 37 dBA Maximum Page Length The maximum page length allowed is dependent on the following factors e The DPI of the printhead 300 DPI uses more memory than 203 DPI therefore 300 DPI printers have a smaller maximum page length than 203 DPI printers e The value of Label Width under the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu As this value increases the maximum page length decreases e The value of Glob Mem Adjust under the PRINTER CONTROL menu As this value increases page memory and the maximum page length decreases Note that this menu item is independent of a configuration that is it does not need to be saved under a configuration number and the printer must be rebooted for it to take effect Also be aware that a maximum page length is based on the ability of the printer to reserve at least one page at the specified length However the printer needs two pages to achieve full throughput Therefore maximum page lengths less than 99 inches should be divided in half when considering throughput Maximum page lengths at 99 inches can achieve full throughput at higher values than 49 5 inches 351 Appendix A 352 B Printer Options Options are offered with the printer to enhance its capabilities and to pro
405. uto Cal is enabled the printer will not perform calibration at power up e Enable Auto Calibrate can be performed from the front panel and if the Pwr Up Auto Cal option is enabled calibration will be performed at power up NOTE Calibration in Peel Off mode does not stop and wait for you to remove peeled labels Therefore be prepared to remove the labels as they are automatically peeled The factory default is Disable 143 Chapter 144 3 CALIBRATE CTRL Min Calib Delta Minimum Calibrate Delta changes the minimum threshold value the sensor s require to detect the difference between the label and a gap notch hole or black mark This allows bolder gaps such as notches or holes to be used as the TOF while intermediate gaps liner can be ignored Increasing the Min Calib Delta makes the sensor s less sensitive to intermediate gaps and noise Decreasing the Min Calib Delta makes the sensor s more sensitive for detecting gaps on low contrast media where there is very little difference between the label and the gap liner The range is from 012 to 050 NOTE When Gap Mark Sensor Disable Gap or Mark the default is 12 When Gap Mark Sensor Advanced Gap or Advanced Notch the default is 20 Use Label Length Determines whether or not the Label Length value set in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL menu is used during Auto Calibrate e Enable The Label Length value set in the QUICK SETUP or MEDIA CONTROL me
406. vanced Gap or Advanced Notch the printer will subtract the Gap Length value in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu from the Sensed Distance value obtained when the Auto or Manual Calibrate was performed Setting the label length to Automatic sets the Use Label Length menu to Disable in the CALIBRATE CTRL menu Peel Present This feature allows you to select which part of a label gets presented to the peel bar The options include e Next TOF Media is moved to next TOF after image printing before presenting media to the peel off position This option is for standard labels where the gap mark length is less than the printhead to peel bar distance about 1 2 inch End Of Form Media is moved to the end of form after image printing before presenting media to the peel off position This option is for labels that have wide gaps that result in labels falling off the peel bar This setting works with non mark media where the end of form is not the same as the next TOF This setting is useful for die cut labels where the physical bottom of the label can be detected by the media sensor End Of Image Image prints and media moves to peel off position This option is for labels that have wide gap marks that result in labels falling off the peel bar This selection is intended for cases where presenting the next TOF or end of form still results in labels falling off the peel bar This menu selection works best if the length of the image
407. vide a large degree of application flexibility A description of the option complement is given below Field installable options include installation instructions Hardware Options Media Cutter The printer may be ordered with a cutter mechanism installed for cutting tags and label liner or the option can be installed by an authorized service representative at a later date Once installed the printer can be configured to automatically cut media after each or a specified number of labels is printed Internal Rewinder The internal rewinder supports Peel Off and Batch Rewind Media Handling modes The printer can be ordered with a rewinder or it can be field installed at a later date by an authorized service representative Media Cutter Tray This option is used exclusively with the media cutter option to collect cut labels or tag stock This option can be field installed by the operator Memory Expansion The printer internal Flash memory can be upgraded from a 8MB SIMM to a 16MB SIMM providing additional memory for forms logos and fonts The printer can be ordered with the memory option installed or it can be field installed by an authorized service representative at a later date Online Data Validator This option provides the capability for verifying printed barcode quality during the printing process The printer may be ordered with the Online Barcode Validator installed or the option can be field installed by an aut
408. will only be available if Coax or Twinax is selected from the HOST INTERFACE menu NOTE For more information consult the Coax Twinax Programmer s Reference Manual Simp Prot Conv Simple Protocol Converter The Simple Protocol Converter SPC option allows those who use add on coax or twinax protocol converters to produce the same output on a Printronix thermal printer with the Coax Twinax CTHI capability as done using a non CT printer with the third party converter interfaces The SPC gives the printer the operational ability to connect to any PC or network system supporting parallel or serial interfaces and to three different IBM host systems e System 3x e AS 400 e 327x Control Units 149 Chapter 150 3 PRINTER CONTROL The SPC will support the same models as Printronix standard Twinax printers The printer emulations supported by the SPC are Twinax 5225 and Coax 3287 The SPC also provides a range of interfaces available in your thermal printer Centronics serial coax and twinax Also supported are Epson Proprinter XL P Series Serial Matrix VGL and PGL emulations The SPC has the ability to handle multiple print jobs concurrently through coax twinax and parallel and serial interfaces This is accomplished through the Auto Switching feature see Auto Switching on page 293 Because of hardware restrictions coax and twinax cannot be selected together For more information refer to the Coax Twinax
409. y the Label Length value in the MEDIA CONTROL menu or by the Host Forms Length value sent via the software Any gaps notches holes or black marks that exist prior to reaching the Label Length or Host Forms Length value are ignored When Clip Page is set to Disable Mark and Gap media sensing reliability can be improved and the sensor problems described below can be fixed e The image starts to print at an erroneous distance from the top of form especially towards the end of a roll where the media is severely curled or scalloped e The image is incorrectly positioned as a result of the media sensor triggering off of a dark pre printed image on the label or multiple gaps within the label e The printer starts to print one label and then another all on the same physical label especially at the end of a roll where the media is severely curled e An occasional blank label appears within a print job in between printed labels When Clip Page is set to Disable the printer ignores any pre printed dark marks or multiple gaps on a label that could mistakenly be detected as the next top of form position based on the specified Label Length value The Label Length option is in the MEDIA CONTROL menu NOTE When Clip Page Disable the correct Label Length value must be entered If the value is too long the printer will ignore the actual gap or mark it needs to detect When using Gap sensing the Label Length value is equal to the physical l
410. yne aioeds y sAe dsip UOIPUOD yne e Hung asn ul uonejnwa pue adA aoeejul y SNIINO sAeldsiq yoeo SJOJOBICYO 9 JO SMO om y m Aejdsip jeysA9 pinby payybipjoeq y a97 Aeidsiq 1eysAuQ pinbiy UOIPUOD yne e Buunp seyse s HO UOI IPUOD yne e Buunp seyse s aulo s 4 uud 84 U UM HO uUOIl IpUoo yne e Bunnp s ysejd JSOY y WO e ep ydeooe pue zud 0 Apea ouljuo s 1 zU1d y UBYM ji SARIS UOI IPUOD Ne e s 3194 UBM JO u jyo uuo SI Je ULd y USYM SO edIPU sns aul UO apo nusyy ul uoljouny pOIN OUlIHO ul uoloun4 po eUul UO ul uoljoun4 uoldii9seg JoyeoIpu 34 Control Panel Control Panel Keys snuowqns UIUJIM SON eA uo do s uaw a1u snu w urew yBnouy 4 u s jo9S gez abed UO S S JOU 88S sus yed yud S L y yno SI 019S pueg nuew s s L JOU 24 S 29 S uoN poN nue ul Aoy LNSINAYONI 1S9 y Se eUIWAEl uee r Bulssejd 4S9 94 S YIUI peAedsip s onsoubelg e YM Key H1N3 r ey Bulssald Key LNIYd LSAL INldd 1S3L dn jane uo uo12 Ss NUewW u uno y S O1NS 5u a jeqe uo epaw y s ovuenpy 4 Bua aqe uo eipaw y s ovueanpy apo nusyy u Aey dN Aey a334 snuawqns UIUYIM S njen uoljdo suwaq Snuaw urew suolyesnBjuoo J uud p 10 s 1d Jo pue Alojoe y peo
411. you to set the slew speed The maximum speed depends on your printer model see Table 18 on page 345 The slew speed can be set to Automatic Manual 6 ips or 1 to 10 ips The factory default is Automatic Print Direction This option determines the basic print image orientation NOTE Print Direction will not change the orientation of any print test patterns in the DIAGNOSTIC menu Print Direction has two options e Head First e Foot First For example with Portrait orientation when you select Head First the top of form will come out of the printer first Conversely when you select Foot First the bottom of form will come out first FEED 4 Head First Foot First 129 Chapter 3 MEDIA CONTROL Print Direction and Orientation are two independent options that can be combined to produce the following results depending on the Active IGP Emulation Table 4 Head First Print Direction Orientation Option Result in Active IGP Emulations Option IGP PGL or IGP VGL Head First Portrait Portrait Head First Landscape Landscape Head First Inv Portrait Inv Portrait Head First Inv Landscape Inv Landscape Table 5 Foot First Print Direction Orientation Option Result in Active IGP ZGL Option Emulation Foot First Portrait Portrait Foot First Landscape Inv Landscape Foot First Inv Portrait Inv Portrait Foot First Inv Landscape Landscape The
412. your multifunction thermal printer uses an inline thermal printhead The thermal printer operates differently from a line matrix or laser printer because the thermal printer uses a printhead with heating elements and special paper or ribbon The Printing Process The thermal printhead allows two modes of operation Direct Thermal During direct thermal printing the thermal printhead selectively heats small rectangular thermal dots When these contact the coated thermal paper the dyes and developers in the coating react to the heat and develop an image This mode of printing is generally used for short term labeling applications e Thermal Transfer During thermal transfer printing the heated thermal dots contact a thermal ribbon The heat reacts with the ribbon and bonds the image to the paper This method is used especially for abrasive long storage applications and for specialized applications such as in extreme environmental conditions or where tamper proofing is required NOTE Thermal transfer is not supported on 4 inch DT model printers 25 Chapter 1 Thermal Consumables Dynamic Print Control Dynamic print control is a unique feature of your thermal printer that provides excellent print quality by preventing unevenness of print density Print quality largely depends on how the thermal paper or the thermal ribbon and thermal transfer paper responds to the heat of the thermal printhead During printing the therm
413. ys on the LCD 2 You can move through configuration main menus in two ways e Press the key to move to the right e Press the key to move right or the key to move left 85 Chapter 3 Overview NOTE In menus with numeric ranges of more than 50 numbers hold down the or key for more than 2 seconds to move through the range in increments of 5 To move in increments of 1 again release your hold on the or key Step Press LCD Notes 1 1 I OFFLINE PAUSE 2 Ae 52 1 ENTER SWITCH Allows you to make UNLOCKED configuration changes 3 MENU MODE Enables the printer QUICK SETUP configuration menu 4 L UNTIL Print Mode Transfer 5 or Print Mode Cycles through the Direct choices 6 P Print Mode Selects the Direct Direct transfer mode 86 Figure 2 Moving within the Configuration Menu Selecting A Menu Option To select an option you need to press the J key By default however the key is locked when the printer is turned on to prevent accidental changes to the configuration menu If you press the key when the key is locked the message ENTER SWITCH LOCKED displays on the LCD for one second and the value will not be selected To unlock the key press the J and keys simultaneously This toggles the ENTER LOCK function e If this function is performed while the key is locked the message ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED displays for one
414. yte Bit Printer Status 0 Set when the label has printed 1 Set when the label is presented 2 Set while the printer is online 3 Always set 4 Set printing in the batch mode 5 Set during a Ribbon fault 6 Set during a Paper Out fault 7 Set during a Head Open fault The factory default is Disable Framing Errors These are possible errors that can occur when serial interface settings of the printer do not match those of the host computer e Enable factory default If a framing error occurs a fault message will display on the control panel e Disable If a framing error occurs a fault message will not display on the control panel Offline Process e Disable default When set to disable the printer does not process serial data while offline e Enable When set to enable the printer continues to process but not print the current serial job while the printer is offline until the printer s buffer is full C T PORT C T PORT Submenus Port Type Device Timeout Report Status Address Twinax Coax Disable Address 1 10 sec Disable Address 0 6 5 60 sec Enable Notes Factory Default 1 This menu appears only if the CTHI option is installed C T PORT Submenus Port Type This item selects the desired active CTHI interface and appears only when the CTHI option is installed The factory default is Twinax Device Address Allows you to se

Printronix T5308R

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents